MicroTech Unit Controller

MicroTech Unit Controller
Operations Manual
OM 920-6
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: OM 920
Date: June 2015
MicroTech® III Unit Controller for
Commercial Rooftop, Applied Rooftop
and Self-Contained Systems
Models: DPS, MPS, RAH, RCS, RDS, RDT, RFS, RPS, SWP and SWT
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Dehum Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Energy Recovery Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Keypad/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Head Pressure Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Evap Cond Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Navigation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Alarm Limits Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Service Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Alarm Output Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Rapid Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Alarm Delays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Keypad/Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Service Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Quick Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Modbus Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
View/Set Unit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
D3 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Unit Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sensor Offsets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
BMS Communications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Flow Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SAF Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Trending Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
RF/EF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Points 1-8 (Fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Points 9-24 (From List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Points 25-27 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Min OA Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Points 28-30 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Heating Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Trending Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Date/Time/Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About this Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Commission Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Alarm Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
SAF Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
RF/EF Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cooling Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Variable Compressor Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Econo Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Min OA Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Heating Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER2
www.DaikinApplied.com
Table of Contents
Operator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Compressor Control for RoofPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Determining Unit State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Compressor Control for Maverick II . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Off Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Condenser Fan Operation for Variable Speed
Compressor Low Ambient Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Start Up Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recirculating Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fan Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Determining Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Determining Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Determining Cooling Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Determining Heat Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Determining Economizer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Determining Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Variable Frequency Drive for VFD Compressor . 123
Variable Speed Scroll Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
MPS Standard Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . 127
Heating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
RTU Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
MPS Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Indoor Air Fan - ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fan Failure Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity . . . . . . . . . 90
Determining RF/EF Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Determining Occupancy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Determining Occupancy Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Unoccupied Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Temperature Control Configurations . . . . . . . . . . 94
Heat/Cool Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Control Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Energy Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Outside Air Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
100% Outside Air Damper Control,
Two Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Economizer to Cooling Operating State . . . . . . . 105
Waterside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Bypass Valve Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Water Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling: Multistage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling: Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint
Reset - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
www.DaikinApplied.com
3
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Introduction
This manual provides information regarding the MicroTech
III control system. It specifically describes the operation and
programmable options for units with constant air volume (CAV)
control and variable air volume (VAV) control.
The MicroTech III Controller is a self contained device that
is capable of complete, standalone operation. Information
in the controller can be displayed and modified by using the
keypad/display in the units main control panel. For installation
and startup instructions and general information regarding a
particular unit, refer to the applicable model-specific installation
and maintenance manual.
For installation and startup instructions and general information
regarding a particular rooftop unit, refer to the applicable
model-specific installation and maintenance manual (Table 1).
Introduction
WARNING
Excessive moisture in the control panel can cause
hazardous working conditions and improper
equipment operation. When servicing this equipment
during rainy weather, the electrical components in the
main control panel must be protected from the rain.
CAUTION
Extreme temperature hazard. Can cause damage to
system components. The MicroTech III controller is
designed to operate in ambient temperatures from -20°F
to 125°F. It can be stored in ambient temperatures from
-40°F to 140°F. It is designed to be stored and operated
in relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing).
Table 1: Installation and Maintenance Resources
Unit
Manual
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller BACnet IP Communications
IM 916
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller BACnet MSTP Communications
IM 917
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller BACnet LON Communications
IM 918
MicroTech III Unit Controller
IM 919
MicroTech III Remote Unit Interface
IM 1005
RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015C-105C
IM 926
RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015D-140D
IM 893
SWP Self-Contained (012 to 130)
IM 1032
RoofPak RAH/RDS
IM 987
Maverick II Rooftop 62-75 ton
IM 991
Maverick II Rooftop 15-50 ton
IM 1058
NOTICE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with this instruction manual, may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user is required to correct
the interference at his own expense. Daikin disclaims
any liability resulting from any interference or for
the correction thereof.
CAUTION
Static sensitive components. A static discharge
while handling electronic circuit boards can cause
damage to the components. Discharge any static
electrical charge by touching the bare metal inside the
main control panel before performing any service work.
Never unplug any cables, circuit board terminal blocks,
relay modules, or power plugs while power is applied to
the panel.
Getting Started
This manual contains information designed to assist the field
technician with unit setup. The technician will need to be
familiar with the following topics at a minimum to successfully
set up unit operation.
• Keypad navigation/editing/passwords
• Control Mode
• Occ Mode
• DSP Setpoint
• BSP Setpoint
• Heat/Cool Changeover (Zone Setpoints)
• DAT Clg Setpoint
• DAT Htg Setpoint
• Clg Enable (OAT/EWT lockout)
• Htg Enable (OAT lockout)
• Econo Enable (Changeover temp/Enthalpy switch)
• Ventilation Limit/OA damper
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Can cause personal injury or
equipment damage. This equipment must be properly
grounded. Connections and service to the MicroTech II
control panel must be performed only by personnel that
are knowledgeable in the operation of the equipment
being controlled.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER4
www.DaikinApplied.com
Using the Keypad/Display
Using the Keypad/Display
The keypad/display consists of a 5-line by 22 character display,
three keys and a “push and roll” navigation wheel. There is an
Alarm Button, Menu (Home) Button, and a Back Button. The
wheel is used to navigate between lines on a screen (page)
and to increase and decrease changeable values when editing.
Pushing the wheel acts as an Enter Button.
The keypad/display Information is organized into Menu groups;
Main Menu, Quick Menu, View/Set Unit Menu, Commission
Unit Menu, Manual Control Menu, Service Menu, Unit
Configuration Menu and Alarm list Menus.
The first line on each page includes the page title and the line
number to which the cursor is currently “pointing”. The line
numbers are X/Y to indicate line number X of a total of Y lines
for that page. The left most position of the title line includes an
“up” arrow to indicate there are pages “above” the currently
displayed items, a “down” arrow to indicate there are pages
“below” the currently displayed items or an “up/down” arrow
to indicate there are pages “above and below” the currently
displayed page.
The Main Menu allows the user to enter a password, access
the Quick Menu pages, view the current unit state, access the
Alarm List Menu as well as access to information about this
unit. The Quick Menu provides access to status information
indicating the current operating condition of the unit. The
View/Set Unit Menus include basic menus and items required
to setup the unit for general operation. These include such
things are control mode, occupancy mode and heating and
cooling setpoints. The Commission Unit Menus include more
advanced items for “tuning” unit operation such as PI loop
parameters and time delays. The Manual Control Menu allows
service personnel to test unit specific operation manually.
The Unit Configuration Menu allows the user to access to the
unit specific configuration information. These generally do not
needing changing or accessing unless there is a fundamental
change to or a problem with the unit operation. The Alarm Lists
Menu includes active alarm and alarm log information.
Each line on a page can contain status only information or
include changeable data fields. When a line contains status
only information and the cursor is on that line all but the value
field of that line is highlighted meaning the text is white with
a black box around it. When the line contains a changeable
value and the cursor is at that line, the entire line is highlighted.
Each line on a page may also be defined as a “jump” line,
meaning pushing the navigation wheel will cause a “jump” to
a new page. An arrow is displayed to the far right of the line to
indicate it is a “jump” line and the entire line is highlighted when
the cursor is on that line.
NOTE: Only menus and items that are applicable to the
specific unit configuration are displayed.
Figure 1: Keypad Controls
www.DaikinApplied.com
5
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Using the Keypad/Display
Passwords
Various menu functions are accessible or inaccessible,
depending on the access level of the user, and the password
they enter, if any. There are four access levels, including no
password, Level 2, Level 4, and Level 6, with Level 2 having
the highest level of access. Without entering a password, the
user has access only to basic status menu items. Entering
the Level 6 password (5321) allows access to the Alarm Lists
Menu, Quick Menu, and the View/Set Unit Menus group.
Entering the Level 4 password (2526) allows similar access
as Level 6 with the addition of the Commission Unit Menu,
Manual Control, and Service Menu groups. Entering the Level
2 password (6363) allows similar access as Level 4 with the
addition of the Unit Configuration Menu.
NOTE: Alarms can be acknowledged without entering a
password.
The main password page is displayed when the keypad/display
is first accessed, the Home Key is pressed, the Back Key is
pressed multiple times, or if the keypad/display has been idle
longer than the Password Timeout (default 10 minutes). The
main password page provides access to enter a password,
access the Quick Menu, view the current Unit State, access the
alarm lists or view information about the unit.
Figure 2: Password Main Page
AHU 01
1/5
Enter Password
Quick Menu
Unit State=________
Alarm Lists
About This AHU
In the Navigation Mode, when a line on a page contains no
editable fields all but the value field of that line is highlighted
meaning the text is white with a black box around it. When the
line contains an editable value field the entire line is inverted
when the cursor is pointing to that line.
When the navigation wheel is turned clockwise, the cursor
moves to the next line (down) on the page. When the wheel is
turned counter-clockwise the cursor moves to the previous line
(up) on the page. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the
cursor moves.
When the Back Button is pressed the display reverts back to
the previously displayed page. If the Back button is repeated
pressed the display continues to revert one page back along
the current navigation path until the “main menu” is reached.
When the Menu (Home) Button is pressed the display reverts
to the “main page.”
Edit Mode
Figure 3: Password Entry Page
Enter Password
Navigation Mode
When the Alarm Button is depressed, the Alarm Lists menu is
displayed.
The password field initially has a value **** where each *
represents an adjustable field. These values can be changed
by entering the Edit Mode described below.
Enter Password
Entering an invalid password has the same effect as continuing
without entering a password. Once a valid password has been
entered, the controller allows further changes and access
without requiring the user to enter a password until either the
password timer expires or a different password is entered.
The default value for this password timer is 10 minutes. It is
changeable from 3 to 30 minutes via the Timer Settings menu.
1/1
The Editing Mode is entered by pressing the navigation wheel
while the cursor is pointing to a line containing an editable field.
Once in the edit mode pressing the wheel again causes the
editable field to be highlighted. Turning the wheel clockwise
while the editable field is highlighted causes the value to be
increased. Turning the wheel counter-clockwise while the
editable field is highlighted causes the value to be decreased.
The faster the wheel is turned the faster the value is increased
or decreased. Pressing the wheel again cause the new value
to be saved and the keypad/display to leave the edit mode and
return to the navigation mode.
****
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER6
www.DaikinApplied.com
Using the Keypad/Display
Service Timers
Manual Control
A user may override timers for a period of up to 240 minutes
by setting the Service Timer to a non-zero number. When the
Service Timer is not zero, the times listed below are set to the
Service Time (Default = 20 seconds) instead of the normal
values. This allows the unit to be run through its operating
states without having to wait for the normal time delays to
expire. These times revert to the standard values when the
Service Time count down to zero or is set to zero by the user.
A user may manually control outputs to check operation of
components when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl. When
Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the unit is disabled and
the unit is shut down in the normal manner if it is operating.
Outputs listed in the Manual Control menu of the Keypad/
Display section can then be controlled directly until Manual
Control is set to Normal.
NOTE: Manual Control will be set to No automatically after
240 minutes so that a person could not put the unit
into Manual Mode control and walk away from the unit
and let it run at the manual settings.
The affected times are:
• Cooling Stage Time
• Heating Stage Time
When Manual Control is set to Yes, the Control Mode is set to
Off so that the unit will not restart automatically.
• Start Initial Time
• Recirculation
When Manual Control is set to Normal all digital outputs in the
Manual Control menu are set to Off and all the analog outputs
are set to 0.0% so that all outputs are in the Off or minimum
position when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl.
• ZeroOATime
Rapid Start
All alarms except those listed below are overridden during
Manual Control.
The user may elect to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit
power up by setting the Rapid Start flag to Yes. When this flag
is set to Yes, the Service Timer is set to 10 minutes whenever
the power is reset to the controller.
During manual control, the unit will respond in the normal
manner to the following alarms.
• Emergency Stop Fault
• Duct High Limit
• High Return Temperature
• High Discharge Temperature
• Low Discharge Temperature
• High Pressure - Circuit # 1
• High Pressure - Circuit # 2
• Low Pressure - Circuit # 1
• Low Pressure - Circuit # 2
www.DaikinApplied.com
7
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
The following is a description of the MicroTech III menu structure. These menus and items can all be displayed with the keypad/
display. Menu items displayed will change based on the selected unit configuration.
Figure 4: Main Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Main Menu
Enter Password
Quick Menu
View/Set Unit
Unit State=_________
►
►
►
See page 6
See page 21 – 22
Enter Password
Quick Menu
Enter Password *******
►
Unit Status=________
MWU Status=
Dehum Status=
Ctrl Mode= Off
Occ Mode= Auto
HP Mode=
Commission Unit
Manual Control
Service Menus
Trending
Unit Maintenance
BMS Communications
Unit Configuration
Alarm Lists
About This Unit
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
Unit State=__________
Unit Status=_________
MWU Status=_________
Dehum Status=________
Ctrl Mode= Off
Occ Mode= Auto/Net
HP Mode= Auto
Clg Capacity= XXX%
OAD/Econ Cap= XXX%
Htg Capacity= XXX%
Supl Htg Cap= XXX%
Reheat Cap= XXX%
Control Temp= XXX%
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F
Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F
Disch Air= XXX°F
See page 70
See page 71 – 73
See page 62
BMS Communications
Unit Configuration
Alarm Lists
LON Set-Up
BACnet MSTP Set-Up
BACnet IP Set-Up
D-Net Set-Up
Apply Changes= No
Unit Type= RTU(0)
Control Type= DAT(1)
Clg Type= Comp(1)
Comp Config= 424(1)
Gen Clg Stgs=/VFDCmpCFG= 8
Low Ambient= No(0)
Cond Ctrl= Std2(0)
OA Dmpr/Econ= AirEc(3)
OA Flow Stn= None(0)
Htg Type= None(0)
Htg Stages= 1
Max Heat Rise= 100
SAF Type= CAV(0)
RAF Type= CAV(0)
RF/EF Ctrl= Track(1)
2ndDSPSnsr= No(0)
EFT/LCT Snsr= No(0)
Energy Rcvy= None(0)
Clg Circ Type= 2Air(2)
Head P Ctrl= No(0)
Bypass Ctrl= Slave(0)
Unit Size= 050
Refrig Type= R410A(2)
Reheat Type= None(0)
Unit Voltage= 460/60(2)
EV Type= EVBSag
Apply Changes= No
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Network Unit Set-Up
Comm Slot 1= 0
►
►
►
►
►
Comm Slot 2= 0
Comm Slot 3= 0
For more detail go to:
Figure 8, page 20
See page 23 – 32
View/Set Unit
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F
DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F
Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F
Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F
SAF Speed= XXX%
Duct Press= X.Xin
DuctSP Spt= 1.0in
RF/EF Cap= XXX%
Bldg Press= X.XXin
BldgSP Spt= 0.05in
IAQ PPM= XXXXppm
OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
OA Temp= XXX°F
EW Temp= XXX°F
Rel Humidity= XXX%
Unit Status/Settings
Occupancy
Temperatures
Flow Status
SAF Spd Control
RF/EF Control
Cooling
Economizer
Min OA Damper
Heating
Dehumidification
Date/Time/Schedules
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
For more detail go to:
Figure 5, page 10
See page 78
►
►
For more detail go to:
Figure 7, page 16
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER8
About This Unit
SO_Item= 123456_12345
Unit SN= FBOU123456789
App Version= 2506017xxx
Cf1-15= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Cf6-29= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Main BSP= X.XX
LON BSP= X.XX
LON App Ver= X.XX
BACnet BSP= X.XX
D-Net BSP= X.XX
HMI GUID=
xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
OBH GUID=
xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
www.DaikinApplied.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 33 – 58
See page 59 – 61
See page 62 – 68
See page 74 – 77
See page 69
Commission Unit
Manual Control
Service Menus
Trending
Unit Maintenance
Trending Ena= No
Apply Chgs= No
Sample Time= 300s
TrendOnOff= Off
Export Data= No
Clear Trend= Done
Points 1–8 (Fixed)
Points 9–24 (from List)
Points 25–27 (with IDs)
Points 28–30 (with IDs)
Operating Hours
Unit Set-Up
Timer Settings
SAF Set-Up
RF/EF Set-Up
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up
INV Cmp Set-Up
Var Cmp Set-Up
Econo Set-Up
Min OA Set-Up
Heating Set-Up
OA Fan Set-Up
Exp Valve Set-Up
Defrost Set-Up
Dehum Set-Up
Energy Rec Set-Up
Head Pressure Set-Up
Evap Cond Set-Up
D3 Set-Up
Alarm Configuration
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
For more detail go to:
Figure 6, page 12
Manual Control= Normal
Supply Fan= Off
SAF Spd Cmd= 0%
Manual Ctrl= Normal
Supply Fan= Off
SAF Spd Cmd= 0%
INV/OF Ena= Off
INV Cmp= Off
INV Cmp Cmd= 0%
Comp 3= Off
OA Fan= Off
OA Fan Cmd= 0%
4 Way Valve= Off
RcvSol Valve=Off
BP Sol Valve= Off
EVI Cmd= 0%
EVO Cmd= 0%
RF/EF Fan= Off
RF/EF Spd Cmd= 0%
OAD/Econo= 0%
OAD OpCl= Close
Var Cmp= Off
Var Cmp Cmd= 0%
VCmp Emg Stop= Nrml
Comp 1= Off
Comp 2= Off
Comp 3= Off
Comp 4= Off
Comp 5= Off
Comp 6= Off
Comp 7= Off
Comp 8= Off
U1 Comp 1= Off
U1 Comp 2= Off
U2 Comp 1= Off
U2 Comp 2= Off
Cond Sol 1= Off
Cond Sol 2= Off
www.DaikinApplied.com
CFan Outpt 1= Off
CFan Outpt 2= Off
CFan Outpt 3= Off
BP/WR Valve= 0%
CW Valve= 0%
ExhFan Out 1= Off
ExhFan Out 2= Off
ECond VFD= Off
ECFan Spd Cmd= 0%
EC Dm Valve= Close
Sump Pump= Off
Sep Flsh Vlv= Off
SV1= Off
SV2= Off
Gas Htg On/Off= Off
Htg Valve= 0%
SCR Out= 0%
F&BP Damper= 0%
Htg Stg 1= Off
SCR Ena 1= Off
Htg Stg 2= Off
SCR Ena 2= Off
Htg Stg 3= Off
Htg Stg 4= Off
Htg Stg 5= Off
Htg Stg 6= Off
Reheat Valve= 0%
RH Output= Off
LSCRH Valve= Off
HGBP Valve= Off
ERec Wheel= Off
ER Whl Cmd= 0%
ERBP Dmpr Cl= Off
ERBP Dmpr Op= Off
Cond Wtr Pump= Off
Alm Output= Off
Fan Op Out= Off
Timer Settings
Operating Hours
Save/Restore Settings
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Alarm Configuration
Analog Input Status
Universal I/O Status
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
Network Input Status
Modbus Status
D3 Status
Sensor Offsets
Reset Counter= XXXX
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
For more detail go to:
Figure 9, page 20
For more detail go to:
Figure 7, page 16
9
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 5: View/Set Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 23 – 32
View/Set Unit
Unit Status/Settings
Occupancy
Temperatures
Flow Status
SAF Spd Control
RF/EF Control
Cooling
Economizer
Min OA Damper
Heating
Dehumidification
Date/Time/Schedules
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
See page 23 – 24
See page 25
See page 26
See page 27
See page 27 and 35
See page 28 and 38
Unit Status/Settings
Occupancy
Temperatures
Flow Status
SAF Speed Control
RF/EF Control
Unit State= ___________
Unit Status= __________
MWU Status= _________
Dehum Status= ________
Ctrl Mode= Off
Clg Status= ___________
Htg Status= ___________
SuplHtgStatus= ________
Econo Status= _________
Clg Capacity= XXX%
Htg Capacity= XXX%
Supl Htg Cap= XXX%
Reheat Cap= XXX%
SAF Speed= XXX%
RF/EF Cap= XXX%
OAD/Econo Cap=XXX%
Rel Humidiy= XXX%
Net Emrg Ovrd= Normal
Net App Mode= Auto
Occupancy= __________
Occ Mode= Auto/Net
OccSrc= _____________
UnoccSrc= ___________
Tnt Ovrde Tm= 0 min
Control Temp= XXX°F
Disch Temp= XXX°F
Return Air= XXX°F
Space Temp= XXX°F
OA Temp= XXX°F
EF/LC Temp= XXX°F
EW Temp= XXX°F
Mixed Air= XXX°F
ER LAT= XXX°F
ER EAT= XXX°F
Sump Temp= XXX°F
PA Temp= XXX°F
DRT1= XXX°F
DRT2= XXX°F
DRT3= XXX°F
SRT= XXX°F
DFT= XXX°F
IRT= XXX°F
ORT= XXX°F
INVCompTemp= XXX°F
Airflow= ______________
Waterflow= ___________
Water Pump= _________
Supply Fan= __________
Ret/Exh Fan= _________
SAF Speed= XXX%
Speed Cmd= XXX%
Duct Press= X.Xin
DuctSP Spt= 1.0in
IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM
OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
Bldg Press= X.XXin
BldgSP Spt= 0.05in
RF/EF Cap= XXX%
Speed Cmd= XXX%
Bldg Press- X.XXin
BldgSP Spt= 0.050in
www.DaikinApplied.com10
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 28 and 41
See page 28 and
44 – 45
See page 29 and 46
See page 29
and 46 – 48
See page 30 and
51 – 52
See page 31 and 93
– 96
Cooling
Economizer
Min OA Damper
Heating
Dehumidification
Date/Time/Schedules
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F
OAD/Econo Pos= XXX%
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Min OA Pos= XXX%
FreeClgStatus = _______
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F
Min OA Pos= XXX%
Vent Limit= 20%
LoFlo V Lmt= 30%
DCV Limit= 10%
Min OA Src= __________
Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F
Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F
MWU Spt= 70.0°F
DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F
Dehum Status= ________
Rel Humidity= XXX%
Dewpoint= XXX°F
Dehum Method= None
RH Setpoint= 50%
Dewpoint Spt= 50°F
Reheat Spt= XXX°F
Reheat Cap= XXX%
www.DaikinApplied.com11
Time= hh:mm:ss
Date= MM/DD/YY
UTC Diff= -60min
DAILY SCHEDULE
Mon= HH:MM-HH:MM
Tue= HH:MM-HH:MM
Wed= HH:MM-HH:MM
Thu= HH:MM-HH:MM
Fri= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sat= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sun= HH:MM-HH:MM
Hol= HH:MM-HH:MM
HOLIDAY DATES
Hol 1=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 2=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 3=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 4=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 5=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 6=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 7=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 8=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 9=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 10=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
ONE EVENT SCHEDULE
Beg= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
End= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
OPTIMAL START
Enable= No
Htg Range= 0.4 ºF/min
Htg OAT= 35 ºF
Des Htg OAT= 0 ºF
Clg Rate= 0.4 ºF/min
Clg OAT= 85 ºF
Des Clg OAT= 95 ºF
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
DLS Strt Mon= Mar
DLS Strt Wk= 2nd Week
DLS End Mon= Nov
DLS End Wk= 1st Week
DLS Enable= Auto
PURGE
Max Purge= 0min
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 6: Commission Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 33 – 58
Commission Unit
Unit Set-Up
Timer Settings
SAF Set-Up
RF/EF Set-Up
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up
INV Cmp Set-Up
Var Cmp Set-Up
Econo Set-Up
Min OA Set-Up
Heating Set-Up
OA Fan Set-Up
Exp Valve Set-Up
Defrost Set-Up
Dehum Set-Up
Energy Rec Set-Up
Head Pressure Set-Up
Evap Cond Set-Up
D3 Set-Up
Alarm Configuration
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
See page 33
See page 33 – 34
See page 35 – 37
Unit Set-Up
Timer Settings
SAF Set-Up
Apply Changes= No
RAT Sensor= Yes
OAT Sensor= Yes
Space Sensor= Digtl/Net
Eng Units= English
Unit Name= xxxxxxxxxxxx
Rapid Start= No
Rapid Start Tm= 10min
DO10 Clg= FanOp
Service Time= 0min
Start Up= 180s
Recirculate= 180s
Zero OA Time= 0min
Tnt Override= 120min
Post Heat= 0s
Pwd Timeout= 10min
Low DAT= 6min
ClgStateDelay= 300s
Bypass Valve= 300s
Clg Stg Time= 5min
Htg Stg Time= 5min
Air Flw Ign= 120s
MinExStrtTm= 120s
MinExStopTm= 120s
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min
EvCnd Stg Tm= 10min
WRV Init Tm= 60s
Min WRV Time= 60s
Htg Wrmup Tm= 240s
Htg Hld Period= 240s
RH Srg Time= 10min
Srvc Time Inc= 20s
OffHtCIDelay= 120s
SAF Ctrl= DSP
AplyInputChgs= No
CO2 Input= None
CFM Input= None
BSP Input= No
SPEED CONTROL
Rem SAF Cap= 33%
DSP CONTROL
DSP DB= 0.1in
VFD Ramp Time= 60s
Min Period= 5s
Max Spd Chg= 15%
Duct Press 1= X.Xin
Duct Press 2= X.Xin
1 ZONE VAV CONTROL
Min Clg Spd= 40%
Max Clg Spd= 100%
Min Htg Spd= 40%
Max Htg Spd= 100%
Space Period= 60s
Space Gain= 0.8
Space PAT= 400s
Space Max Chg= 10%
List continues
on, page 14
INV Cmp Set-Up
COMPRESSOR STATUS
Clg State= ____________
Htg State= ____________
INV Cmp Spd= XXX.X%
INV Spd Cmd= XXX.X%
Comp 3=_____________
Prev Standby=_______
Compressor Limiting
Fault Code Details
►
►
►1
INV Port Temp= XXX.XºF
INV Fin Temp= XXX.XºF
INV Cmp Amps= XX.XA
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS
PTD= XXX.Xpsi
PTS= XXX.Xpsi
4 Way Valve=__________
RcvrSol Valve=_________
BP Sol Valve=_________
COMPRESSOR SETUP
Clg Lo OAT Lk=
55°F (RTU/SCU)
0°F (MPS)
25°F (DPS)
Htg Lo OAT Lk=
0.0ºF
45°F (100% OA w/o ER)
Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0ºF
EffHtgOATLk= _______ºF
OAT Diff= 2ºF
INV Period= 20s
INV Gain= 2.5
INV PAT= 10s
INV Max Chg= 15%
IFB COMM STATUS
►2
Date/Time
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Compressor Limiting
1, 2 See the expansion
information on page 19
Clg Press Lmtg=_______
Htg Press Lmtg=_______
C Ratio Lmtg=_________
Ref DLT Lmtg=_________
INV Brd Lmtg=_________
INV Man Dsbl= Enable
Comp3 ManDsbl= Enable
CO2 CONTROL
Min PPM= 0PPM
Max PPM= 2000PPM
V/A @ Min PPM= 0V
V/A @ Max PPM= 10V
Min SAF PPM= 800PPM
Max SAF PPM= 1100PPM
Min PPM Spd= 50%
Max PPM Spd= 100%
CFM CONTROL
Min CFM= 0CFM
Max CFM= 10000CFM
V/A @ Min CFM= 0V
V/A @ Max CFM= 10 V
SAF CFM DB= 3%
SAF CFM Period= 30s
SAF CFM Gain= 0.1
SAF CFM MxChg= 5%
BSP CONTROL
BSP DB= 0.01in
BSP Period= 5s
BSP Gain= 0.2
Max Spd Chg= 4%
SAF SETUP
SAF Ctrl Dly= 30s
Min Speed= 33%
VAVBox Out= _________
Max SAF Hz=
Max Vent Speed= 100%
Max SAF RPM= 2600
ECM Status= __________
See page 42 – 43
See page 44 – 45
Var Comp Set-Up
Econo Set-Up
COMPRESSOR STATUS
Var Cmp Status= _______
Var Spd Cmd= _________
Comp 1= _____________
Comp 3= _____________
Comp 5= _____________
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS
PTD1= _______________
PTD2= _______________
VCmpDischSH= _______
C1DschSatTmp= _______
C2DschSatTmp= _______
DRT1= _______________
DRT2= _______________
Cond Sol 1= Off
Cond Sol 2= Off
COMPRESSOR SET-UP
Var Cmp Period= 20s
Var Cmp Gain= 1
Var Cmp PAT= 40s
VarCmp MaxChg= 10%
OilBoost= Off
LowOilTime= 10min
OilBoostTime= 15min
LowTcOAT= 80°F
EconChgovr= Enth&DB
Econo FDD= On
Clg Stage Time= 5min
Chgover Temp= 55.0°F
Clg DB= 2.0°F
Econo Period=
30/40s (air/water)
Econo Gain=
1-Oct (air/water)
Econo PAT=
60/40s (air/water)
Econo Max Chg=
10/15% (air/water)
Flush Econo= Yes
Econo Diff= 2.0°F
EWT Diff= 3.0°F
Clg Reset= None
Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F
Max Clg Spt@= 100/NA
Max OAT Lmt= 75°F
Min OAT Lmt= 70°F
Calibrate OAD= No
PosSwOpen= 97%
Max Sw Diff= 3%
PosSwClose= 3%
Min SW Diff= 5%
OAD Sw Status= _______
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER12www.DaikinApplied.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 28 and 38 – 39
See page 40
See page 41
RF/EF Set-Up
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up
Ctlr Temp Src= RAT
AplyTstatchg= No
Use Tstat Spt= No
Occ Clg DB= 2.0°F
Clg Period= 60s
Clg Gain= 0.1
Clg PAT= 600s
Max Clg Chg= 5.0°F
Occ Htg DB= 2.0°F
Htg Period= 60s
Htg Gain= 0.1
Htg PAT= 600s
Max Htg Chg= 5.0°F
CalDRemSpt@10°C= No
CalDRemSpt@50°F= No
CalDRemSpt@30°C= No
CalDRemSpt@86°F= No
DemandShed= Ena
ClgDmdShdInc= 4°F
HtgDmdShdInc= 4°F
ClgShedRate= 2.0°F/hr
HtgShedRate= 2.0°F/hr
Clg Stage Time= 5min
Clg DB= 2.0°F
Clg Period= 20s
Clg Gain= 1
Clg PAT= 40s
CW Max Chg= 15%
Clg Lo OAT Lk=
55ºF (RTU/SCU)
0°F (MPS)
25°F (DPS or RTU w/
VFD Cmps)
OAT Diff= 2.0°F
Min EWT= 55°F
Clg Reset= None
Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F
Max Clg Spt@= 100/NA
Lead Circuit= #1
Staging Type= Std
CFanOut1 Spt= 55°F
CFanOut2 Spt= 65°F
CFanOut3 Spt= 75°F
Cond Fan Diff= 5°F
Unocc Diff= 3°F
DT Above Spt= ________
DT Below Spt= ________
RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking
Rem RAF Cap= 5%
Rem ExhF Cap= 5%
BSP DB= 0.01in
BSP Period= 5s
BSP Gain= 0.2s
Max Spd Chg= 4%
Sup Fan Max= 100%
RF @ SF Max= 95%
Sup Fan Min= 30%
RF @ SF Min= 25%
Lo Fan Diff= 75%
Hi Fan Diff- 75%
RFEF Ctrl Dly= 30s
Min Speed=
5% (with Exhaust Fan)
33% (with Return Fan)
MinExStrtTm= 120s
MinExStopTm= 120s
MinExOAPos= 5%
MinExSAFCap= 10%
ExhOnOAPos= 40%
ExhMxOAPos= 100%
Exh Stg 1 On= 40%
Exh Stg 1 Off= 30%
Exh Stg 2 On= 55%
Exh Stg 2 Off= 40%
Exh Stg 3 On= 70%
Exh Stg 3 Off= 50%
Max RF/EF Hz= 60Hz
Max Vent Spd= 100%
Max RFEF RPM= 2600
ECM Status= _________
See page 29 and 46 – 48
Min OA Set-Up
AplyMinOAChg= No (Uses
MinOAT Type Instance Name)
Min OA Reset= None
BSPOAOvrd= No
RstLmtSnsr= None
EXTERNAL RESET
OA @ MinV/mA= 0%
OA @ MaxV/mA= 100%
Min V/mA= 0.0/V
Max V/mA= 10.0/V
CO2 RESET
IAQ Reset= Yes
PPM@DCVLmt= 800PPM
PPM@VntLmt= 1000PPM
IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM
Min PPM= 0 PPM
Max PPM= 2000 PPM
V/A @Min PPM= 0.0/V
V/A @Max PPM= 10.0/V
CFM RESET
OA Flow= XXXXXCFM
MinOAFlwSpt= 2000CFM
Field Stn Rst= No
Field Stn Cfg= VDC
Min CFM= 0 CFM
Max CFM= 10000 CFM
V/A @Min CFM= 0.0/V
V/A @Max CFM= 10.0/V
OA CFM DB= 3%
OA CFM Period= 30s
OA CFM Gain= 0.1
OA CFM Max Chg= 5%
Design Flow= Yes
Des Flo DB= 3%
DF Period= 30s
Des Flo Gain= 0.1
DF Max Chg= 5%
RH Lvl Pos= ____________
LH Lvl Pos= ____________
FAN SPEED RESET
Min Fan Diff= 20%
Max Fan Diff= 50%
Min Clg Spd= 40%
Des Clg Spd= 100%
BSP RESET
MinRFEFTm= 120s
BSP OvdST= 5s
BSP OvdGain= 0.2
BSP OvdMaxChg= 4%
DAMPER LIMITING
RstTLmt= 32.0ºF
RstTSmplTm= 5s
RstTGain= 0.2
RstPAT= 60s
RstTMaxChg= 4%
0–30% OA Max= 30%
Min Inc Rate= 0.03
Max Inc Rate= 1.0
www.DaikinApplied.com13
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 6 continued: Commission Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 33 – 58
Commission Unit
Unit Set-Up
Timer Settings
SAF Set-Up
RF/EF Set-Up
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up (2)
INV Cmp Set-Up
Var Cmp Set-Up
Econo Set-Up
Min OA Set-Up
Heating Set-Up
OA Fan Set-Up
Exp Valve Set-Up
Defrost Set-Up
Dehum Set-Up
Energy Rec Set-Up
Head Pressure Set-Up
Evap Cond Set-Up
D3 Set-Up
Alarm Configuration
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
See page 29 and
49 – 50
Heating Set-Up
OA Fan Set-Up
Exp Valve Set-Up
Htg Stage Time= 5min
Htg DB= 2.0°F
Htg Period= 60s
Htg Gain= 0.8
Htg PAT= 120s
Htg Max Chg= 10%
Htg Lo OAT Lk=
0.0°F – 45.0°F
(100% OA w/o ER)
Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0°F
EffHtgOATLk= 55.0°F
SplHtgOATLk= 55.0°F
OAT Diff= 2.0°F
Htg Reset= None
Min Htg Spt= 55.0°F
Min Htg Spt @= 0
Max Htg Spt= 120.0°F
Max Htg Spt@= 100
Min DAT Ctrl= Yes
Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F
F&BP Method= OpenVlv
F&BP ChgOvrT= 37°F
Occ Heating= Yes
Unocc Diff= 55.0°F
Htg Wmup Tm= 60s
Htg Hld Period= 240s
Max Purge Hld= 20s
Gas Derate V= 10.0v
MWUSensor= RAT
OA FAN STATUS
OA Fan1 Spd= XXX%
OA Fan1 Cmd= XXX%
OA Fan1Amps= XX.XA
Fault Code Details
EXP VALVE STATUS
EVI Pos= XXX%
EVO Pos= XXX%
EVStatus=____________
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS
PTS= XXX.Xpsi
PTD= XXX.Xpsi
Suction SH= XX.XºF
Discharge SH= XX.XºF
Subcooling= XX.X°F
Eff SSH Spt= XX.X°F
EffSH Base= XX.X°F
Eff SC Spt= XX.X°F
Eff SC Lo Lmt= XXX%
SRT= XXX°F
Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F
Sucn Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F
IRT= XXX°F
ORT= XXX°F
OA Fan2 Spd= XXX%
OA Fan2 Cmd= XXX%
OA Fan2Amps= XX.XA
Fault Code Details
►
1
►
1
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS
PTS= XXX.Xpsi
PTD= XXX.Xpsi
Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F
EffDshSatTSpt= XXX.X°F
OA Temp= XXX°F
INV Fin Temp= XXX°F
OA FAN SET UP
DischSatTDiff= 15°F
DischSatTDB= 2.0°F
OA Fan Period= 25s
OA Fan Gain= 2.5
OA Fan PAT= 75s
OA Fan Max= 90%
IFB COMM STATUS
►
EXP VALVE SETUP
SSH DB= 2.0ºF
SH Lo Base=
6.0ºF/5.0ºF/2.0ºF
(15THP/3–12THP/ClgOnly)
SH Hi Base= 9.0ºF
Htg EVI Meth= SbC
IC SC Spt= 9.0ºF
IC SC DB= 2.0ºF
HtgSC EVI Min=
12% (Unit Size≤6)
50% (Unit Size>6)
Clg EVO Meth= SbC
OC SC Spt= 9.0ºF
OC SC DB= 2.0ºF
ClgSC EVO Min= 12%
ManCtrl EV Op= Auto
2
1, 2 See the expansion
information on page 19
See page 56
See page 57
Evap Cond Set-Up
D3 Set-Up
Alarm Configuration
Cond Fan Spd= XXX%
CFan Spd Cmd= XXX%
Min Fan Speed= 33%
EvCond Stg Tm= 10min
Sump Temp= XXX°F
Min Sump T= 75.0°F
Max Sump T= 85.0°F
Sump Dump Spt= 35.0°F
Cndtvy= XXXS/CM
Hi Cndtvy Spt= XXXS/CM
SmpWtrLvDly= 5min
PostClgTime= 10min
SepFlshtime= 1min
Dolphin Sys= No
Itouch Vers= __________
Unit D3 Addr= Jan–00
Set D3 Addr= No
OA Unit Num= 0
OA Unit Amps= 0
OA Unit Addr= 0
Set OA Unit= No
Rst All OA= No
Min Load= 20%
Max Load= 50%
HiCapReset= No
DATLoDiff= 10.0ºF
Eco Method= None
DATHiDiff= 5.0ºF
OA Enth Max= 24.5 BTU/lb
OA Hum Max= 0.0107lb/lb
(Units not displayed on HMI)
OAT Max= 84ºF
Temp Display= DAT
Low Speed= 33%
Med Speed= 60%
Hi Speed= 100%
ALARM LIMITS
Hi Disch Temp= 170°F
Lo Disch Temp= 40°F
Hi Return Temp= 120°F
ALARM OUT CONFIG
Faults= Fast
Problems= Slow
Warnings= Off
ALARM DELAYS
Frz Delay Time= 30s
LP Delay= 2s
LP Comp Delay=
5s (410A)
65s (R22)
Air Flw Ing=120s
Sens Alm Dly= 30s
Temp AlmDly= 30s
ALARM CONFIG
Emerg Stop= ManClr
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER14www.DaikinApplied.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 30 and
51 – 52
See page 53 – 54
See page 55
Defrost Set-Up
Dehum Set-Up
Energy Rec Set-Up
Head Pressure Set-Up
Defrost State= _________
Manual DF= No
MinCmpOpTm= 10min
MinAccCmpTm= 40min
MaxFrostTm= 120min
Defrost Temp= XXºF
Tdef Adj= 0.0ºF
CmpOpTm= XXXmin
AccCmpOpTm= XXXmin
LoFrstAccTm= XXXmin
HiFrstAccTm= XXXmin
Dehum Method= None
RH DB= 2%
Dewpoint DB= 2°F
RH Period= 30s
RH Gain= 1
RH PAT= 30s
RH Max Chg= 10%
RH Stg Time= 10min
Stg Rht DB= 5.0°F
Dehum Ctrl= Occupied
Sensor Loc= Return
Mn Lvg Coil T= 45.0°F
Mx Lvg Coil T= 52.0°F
Rht Cmp Lmtg= Yes
Min Rheat Spt= 55.0°F
Max Rheat Spt= 65.0°F
RH Sens Type= VDC
RH Min Sig= 0.0V
RH Max Sig= 10.0V
Min Dehum Spd= 33%
Max Dehum Spd= 100%
Rht Min Pos= 10% (RPS)
15% (MPS)
5% (DPS, DPH)
RH Dec Rate= 1
RHOutMaxV= 10
Energy Rcvy= Yes
ER Wheel= ___________
Wheel Speed= XXX%
Whl Spd Cmd= XXX%
ER LAT= XXX°F
ER EAT= XXX°F
Min ExhT Diff= 2.0°F
Max ExhT Diff= 6.0°F
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min
Rel Humidity= XXX%
Min Whl Spd= 5%
Intersect Pt= XXX.XºF
Fst Mgnt Meth= Timed
OA Frst Temp= -20.56°F
Defrost Time= 5min
Defrost Period= 60min
Defrst On Tm= 1s
Defrst Off Tm= 24s
ER Whl Period= 30s
ER Whl Gain= 1.0
ER Whl PAT= 30s
ER Max Chg= 10%
LoERLATCmpLk= 45.0°F
Wtr Reg Vlv= XXX%
Head P Circ 1= XXXPSI
Head P Circ 2= XXXPSI
Setpoint= 260PSI
Head Press DB= 10PSI
WRV Period= 10s
WRV Gain= 3.6
WRV PAT= 10s
WRV Max Chg=7%
WRV Init Tm= 60s
Min WRV Pos=10%
Min WRV Tmp= 58°F
Max WRV Tmp= 150°F
WRV Act Time= 60s
Min WRV Time= 60s
www.DaikinApplied.com15
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 7: Service Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 62 – 68
Service Menus
Timer Settings
Operating Hours
Save/Restore Settings
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Alarm Configuration
Analog Input Status
Universal I/O Status
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
Network Input Status
Modbus Status
D3 Input Status
Sensor Offsets
Reset Counte= XXXX
List continues
on, page 18
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
See page 33 – 34
See page 69
See page 62
See page 62
Timer Settings
Operating Hours
Active Alarms
Service Time= 0min
Start Up= 180s
Recirculate= 180s
Zero OA Time= 0min
Tnt Override= 120min
Post Heat= 0s
Pwd Timeout= 10min
Low DAT= 6min
ClgStateDelay= 300s
Clg Stg Time= 5min
Htg Stg Time= 5min
Air Flw Ign= 120s
MinExStrtTm= 120s
MinExStopTm= 120s
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min
Srvc Time Inc= 20s
OffHtCIDelay= 120s
Supply Fan= XXXXXh
Ret/Exh Fan= XXXXXh
Exh Out1= XXXXXh
Exh Out2= XXXXXh
Mech Cool= ___________
Var Comp= ___________
Comp # 1= XXXXXh
Comp # 2= XXXXXh
Comp # 3= XXXXXh
Comp # 4= XXXXXh
Comp # 5= XXXXXh
Comp # 6= XXXXXh
Comp # 7= XXXXXh
Comp # 8= XXXXXh
Cmp Cooling= _________
INV Comp= ___________
Comp 3= _____________
Heating= XXXXXh
Cmp Heating= _________
Economizer= XXXXXh
Tnt Override= XXXXXh
Dehumid= XXXXXh
Reheat= _____________
ER Wheel= XXXXXh
Save/Restore
Settings
Save Params= No
Rstr Params= No
Rstr Factory= No
SaveToCard= No
LoadFromCard= No
CreateTrace= No
Trace To SD= No
Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No
+Alarm 1: Alarm Type
+Alarm 2: Alarm Type
●
►
►
●
●
+Alarm 10: Alarm Type
►
3
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER16www.DaikinApplied.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 63
Alarm Log
Log Count: xx Clr Log= No
+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type
+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type
●
●
●
+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type
●
●
●
+/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type
See page 57
►
►
►
►
►
4
Alarm Configuration
ALARM LIMITS
Hi Disch Temp= 170°F
Lo Disch Temp= 40°F
Hi Return Temp= 120°F
ALARM OUT CONFIG
Faults= Fast
Problems= Slow
Warnings= Off
ALARM DELAYS
Frz Delay Time= 30s
LP Delay= 2s
LP Comp Delay= 5s
Air Flw Ing=120s
Sens Alm Dly= 30s
Temp AlmDly= 30s
ALARM CONFIG
Emerg Stop= ManClr
3, 4 See connection on page 19
See page 63
See page 64
See page 65
See page 65
Analog Input Status
Universal I/O Status
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
MCB Al1= XXXXXXXX
MCB Al2= XXXXXXXX
MCB Al3= XXXXXXXX
MCB X1= XXXXXXXX
MCB X2= XXXXXXXX
MCB X3= XXXXXXXX
MCB X4= XXXXXXXX
MCB X5= XXXXXXXX
MCB X6= XXXXXXXX
MCB X7= XXXXXXXX
MCB X8= XXXXXXXX
EMA X1= XXXXXXXX
EMA X2= XXXXXXXX
EMA X3= XXXXXXXX
EMA X4= XXXXXXXX
EMA X5= XXXXXXXX
EMA X6= XXXXXXXX
EMA X7= XXXXXXXX
EMA X8= XXXXXXXX
EMB X1= XXXXXXXX
EMB X2= XXXXXXXX
EMB X3= XXXXXXXX
EMB X4= XXXXXXXX
EMB X5= XXXXXXXX
EMB X6= XXXXXXXX
EMB X7= XXXXXXXX
EMB X8= XXXXXXXX
MCB DI1= ____________
MCB DI2= ____________
MCB DI3= ____________
MCB DI4= ____________
MCB DI5= ____________
MCB DI6= ____________
EMD DLA1= __________
MCB DO1= __________
MCB DO2= __________
MCB DO3= __________
MCB DO4= __________
MCB DO5= __________
MCB DO6= __________
MCB DO7= __________
MCB DO8= __________
MCB DO9= __________
MCB DO10= __________
EMA DO1= __________
EMA DO2= __________
EMA DO3= __________
EMA DO4= __________
EMA DO5= __________
EMA DO6= __________
EMB DO1= __________
EMB DO2= __________
EMB DO3= __________
EMB DO4= __________
EMB DO5= __________
EMB DO6= __________
EMC X1= XXXXXXXX
EMC X2= XXXXXXXX
EMC X3= XXXXXXXX
EMC X4= XXXXXXXX
EMC X5= XXXXXXXX
EMC X6= XXXXXXXX
EMC X7= XXXXXXXX
EMC X8= XXXXXXXX
EMD X1= XXXXXXXX
EMD X2= XXXXXXXX
EMD X3= XXXXXXXX
EMD X4= XXXXXXXX
EMD X5= XXXXXXXX
EMD X6= XXXXXXXX
EMD X7= XXXXXXXX
EMD X8= XXXXXXXX
EME X1= XXXXXXXX
EME X2= XXXXXXXX
EME X3= XXXXXXXX
EME X4= XXXXXXXX
EME X5= XXXXXXXX
EME X6= XXXXXXXX
EME X7= XXXXXXXX
EME X8= XXXXXXXX
www.DaikinApplied.com17
EMC DO1= __________
EMC DO2= __________
EMC DO3= __________
EMC DO4= __________
EMC DO5= __________
EMC DO6= __________
EMD DO1= __________
EMD DO2= __________
EMD DO3= __________
EMD DO4= __________
EMD DO5= __________
EMD DO6= __________
EME DO1= __________
EME DO2= __________
EME DO3= __________
EME DO4= __________
EME DO5= __________
EME DO6= __________
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 7 continued: Service Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 62 – 68
Service Menus
Timer Settings
Operating Hours
Save/Restore Settings
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Alarm Configuration
Analog Input Status
Universal I/O Status
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
Network Input Status
Modbus Status
D3 Input Status
Sensor Offsets
Reset Counte= XXXX
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
►
See page 66
See page 67
See page 67
See page 68
Network Input Status
Modbus Status
D3 Status
Sensor Offsets
Net OAT In= XXX.XºF
Net Space In= XXX.XºF
NetCurrState= _________
NetNextState= _________
NetTmToNxtSt= XXXXXmin
Net App Mode= ________
Net Cl Ena Sw= X.X
Net Cl Ena VI= XXX%
Net Ht Ena Sw= X.X
Net Ht Ena VI= XXX%
Net Ec Ena Sw= X.X
Net Ec Ena VI= XXX%
Net SAF Cap= XXX%
Net RAF Cap= XXX%
Net ExhF Cap= XXX%
Net CFlw Sw= XXX%
Net Flw Val= XXX%
Net Space IAQ= XXXXPPM
Net Rel Humid= XXX%
Net DATClgSpt= XXX.XºF
Net DATHtgSpt= XXX.XºF
nviSetpoint= XXX.XºF
OccManCmd= _________
Net Min OA= XXX%
nvoEffSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccClgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccHtgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciHVACType= _________
SF MB Status=_________
RF/EF MB Status=______
ER MB Status=________
OF MB Status= ________
IFB MB Status= ________
D3 MB Status=_________
SAFVFD Ex Flt= _______
RxFVFD Ex Flt= _______
ER VFD Ex Flt= ________
OF VFD Ex Flt= ________
MB Resistance= Yes
ECM Config= Done
D3 Comm Sts= ________
D3 Addr Err= __________
D3 On/Off= ___________
D3 Mode= ____________
D3 Clg Spt= XXX.XºF
D3 Htg Spt= XXX.XºF
D3 Fan Spd= __________
D3 Min Load= XXX%
D3 Max Load= XXX%
D3 Eco Ena= __________
OA Enthalpy= XXXBTU/lb
OA Hum Ratio= g/kg
D3 SWVers= XXXXXXXXXX
OAAdd1–16= __________
OAAdd17–32= _________
OAAdd33–49= _________
OAAdd50–64= _________
SetOAAddr= XX
CurrOAAddr= XX
CurrOAAmps= XXXA
CurrOARLA= XXXA
Disch Air= 0.0ºF
Return Air= 0.0ºF
Space Temp= 0.0ºF
OA Temp= 0.0ºF
EF/LC Temp= 0.0ºF
EW Temp= 0.0ºF
Mixed Air= 0.0ºF
MAT LON SCC= 0.0ºF
ER LAT= 0.0ºF
ER EAT= 0.0ºF
Sump Temp= 0.0ºF
DRT1= 0.0ºF
DRT3= 0.0ºF
SRT= 0.0ºF
DFT= 0.0ºF
IRT= 0.0ºF
ORT= 0.0ºF
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER18www.DaikinApplied.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
3
See page 73
Alarm Lists
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Event Log
LogCt:** Clr Log= -:No
+Event 1
+Event 2
●
●
●
+Event 49
+Event 50
Event Details
+Alarm: Alarm Type
Alarm Date
Alarm Time
4
See page 62
►
►
►
►
►
See page 63
Active Alarms
Alarm Log
Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No
+Alarm 1: Alarm Type
+Alarm 2: Alarm Type
●
Log Count: xx Clr Log= No
+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type
+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type
●
●
●
+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type
●
●
●
+/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type
►
►
●
●
+Alarm 10: Alarm Type
►
►
►
►
►
Expansion Information
►
►
►
Alarm Details
+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
►
►
1
2
See page 117
Fault Code Details
IFB Comm Status
ACTIVE FAULT CODES
INVAlarmCode=______
Code Text
OF1AlarmCode=_______
Code Text
OF2AlarmCode=_______
Code Text
PREVIOUS FAULT CODES
PrvINVAlmCode=_______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF1AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF2AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
IFB SW Vers= VP0329008
IFBCommStatus=____
PrvCommStatus=_______
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
ACS1 DataRcvd=_______
ACS3 DataRcvd=_______
www.DaikinApplied.com19
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Figure 8: BMS Communications – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 70
BMS Communications
LON Set-Up
BACnet MSTP Set-Up
BACnet IP Set-Up
D-Net Set-Up
Network Unit Set-Up
►
►
►
►
►
IM 918
IM 917
IM 916
LON Set-Up
BACnet MSTP Set-Up
BACnet IP Set-Up
D-Net Set-Up
See page 70
Network Unit Set-Up
Neuron ID= xxxxxxxxxxxx
SndHrtBT= 60s
RcvHrtBT= 30s
MinSndTm= 0s
Comm Status=_________
LON BSP= X.XXX
LON App Ver= XXXX
ApplyMSTPChgs= No
Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx
MSTP Address= XXX
Baud Rate= 76800
Max Master= 127
Max Info Frm= 10
Unit Support= English
Term Resistor= No
NC Dev 1= 0
NC Dev 2= 0
AHU Loc/Net= Network
Comm Status= ________
RstOutofSrvc= Done
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX
ApplyIPChgs= No
Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx
UDP Port= 47808
DHCP= On
Act IP= 0.0.0.0
ActMsk- 0.0.0.0
ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1
GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0
GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1
Unit Support= English
NC Dev 1= 0
NC Dev 2= 0
Comm Status= ________
AHU Loc/Net= Network
Comm Status= ________
RstOutofSrvc= Done
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX
ApplyD-NetChgs= No
DHCP= On
Act IP= 0.0.0.0
ActMsk- 0.0.0.0
ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1
GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0
GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1
Remote Srv En= Disable
Comm Status= ________
D-net BSP= X.X.XX
Space Sensor= Local/Net
UNIT MODE SETTINGS
Ctrl Mode= Off
Occ Mode= Auto/net
RESET OPTIONS
Clg Reset= None
Htg Reset= None
AplyMinOAChg= No
(Uses MinOA Type
Instance Name)
Min OA Reset= None
Apply Changes= No
HEAT/COOL CHANGEOVER
Ctrl Temp SRC= RAT
AplyTstatChg= No
Use Tstat Spt= No
Occ Clg Spt= 72°F
Occ Htg Spt= 68°F
FAN CONTROL OPTIONS
SAF Ctlr= DSP
RF/EF Ctlr= Tracking
Figure 9: Trending – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
See page 74 – 77
Trending
Trending Ena= No
Apply Chgs= No
Sample Time= 300s
TrendOnOff= Off
Export Data= No
Clear Trend= Done
Points 1–8 (Fixed)
Points 9–24 (from List)
Points 25–27 (with IDs)
Points 28–30 (with IDs)
►
►
►
►
Points 1–8 (Fixed)
Points 9–24 (from List)
Points 25–27 (with IDs)
Points 28–30 (with IDs)
Point 1= UnitSt
Point 2= Clg%
Point 3= Htg%
Point 4= SAF%
Point 5= OAD/Eco%
Point 6= CtrlTmp
Point 7= DAT
Point 8= OAT
Point 9= None
Point 10= None
Point 11= None
Point 12= None
Point 13= None
Point 14= None
Point 15= None
Point 16= None
Point 17= None
Point 18= None
Point 19= None
Point 20= None
Point 21= None
Point 22= None
Point 23= None
Point 24= None
Point 25
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
Point 26
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
Point 27
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
Point 28
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
Point 29
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
Point 30
ID= F0AF0000
Type= 0000
Mem Num= 0100
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER20www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Menu Descriptions
Quick Menu
Items in the Quick Menu contain basic unit operating status
and control set point parameters. The items shown in the Quick
Menu are Read Only if a valid password has not been entered.
The following are brief descriptions of the Quick Menu items.
No password is required to view the Quick Menu.
Table 1: Quick Menu
Menu Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
—
Off
Start
Recirc
FanOnly
MinDAT
Htg
Econo
Clg
None
Unit Status=
—
Enable
OffMan
OffMnCtl
OffNet
OffAlm
OffFnRty
6
MWU Status=
—
Inactive
Active
6
Dehum Status=
—
Active/Inactive
6
Ctrl Mode=
Off
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
FanOnly
HeatCool
Auto/Net
6
Occ Mode=
Auto/Net
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
Auto/Net
6
Unit State=
Clg Capacity=
—
0–100%
None
OAD/Econo Cap=
—
0–100%
None
Htg Capacity=
—
0–100%
None
Reheat Capacity=
—
0–100%
None
Control Temp=
—
-50.0–200.0°F
None
Occ Clg Spt =
72.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
None
Occ Htg Spt =
68.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
None
Disch Air=
—
-50.0–250.0°F
None
DAT Clg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
None
DAT Htg Spt=
85.0°F
40.0–140.0°F
None
Min DAT Limit=
55.0°F
0.0–70.0°F
None
SAF Capacity=
—
0–100%
None
DSP
—
0.2–4.0 in
None
DuctSP Spt=
1.0 in
0.2–4.0 in
None
RF/EF Capacity=
—
0–100%
None
BSP=
—
-0.25–0.25 in
None
BldgSP Spt=
0.050 in
-0.25–0.25 in
None
OA Temp=
—
-50.0–200.0°F
None
EW Temp=
—
-50.0–150.0°F
None
Rel Humidity=
—
0–100%
None
www.DaikinApplied.com21
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Unit State is a status only item which indicates the state of
operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can
be in any of the operating states shown.
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates the status
of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit
status can be any of the status values shown.
DAT Htg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when in the
heating mode of operation. Once a valid password has been
entered this item becomes an adjustable item.
Dehum Status is a status only item which indicates the status
of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active
or inactive.
Min DAT Limit is a status only item which indicates the
discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control
units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when
the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only
operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the
minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt. Once
a valid password has been entered this item becomes an
adjustable item.
Ctrl Mode is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode
of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown.
SAF Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
capacity of the supply air fan.
Occ Mode is an adjustable item which sets the occupancy
mode of the unit. The unit can be in occupied, unoccupied,
tenant override, or auto modes.
DSP is a status only item which displays the current duct static
pressure reading.
MWU Status is a status only item that indicates whether or not
the unit is in the heating state due to MWU function.
Clg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently
operating.
OAD/Econo Cap is a status only item which indicates the
percentage that the outdoor damper or economizer valve is
currently open.
Htg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently
operating.
Reheat Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently
operating.
Control Temp is a status only item which displays the current
value of the “Control Temperature.” The “Control Temperature”
is defined as the temperature input selected by the Control
Temperature Source parameter. For example, if the Control
Temperature Source parameter is set to “Return,” then the
control temperature parameter reads the same value as the
Return Air parameter.
Occ Clg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature in which the unit will go into the cooling mode of
operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item
becomes an adjustable item.
Occ Htg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature in which the unit will go into the heating mode of
operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item
becomes an adjustable item.
DuctSP Spt= is a status only item which indicates the duct
static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the
supply air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct
pressure at this value. Once a valid password has been
entered this item becomes an adjustable item.
RF/EF Capacity is a status only item indicating the capacity of
the return fan/exhaust air fans.
BSP is a status only item which displays the current building
static pressure reading.
BldgSP Spt is a status only item which indicates the building
static pressure set point used for controlling the return/exhaust
fan VFD. The return/exhaust fan VFD is modulated to maintain
the building static pressure sensor input to this value. Once
a valid password has been entered this item becomes an
adjustable item.
OA Temp is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air
temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units.
EW Temp is a status only item that displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water
temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all water-cooled
units.
Rel Humidity is a status only item that displays the current
relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.
Disch Air is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature
sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units.
DAT Clg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when it is
in the cooling mode of operation. Once a valid password has
been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER22www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
View/Set Unit Menus
Unit Status Settings
The “Unit Status Settings” menu provides a summary of
basic unit status and control items. This menu summarizes
the current operating state of the unit, giving the operating
state the unit is in, along with the current capacity level of that
operating state.
Table 2: Unit Status/Settings
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
—
Off
Start
Recirc
FanOnly
MinDAT
Htg
Econo
Clg
6
Unit Status=
—
Enable
OffMan
OffMnCtl
OffNet
OffAlm
OffFnRty
6
MWU Status=
—
Inactive
Active
6
Dehum Status
—
Active/Inactive
6
Off
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
FanOnly
HeatCool
Auto
6
—
Enabled
None
OffAmb
OffAlarm
OffNet
OffMan
6
—
Enabled
None
OffAmb
OffAlarm
OffNet
OffMan
6
Econo Status=
—
Enabled
None
OffAmb
OffAlarm
OffNet
OffMan
OffDehum
6
Unit State=
Ctrl Mode=
Clg Status=
Htg Status=
Clg Capacity=
—
0–100%
6
Htg Capacity=
—
0–100%
6
Reheat Cap
—
0–100%
6
SAF Capacity=
—
0–100%
6
RF/EF Capacity=
—
0–100%
6
Rel Humidity=
—
0–100%
6
Net Emrg Ovrd=
Normal
Normal, Off
6
Auto
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
FanOnly
Auto
6
Net App Mode=
www.DaikinApplied.com23
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Unit State is a status only item which indicates the state of
operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can
be in any of the operating states shown.
Htg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently
operating.
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates the status
of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit
status can be any of the status values shown.
Reheat Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently
operating.
MWU Status is a status only item that indicates whether or not
the unit is in the heating state due to MWU function.
SAF Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
capacity of the supply air fan.
Dehum Status is a status only item which indicates the status
of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active
or inactive.
RF/EF Capacity is a status only item indicating the capacity of
the return fan/exhaust air fans.
Ctrl Mode is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode
of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown.
Clg Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not
mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled,
the reason is indicated.
Htg Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not
heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason
is indicated.
Econo Status is a status only item which indicates whether
or not the economizer is currently enabled. If economizer is
enabled, the reason is indicated.
Rel Humidity is a status only item that displays the current
relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.
Net Emrg Ovrd is an adjustable item which indicates if the
unit was shut down in an emergency situation via a network
command.
Net App Mode is a network adjustable item which indicates
that the unit is set for network off, cooling only, heating only,
fan only or auto heating/cooling operation via a network signal.
This item has no affect on the unit operation unless the Ctrl
Mode item is set to “Auto.”
Clg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently
operating.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER24www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Occupancy
Menus in the Occupancy menu contain status and control
items that relate to unit occupied/unoccupied operation.
Table 3: Occupancy Menu
Item Display Name
Range
Password Level
Occupancy=
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
6
Occ Mode=
Auto/Net
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
Auto/Net
6
-
None
NetSchd
IntSchd
OneEvnt
RemoteSw
OccManCmd
OccMode
TStatTO
ManTO
6
UnoccSrc=
-
UnoccDehum
UnoccClg
UnoccHtg
IntOptStrt
NetOptStrt
None
6
Tnt Ovrde Time=
0
0–300min
6
OccSrc=
Default Setting
Occupancy is a status only item which indicates whether the
unit is currently in an occupied, unoccupied, or tenant override
mode of operation.
UnoccSrc is a status only item which indicates the input
source or function that is responsible for running the unit while
the Occupancy parameter to “Unocc.”
OccMode is an adjustable item which allows the unit to be
set for manual occupied or unoccupied operation, automatic
operation based on a time schedule input or manual tenant
override operation.
Tnt Ovrd Time is an adjustable item which indicates the
amount of time remaining for unit operation since tenant
override operation was activated.
OccSrc is a status only item which indicates the input source
or function that is responsible for setting the Occupancy
parameter to “Occ” or “TntOvrd.”
www.DaikinApplied.com25
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Temperatures
Menus in the Temperatures menu contain unit temperature
status information.
Table 4: Temperature Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Control Temp=
—
-50.0–200.0°F
6
Disch Air=
—
-50.0–250.0°F
6
Return Air=
—
-20.0–200.0°F
6
Space Temp=
—
-0.0–150.0°F
6
OA Temp=
—
-50.0–200.0°F
6
EF/LC Temp=
—
-50.0–250.0°F
6
EW Temp=
—
-50.0–150.0°F
6
Mixed Air=
—
-50.0–250.0°F
6
ER LAT
—
-50.0–200.0°F
6
ER EAT
—
-50.0–200.0°F
6
Sump Temp
—
-50.0–150.0°F
6
PA Temp
—
-50.0–200.0°F
2
DRT2=
—
-50.0–392.0°F
6
DRT3=
—
-50.0–392.0°F
6
Control Temp is a status only item which indicates the current
Control Temperature value.
Disch Air is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature
sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units.
Return Air is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit’s return air temperature
sensor (RAT).
EW Temp is a status only item that displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water
temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all water-cooled
units.
Mixed Air is a status only item that displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted mixed air
temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all Self
Contained units.
Space Temp is a status only item which displays the current
space (or zone) temperature reading from the optional unit
space air temperature sensor input. If an optional space
temperature sensor is not installed and space temperature
value is not supplied by a network, the SpaceT Present=
item in the Setup menu should be set to “No” to disable the
alarm function associated with an open circuit at the space
temperature sensor input.
ER LAT is status only item which displays the current
discharge air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery
wheel.
OA Temp is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air
temperature sensor.
DRT2 is a status only item which displays the current
discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for
variable speed compressor on circuit #2.
EF/LC Temp is a status only item which displays the current
entering fan/leaving coil temperature reading from the unit
mounted temperature sensor. This sensor is available on
RTU units with dehumidification capability. This sensor is also
installed on RTU units equipped with either gas or electric
heat and is used by the controller to calculate the heat rise
across the heat exchanger by comparing it to the discharge
air temperature input. The controller uses this information to
protect the heat exchanger against overheating.
ER Exh T is status only item which displays the current
exhaust air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery
wheel.
Sump Temp is a status only item that displays the current
evaporative condenser sump temperature.
DRT3 is a status only item which displays the current
discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for
variable speed compressor on circuit #3.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER26www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Flow Status
Table 5: Flow Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Airflow=
—
Waterflow=
—
Water Pump=
—
Supply Fan=
Airflow is a status only item that indicates whether or not
discharge airflow is detected. Airflow status is sensed by a
binary input delivered to the controller by a differential pressure
switch (PC7). On VAV units duct static pressure is also a factor
in the indication of airflow.
Waterflow is a status only item that indicates whether or not
water flow is detected on a water cooled unit. Water flow status
is sensed by a binary input delivered to the controller by an
optional water flow sensor (WF1) or from a network supplied
water flow input.
Water pump is a status only item that indicates whether or
not the Pump Start Output is active on a water cooled unit.
The pump start output is available for field use to start a field
Range
NoFlow
Flow
NoFlow
Flow
Off
On
Off
On
Password Level
6
6
6
6
supplied pump when water flow is required. For field wiring
requirements for using this output refer to “Field Wiring” in the
MicroTech III Installation Manual (IM 919). The Pump Start
Output is turned on whenever the economizer bypass valve
is open, the unit is in the Econo or Cooling operating state,
economizer flush mode is active or a Freeze fault or Freeze
problem alarm is active or has been active within the past 10
minutes. Otherwise the Pump Start Output is off.
Supply Fan is a status only item which indicates whether or
not the controller is commanding the unit supply fan on.
Ret/Exh Fan is a status only item which indicates whether or
not the controller is commanding the unit RF/EF fan on.
SAF Speed Control
Table 6: Supply Fan Speed Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
SAF Speed=
—
0–100%
6
Speed Cmd=
—
0–100%
6
Duct Press=
—
0.0–5.0 in
6
DuctSP Spt=
1.0 in
0.2–4.0 in
6
IAQ PPM =
6
OA Flow =
6
Bldg Press =
6
BldgSP Spt
6
SAF Speed is a status only item that indicates the current
supply fan speed.
Speed Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current
supply fan VFD commanded speed.
Duct Press is a status only item which indicates the current
pressure of the supply air ductwork. The duct pressure is
measured at the location in which the duct static pressure tap
was field installed. This device is not factory installed.
DuctSP SPT is an adjustable item which sets the duct static
pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the supply
air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct pressure at
this value.
IAQ PPM = is a status only item that indicates the current CO2
level when the supply fan control method is set to CO2.
Note: CO2 option only available on 100% OA units that have
the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.
www.DaikinApplied.com27
OA Flow = is a status only item that indicates the current CFM
value when the supply fan control method is set to CFM. Note:
CFM option only available on 100% OA units that have the unit
control type set to Zone or DAC.
Bldg Press = is a status only item which indicates the current
building static pressure when the supply fan control method is
set to BSP. Note: BSP option only available on 100% OA units
that have the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.
BldgSP Spt is an adjustable item which sets the building
static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD when the
supply fan control method is set to BSP. Note: BSP option only
available on 100% OA units that have the unit control type set
to Zone or DAC.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
RF/EF Control
Table 7: Return/Exhaust Fan Speed Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
RF/EF Speed=
-
0–100%
6
Speed Cmd=
-
0–100%
6
Bldg Press=
-
-0.25–0.25 in
6
BldgSP Spt=
0.050 in
-0.25–0.25 in
6
RF/EF Speed is a status only item that indicates the current
return/exhaust fan VFD speed.
Speed Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current
return/exhaust fan VFD commanded speed.
BldgSP Spt is an adjustable item which sets the building static
pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the return/
exhaust air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the building
pressure at this value.
Bldg Press is a status only item which indicates the building
static pressure at the building static pressure sensor location.
Cooling
Table 8: Cooling Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Occ Clg Spt =
72.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
6
Unocc Clg Spt=
85.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
DAT Clg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
Occ Clg Spt an adjustable item which sets the temperature
above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation.
Unocc Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone
temperature above which the unit starts up and provides
unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.
DAT Clg Spt is an adjustable item used by the controller to
set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on
DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not
adjustable on CAV units.
NOTE: Setting this to its maximum value will disable
unoccupied cooling.
Economizer
Table 9: Economizer Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
OAD/Econo Pos=
—
0–100%
6
DAT Clg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
Min OA Pos=
—
0–100%
6
FreeClgStatus=
—
Unavail
Avail
6
Occ Clg Spt =
72.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
6
Unocc Clg Spt=
85.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
OAD/Econo Pos is a status only item that is used to
indicate percentage that the economizer dampers/waterside
economizer valve is open.
FreeClg Status is a status only item that indicates whether
airside economizer free cooling is available or unavailable
based on a definable ambient temperature range.
DAT Clg Spt is an adjustable item used by the controller to
set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on
DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not
adjustable on CAV units.
Occ Clg Spt an adjustable item which sets the temperature
above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation.
Min OA Pos is a status only item which indicates the current
minimum position of the outdoor air damper.
Unocc Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone
temperature above which the unit starts up and provides
unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.
NOTE: Setting this to its maximum value will disable
unoccupied cooling.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER28www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Min OA Damper
Table 10: Min OA Damper Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Min OA Pos=
-
0–100%
6
Vent Limit=
20%
0–100%
6
LoFlo V Lmt=
30%
0–100%
6
DCV Limit=
10%
0–100%
6
—
VentLmt
DesFlw
FldFlw
Network
Ext VDC
Ext mA
IAQ VDC
BSPOvrd
FanDiff
DCVLmt
ZeroOA
4
Min OA SCR=
Min OA Pos is a status only item which indicates the current
minimum position of the outdoor damper. This value does not
go above a value called the Ventilation Limit and does not go
below a value called the Demand Control Ventilation Limit.
On CAV units the Ventilation Limit and the Demand Control
Ventilation Limit are fixed values set equal to the Vent Limit=
and DCV Limit= parameters. On VAV units the OA Damper
Position increases from the Vent Limit= value to the LoFloVent
Limit= value as the VFD speed goes from 100% down to the
Min Clg Spd= value. The Demand Control Ventilation Limit in
this VAV case is determined by the Ventilation Limit X DVC
Limit=/Vent Limit=. When the Min OA Reset= parameter is
set to “None” the Min OA Pos= value is set to the Ventilation
Limit. If Min OA Reset= is set to Network, Ext VDC, Ext mA,
IAQ VDC, or IAQ mA, the Min OA Pos= varies between the
Ventilation Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit as
the reset signal varies from its maximum to minimum value.
Vent Limit is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a VAV unit is at 100%
discharge fan speed.
LoFlo Vent Limit is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for the Ventilation Limit on a VAV unit. The ventilation
limit is raised toward this value as the discharge fan speed
decreases toward the Min Clg Spd value.
DCV Limit is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
Demand Control Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a
VAV unit is at 100% discharge fan speed. This item is only
used when the “Min OA Reset=” is set to something other than
“None.”
Min OA Src = is a status only item that indicates the action that
is winning for control of the OA damper position.
Heating Menu
The Heating menu provides a summary of the control
parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode
of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the
heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating
mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.
The control temperature can be return temperature, space
temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the
heating mode of operation when the control temperature is
below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
Table 11: Heating Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Occ Htg Spt =
68.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
6
Unocc Htg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
MWU Spt=
70.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
6
DAT Htg Spt=
85.0°F
40.0–140.0°F
6
Occ Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the control
temperature below which the unit will go into the heating mode
of operation.
Unocc Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone
temperature below which the unit starts up and provides
unoccupied heating (night setback) during unoccupied periods.
www.DaikinApplied.com29
MWU Spt is an adjustable item which sets the heating
setpoint to be used during morning warm up on a discharge
temperature control unit. CAV units use the Occ Htg Spt for
morning warmup operation.
DAT Htg Spt is an adjustable parameter which sets the
heating discharge set point.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Dehumidification
Table 12: Dehumidification Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Dehum Status=
—
Disabled
Enabled
6
Rel Humidity=
—
0–100%
6
Dewpoint=
—
-50–150°F
6
Dehum Method=
None
Always
None
Rel Hum
DewPt
6
RH Setpoint=
50%
0–100%
6
Dewpoint Spt=
50°F
0–100°F
6
Reheat Spt=
—
40.0–100.0°F
6
Reheat Cap=
—
0–100%
6
Dehum Status is a status only item that indicates whether
dehumidification is enabled or disabled.
Rel Humidity is a status only item that indicates the current
relative humidity reading of the sensor.
DewPoint is a status only item that indicates the current
dew point value that is calculated by the controller using the
Rel Humidity= value and either the Space Temp= or Return
Air= value, depending on the setting of the Humidity Sensor
Location. This parameter can either be set to “Space” or
“Return.”
Dehum Method is an adjustable item used to set the
dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When
this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation
is controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity= value at the
RH Setpoint=. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,”
dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew
Point value at the Dewpoint Spt=. When this parameter is
set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as
mechanical cooling is not disabled.
RH Setpoint is an adjustable item used to set the relative
humidity value at which the relative humidity will be controlled
to during dehumidification operation.
Dewpoint Spt is an adjustable item used to set the dewpoint
value at which the dewpoint with will be controlled to during
dehumidification operation.
Reheat Spt is a status only item which is used to indicate
the DAT temperature to which the HGRH valve will be
controlled in the Cooling and Fan Only operating states while
dehumidification operation is active. The Reheat Spt= equals
the DAT Cooling Setpoint for DAT controlled units and will vary
in between the Min Reheat Spt= and Max Reheat Spt= for
Zone Controlled units.
Reheat Cap is a status only item that indicates the current
reheat capacity value.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER30www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Date/Time/Schedules
Time/Date
Table 13: Time/Date
Item Display Name
Range
Password Level
Time=
Default Setting
HH:MM:SS
6
Date=
MM/DD/YYYY
6
UTC Diff=
6
Time is an adjustable item that sets the current time.
Date is an adjustable item that sets the current date.
UTC Diff is an adjustable parameter that can be set to indicate
how the local time where the unit is situated differs from the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Daily Schedule Menu
The Daily Schedule sets the start and stop times for each of
the days of the week. One start and one stop time can be set
for each day.
Table 14: Daily Schedule Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Mon=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Tue=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Wed=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Thu=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Fri=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Sat=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Sun=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Hol=
HH:MM — HH:MM
00:00 — 23:59
6
Holiday Schedule Menu
The Holiday Schedule is used to set the start and stop times
for up to 10 different holidays.
Table 15: Holiday Schedule Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Hol 1=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 2=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 3=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 4=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 5=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 6=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 7=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 8=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 9=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
Hol 10=
MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99
00/00/00–12/31/99
6
www.DaikinApplied.com31
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
One Event Schedule Menu
The One Event Schedule is used to set the start and stop times for one event.
Table 16: One Event Schedule Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Beg=
MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM
00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59
6
End=
MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM
00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59
6
Optimal Start Menu
The Optimal Start menu is used to set up the unit so it starts at the most efficient time before building occupancy.
Table 17: Optimal Start Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Enable=
No
No, Yes
6
Htg Rate=
0.4°F/min
0.0–1.0°F/min
2
Htg OAT=
35°F
-40–60°F
2
Des Htg OAT=
0°F
-40–60°F
2
Clg Rate=
0.4°F/min
0.0–1.0°F/min
2
Clg OAT=
85°F
-60–140°F
2
Des Clg OAT=
95°F
-60–140°F
2
Enable is an adjustable item that turns on the optimal start
feature. Setting the value to yes will activate this function.
Htg Rate is an adjustable item used by the controller in
determining the amount time before occupancy to start when
the Optimal Start parameter is set to “ON.”
Htg OAT is an adjustable item used by the controller in
determining the amount time before occupancy to start when
the Optimal Start parameter is set to “ON.”
Clg Rate is an adjustable item that sets the rate of temperature
drop in degrees per minute when the unit last started optimally
in cooling.
Clg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor air
temperature when the unit was last started optimally in cooling.
Design Clg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor
air temperature at which the cooling system could just hold the
load. Rate of temperature rise would equal zero.
Design Htg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor
air temperature at which the heating system could just hold the
load. The rate of temperature rise would equal zero.
Daylight Savings Menu
Table 18: Daylight Savings Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Mar
NA
Jan-Dec
2
DLS Strt Wk=
2ndWeek
1stSun
2ndSun
3rdSun
4thSun
5thSun
2
DLS End Mon=
Nov
NA
Jan-Dec
2
DLS End Week=
1stWeek
1stSun
2ndSun
3rdSun
4thSun
5thSun
2
DLS Enable=
Auto
Off/Auto
2
DLS Strt Mon=
DLS Strt Mon is an adjustable item that sets the month for
daylight savings time to begin.
DLS End Week is an adjustable item that sets the week of the
month for daylight savings time to end.
DLS Strt Wk is an adjustable item that sets the week of the
month for daylight savings time to begin.
DLS Enable is an adjustable item that sets whether or not
daylight savings time is enabled.
DLS End Mon is an adjustable item that sets the month for
daylight savings time to end.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER32www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Commission Unit
Unit Setup
Table 19: Unit Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Apply Changes=
RAT Sensor=
OAT Sensor=
Default Setting
No
Yes
Yes
Space Sensor
Digtl/Net
Eng Units=
Unit Name=
Rapid Start=
Rapid Start Tm=
English
—
No
10 min
DO10 Cfg=
FanOp
Range
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
None
Anlog/Net
Digtl/Net
English, SI
—
No, Yes
0–20 min
FanOp
VAVBox
Password Level
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
100% OA SCU is an adjustable item used to select whether or
not a self contained unit will be configured for 100% outside air
operation.
Unit Name is an adjustable item that allows each controller
to be given a unique name. This may be useful when multiple
units are connected to a single remote HMI.
Space Sensor is an adjustable item to indicate if a space
sensor is connected to the unit controller, or provided via a
network signal.
Rapid Start is an adjustable item that allows the user to select
to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit power up.
Eng Units is an adjustable item to indicate if the unit is to
display English or Metric units of measure.
Rapid Start Tm is an adjustable item that allows the user to
set the Rapid Start timing whenever the power is reset to the
controller and the controller finishes its startup sequence.
DO10 Cfg is an adjustable item that redefines the functionality
of the digital output (DO10) on the main control board. The
output is either a supply fan operation indication or a VAV box
signal depending on how this parameter is set.
Timer Settings Menu
Table 20: Timer Settings Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Service Time
0 min
0–240min
4
Start Up
180s
1800s
4
Recirculate
180s
3600s
4
Zero OA Time
0 min
0–240min
4
Tnt Override
120 min
0–300min
4
Post Heat
0s
0–180s
4
Pwd Timeout
10 min
3–30min
4
Low DAT
6 min
0–60min
4
ClgStateDelay
300s
0–600s
4
Clg Stg Time
5 min
5–60min
4
Htg Stg Time
5 min
2–60min
4
Min Ex Strt Tm
120s
60–300s
4
Min Ex Stop Tm
120s
60–300s
4
ER Whl Stg Tm
5 min
1–100min
4
ER Whl Off Tm
5 min
1–100min
4
Air Flw Ign
120s
0–999S
2
Htg Wrmup Tm
240s
0–999s
2
Htg Hld Period
240s
0–999s
2
Srvc Time Inc
20s
0–300s
2
Off HtCl Delay
120s
0–999s
2
www.DaikinApplied.com33
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Service Time is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the internal control timers can be temporarily sped up.
Clg Stg Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time
period between compressor stage changes.
Startup is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds that
the unit will perform its startup operation.
Htg Stg Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period between heating stage changes.
Recirculate is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds
that the unit operates with only the fan, recirculating the
building air upon unit start up.
MinExStrtTime is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
exhaust fan on time (Default = 120 seconds).
Zero OA Time is an adjustable item that sets the time in
minutes that the outdoor air damper stays at a zero position
upon unit start up.
Tnt Override is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time
that the unit will go into operation when the tenant override
function is activated. Tenant override can be activated by the
space sensor button, the network occupancy mode parameter
or the keypad Occ Mode= parameter.
Post Heat is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the
post heat function available on VAV units.
Pwd Timeout is an adjustable item that sets the amount
of time in minutes that the controller will allow access to
applicable menus without re-entering the necessary password.
If the keypad display remains idle for this time period, the
display will revert to the “main menu” requiring a re-enter of the
password.
Low DAT is an adjustable item that sets the duration of a time
period upon unit start up during which the Low Discharge
Temperature fault is ignored. This may be particularly important
in colder climates when a unit has been off for a significant
time period during which the unit, including the discharge air
temperature sensor, has become very cold. This time period
allows the unit to run long enough to turn the unit heat on and
warm the discharge sensor above the alarm limit, preventing
nuisance unit alarm shutdown. This time period begins when
the supply fan starts.
ClgStateDelay is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time between the fan only operating state and the mechanical
cooling state. The unit will not enter the mechanical cooling
state until this time has passed. This only applies on discharge
control units following morning warm up heating operation.
MinExStopTime is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
exhaust fan stop time (Default = 120 seconds).
ER Whl Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum
speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost
protect mode of operation.
ER Whl Off Tm is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being
turned off due to a frosting/condensation condition.
Air Flw Ign is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time
the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is started.
Htg Wrmup Tm is an adjustable item which is used to set the
amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position
on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds).
Htg Hld Period is an adjustable item used to set the amount of
time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated value
on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds). This
is to allow the temperature to approach equilibrium with the
modulating gas heating valve at a fixed position.
Srvc Time Inc is an adjustable item used to set the internal
stage time delay when the Service Timer is not zero, the times
listed below are set to the ServiceTime (Default = 20 seconds)
instead of the normal values.
• Cooling Stage Time
• Heating Stage Time
• Start Initial Time
• Recirculation
• ZeroOATime
OffHtClDelay is an adjustable item that sets a delay in turning
off the supply air fan when the unit is shut off while cooling or
heating operation is active.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER34www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
SAF Set-up
Table 21: Supply Fan Speed Menu
Item Display Name
SAF Ctrl=
AplyInputChgs=
CO2 Input=
CFM Input=
BSP Input=
Rem SAF Cap=
DSP DB=
SAF Ramp Time=
Min Period=
Max Spd Chg=
DuctPress1=
Min Clg Spd=
Max Clg Spd=
Min Htg Spd=
Max Htg Spd=
Space Period=
Space Gain=
Space PAT=
Space Max Chg=
Default Setting
Range
DSP
Spd/Net
1ZnVAV
DSP
BSP
CO2
CFM
No
No
Yes
None
None
VDC
MA
None
None
VDC
MA
No
No
Yes
SPEED CONTROL
33%
0–100%
DSP CONTROL
0.1in
0–0.5in
60s
0–999s
5s
0–999s
15%
0–100%
—
0.0–5.0in
1 ZONE VAV CONTROL
40%
0–100%
100%
0–100%
40%
0–100%
100%
0–100%
60s
0–999s
0.8
0.0–100.0s
400s
0–999s
10%
0–100%
Password Level
4
2
Item Display Name
Min PPM=
Max PPM=
V/A @ Min PPM=
V/A @ Max PPM=
Min SAF PPM=
Max SAF PPM=
Min PPM Spd=
Max PPM Spd=
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SAF Ctrl is an adjustable parameter used to select how the
supply fan is to be controlled. The supply fan can normally be
controlled by duct pressure, space temperature (single zone
VAV or 1ZnVAV) or by a percentage of supply air fan speed
from 33% to 100%. On 100% OA unit applications the fan can
be controlled to maintain building static pressure, space carbon
dioxide level or and airflow based on a field supply airflow
station. The speed option is typically used with a building
automation system. When single zone VAV control is selected,
the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the
Control Temperature input at the Occupied Cooling Set Point or
Occupied Heating Set Point. When BSP is selected the supply
fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the building static
pressure at a building static pressure Set Point.
When CO2 is selected the supply fan is controlled to maintain
the CO2 ppm between adjustable limits by varying the supply
fan speed between an adjustable range. When CFM is
selected the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain
the measured CFM at a CFM set point.
www.DaikinApplied.com35
Min CFM=
Max CFM=
V/A @Min CFM=
V/A @Max CFM=
SAF CFM DB=
SAFCFM Period=
SAF CFM Gain=
SAF CFM MxChg=
BSP DB=
BSP Period=
BSP Gain=
Max Spd Chg=
SAF Ctrl Dly=
Min Speed=
VAVBox Out=
MaxVentSpd=
Max SAF RPM=
Default Setting
Range
CO2 CONTROL
0ppm
0–5000ppm
2000ppm
0–5000ppm
0.0/V
0.0–20.0/V/mA
10.0/V
0.0–20.0/V/mA
800
0–5000ppm
1100
0–5000ppm
50
0–100%
100
0–100%
CFM CONTROL
0CFM
0–60000CFM
10000CFM
0–60000CFM
0.0/V
0.0–20.0/V/mA
10.0/V
0.0–20.0/V/mA
3%
0–100%
30s
0–999s
0.1
0.0–100.0
5%
0–100%
BSP CONTROL
0.01in
0.0–0.1in
5s
0–999s
0.2
0.0–100.0s
4%
0–100%
SAF SETUP
30s
0–999s
33%
0–100%
Heat
—
Cool
100%
0–100%
2600
0–5000
Password Level
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
AplyInputChgs is the Apply Input Changes flag must be
changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize
the changes. Setting the Apply Input Changes flag to YES will
automatically reset the controller.
CO2 Input is an adjustable item used to select the type of
input for a field installed CO2 sensor. If this is set to None the
controller ignores any CO2 sensor input. If CO2 control and/
or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA
to match the input type of the field supplied CO2 sensor input.
This parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.
CFM Input is an adjustable item used to select the type of
input for a field installed airflow station. If this is set to None the
controller ignores any field airflow station input. If CFM control
and/or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA
to match the input type of the field supplied airflow input. This
parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
BSP Input is an adjustable item used to select whether on
not a building static pressure sensor is connected to the unit
controller. If this is set to No the controller ignores any building
static pressure input. If BSP control of the supply fan is desired
this parameter must be set to Yes. This parameter applies only
to 100% OA unit configurations.
Min Htg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is
selected as the method of supply fan control.
Remote SF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the supply fan
speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.
Space Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
DSP DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the DuctSP Spt= parameter. No duct static pressure control
action is taken when the current duct static pressure input is
within this dead band.
SAF Ramp Time is an adjustable item that sets the amount
of time it will take for the variable speed fan to drive from
its minimum to maximum speed as well as its maximum to
minimum speed. The SAF Ramp Time= value on the keypad
must be changed whenever the ramp time of the variable
speed fan is changed. The ramp up time must equal the ramp
down time, and both must equal the SAF RampTime value to
provide stable operation.
Max Htg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is
selected as the method of supply fan control.
Space Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used
in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when
1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
Space PAT is an adjustable item that sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
Space Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
Min Period is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the
sample time between speed changes. The sample time must
be long enough to allow the static pressure to get very close to
its steady state value before another calculation is made.
Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM
value of the field supplied CO2 input signal.
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for a speed increase or decrease. This speed change
(either a positive or negative value) is added to the current
fan speed whenever the duct static pressure is outside of the
deadband, and the Min Period time has passed since the
previous speed change.
V/mA @ Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the minimum PPM value of the field
supplied CO2 input signal.
DuctPress1 is a status only item that indicates the current
value for the duct status pressure sensor.
Min Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is
selected as the method of supply fan control.
Max Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is
selected as the method of supply fan control.
Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM
value of the field supplied CO2 input signal.
V/mA @ Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the maximum PPM value of the field
supplied CO2 input signal.
Min SAF PPM is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value at
which the supply fan speed is controlled to minimum when CO2
supply fan control is selected.
Max SAF PPM is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value
at which the supply fan speed is controlled to maximum when
CO2 supply fan control is selected.
Min PPM Spd is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
speed when the CO2 input signal is at minimum when CO2
supply fan control is selected.
Max PPM Spd is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
speed when the CO2 input signal is at maximum when CO2
supply fan control is selected.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER36www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM
value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.
Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM
value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.
V/mA @ Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the minimum CFM value of the field
supplied airflow station input signal.
V/mA @ Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the maximum CFM value of the field
supplied airflow station input signal.
SAF CFM DB is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband”
used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed
when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
SAF CFM Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sample
time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
DSP Ctrl Dly is an adjustable item that sets the duration of
time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable
speed supply air fan after the supply fan is started via a digital
output. Control reverts to either duct pressure or speed after
the fan has been on for the DSPCtrlDelay (default 30 seconds).
Min Speed is an adjustable item which is used to set the
minimum supply fan speed (default 33%).
VAVBox Out is a status only item that indicates the current
value of the VAV output. The VAV output is only available to the
field via network communications.
Max Vent Speed is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
speed when an external ventilation override input to the supply
fan is present.
Max SAF RPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
RPM value for the supply air fan. Note this is set based on the
supply fan model size and the system specifications.
Space Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used
in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when
airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
Space Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
BSP DB is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband” used
in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when
building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.
BSP Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sample time”
used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed
when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is
selected.
BSP Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used in the
PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building
static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is
selected.
www.DaikinApplied.com37
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
RF/EF Set-Up
Table 22: Return Fan/Exhaust Fan Set-up Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
None
Tracking
RF/EF Ctrl=
Tracking
BldgP
4
Spd/Net
OA Damper
Rem RAF Cap=
5%
0-100%
4
Rem ExhF Cap=
5%
0-100%
4
BSP DB=
0.01in
0.0-0.1in
4
BSP Period=
5s
0-999s
4
BSP Gain=
0.2
0.0-100.0s
4
Max Spd Chg=
4%
0-100%
4
Sup Fan Max=
100%
0-100%
4
RF @ SF Max
95%
0-100%
4
Sup Fan Min=
30%
0-100%
4
RF @ SF Min=
25%
0-100%
4
Lo Fan Diff=
75%
0-100%
4
Hi Fan Diff=
75%
0-100%
4
RFEF Ctrl Dly=
30s
0-999s
4
0-100%
4
Min Speed=
5% With Exhaust Fan
33% With Return Fan
MinExStrtTime=
120s
60-300s
4
MinExStopTime=
120s
60-300s
4
MinExhOAPos=
5%
0-100%
4
MinExhSAFCap=
10%
0-100%
4
ExhOnOAPos=
40%
0-100%
4
ExhMxOAPos=
100%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 1 On=
40%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 1 Off=
30%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 2 On=
55%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 2 Off=
40%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 3 On=
70%
0-100%
4
Exh Stg 3 Off=
50%
0-100%
4
Max RF/EF Hz=
60Hz
0-100Hz
N/A
Max RF/EF Hz=
60Hz
0-100Hz
N/A
Max RF/EF Hz=
60Hz
0-100Hz
N/A
MaxVentSpd=
100%
0-100%
2
Max RFEF RPM=
2600
0-5000
2
ECM Status=
—
OK
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER38www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
RF/EF Ctrl is an adjustable parameter used to select how the
return/exhaust fans are to be controlled. The exhaust fans
can be controlled by the building pressure or by a percentage
of return/exhaust air fan speed from 5% to 100%. The speed
option is typically used with a building automation system.
Remote RAF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the return
fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.
Remote ExhF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the exhaust
fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.
BSP DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the BldgSP Spt parameter. No building static pressure control
action is taken when the current building static pressure input
is within this dead band.
BSP Period is an adjustable item which sets the ding stat
periodadjustable item which sets the ding static pressure
return air or exhaust fan speed.
RFEF Ctrl Delay is an adjustable item that sets the duration
of time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable
speed supply air fan after the return fan is started via a
digital output. Control reverts to either building pressure
or speed after the fan has been on for the BSPCtrlDelay
(default 30 seconds).
Min Speed is an adjustable item the sets the minimum of the
RF/EF fan
MinExStopTime is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds). Once
stopped, the exhaust fan must remain off for a minimum of this
time before it can be re-started.
MinExhOAPos is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
Exhaust OA Position (default 5%). The outdoor air dampers
must be open more that this value for prop exhaust fan
operation.
BSP Gain is an adjustable item which sets the ding static in
the PI control function that modulates the return air or exhaust
fan speed.
MinExhSAFCap is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%). The supply air fan speed
must be higher than this value for prop exhaust fan operation.
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for a exhaust speed increase or decrease. This speed
change (either a positive or negative value) is added to the
current fan speed whenever the building static pressure is
outside of the deadband, and the BSP Period= time has
passed since the previous speed change.
Exh Mx OA Pos is an adjustable item that sets the OA damper
position at which the exhaust fan will be at is maximum speed.
Sup Fan Max is an adjustable item used to set the supply
fan maximum speed when the RF/EF control method is set
to tracking.
RF @ SF Max is an adjustable setting used to set the return fan
speed when the supply fan is operating at its maximum speed.
Sup Fan Min is an adjustable item used to set the supply fan
minimum speed when the RF/EF control method is set to tracking
RF @ SF Min is an adjustable setting used to set the return fan
speed when the supply fan is operating at its minimum speed.
Lo Fan Diff is an adjustable setting used to set the differential
value between supply fan speed and return fan speed. The
return fan will not modulate below the current supply fan speed
minus the low fan differential.
Hi Fan Diff is an adjustable setting used to set the differential
value between supply fan speed and return fan speed. The
return fan will not modulate above the current supply fan speed
plus the low fan differential.
www.DaikinApplied.com39
Exh On OA Pos is an adjustable item that turns on the exhaust
fan when the OA damper position reaches this setting.
Exh Stage 1,2,3 On is an adjustable setting that sets the
damper positions at which point the staged exhaust fans are
turned ON.
Exh stage 1,2,3 Off is an adjustable setting that sets the
damper positions at which point the staged exhaust fans are
turned OFF.
Max RF/EF Hz is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
return/exhaust fan value. The maximum value settings must
also be changed in the VFD’s to match this setting.
MaxVentSpd is an adjustable item that sets the exhaust
fan speed when an external ventilation override input to the
exhaust fan is present.
Max RFEF RPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
RPM value for the exhaust air fan. Note: This is set based on
the exhaust fan model size.
ECM Status is a status only item that indicates the current
status of the return/exhaust fan motor
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up
Table 23: Heat/Cool Changeover Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Ctrl Temp Src=
RAT
Use Tstat Spt=
Occ Clg DB=
Clg Period=
Clg Gain=
Clg PAT=
Max Clg Chg=
Occ Htg DB=
Htg Period=
Htg Gain=
Htg PAT=
Max Htg Chg=
AplyTstatChg=
CalRemSpt@10°C=
CalRemSpt@50°F=
CalRemSpt@30°C=
CalRemSpt@86°F=
No
2.0°F
60s
0.1
600s
5.0°F
2.0°F
60s
0.1
600s
5.0°F
No
No
No
No
No
Range
RAT
Space
MAT
OAT
None
No, Yes
0.0–10.0°F
0–999s
0.0–100.0
0–999s
0.0–50.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
0–999s
0.0–100.0
0–999s
0.0–50.0°F
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
Password Level
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Ctrl Temp Src is an adjustable item which selects the
temperature sensor input to be used for the unit heating/
cooling changeover or occupied cooling and heating capacity
change decisions. For example, if the CtrlTemp Src parameter
is set to “Return,” then the Control Temp parameter reads the
same value as the Return Air parameter.
Htg Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in
zone control applications.
Use Tstat Spt is an adjustable item used to set whether or not
to use the Tstat set point adjustment value for the Occ Clg Spt
and Occ Htg Spt.
Htg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in
zone control applications.
Occ Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band
around the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter. For example, if
the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter is set to 75ºF and the Clg
Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the
set point would be from 76.0ºF to 74.0ºF.
Clg Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in
zone control applications.
Clg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in
the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in zone control
applications.
Clg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in
zone control applications.
Max Clg Change is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Clg Spt in zone
control applications.
Occ Htg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band
around the Occ Heating Set Point parameter. For example, if
the Occ Heating Set Point parameter is set to 70ºF and the Htg
Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the
set point would be from 69.0ºF to 71.0ºF.
Htg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in
the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in zone control
applications.
Max Htg Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Htg Spt in zone
control applications.
AplyTstatChg is an adjustable item that resets the controller.
This is required to affect changes to the Use TstatSpt
parameter.
CalRemSpt@10°C is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor minimum setpoint input when the
engineering units set to SI.
CalRemSpt@50°F is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor minimum setpoint input when the
engineering units set to English.
CalRemSpt@30°C is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor maximum setpoint input when the
engineering units set to SI.
CalRemSpt@86°F is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor maximum setpoint input when the
engineering units set to English.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER40www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Cooling Set-Up
Table 24: Cooling Set-up Menu
Item Display Name
Clg Stage Time=
Clg DB=
Clg Lo OAT Lk=
OAT Diff=
Default Setting
5min
2.0°F
55°F
2°F
Clg Reset=
None
Min Clg Spt=
65.0°F
Min Clg Spt @=
0/NA
Max Clg Spt=
65.0°F
Max Clg Spt @=
100/NA
Unocc Diff=
3°F
Range
5–60min
1.0–10.0°F
0–100°F
0–10°F
None
Ntwrk
Space
Return
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow
40.0–100.0°F
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
%
40.0–100.0°F
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
%
0–10°F
Password Level
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
2
Clg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period between compressor stage changes.
Clg Reset is an adjustable item that is used to set the type of
cooling reset to be used.
Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the discharge cooling set point parameter. For example, if the
discharge cooling set point parameter is set to 55ºF and the
Clg Db parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set
point would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF.
Min Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
Clg Lo OAT Lk is an adjustable item which sets the low
outdoor air temperature mechanical cooling lockout point.
Mechanical cooling operation is disabled when the outdoor air
temperature sensor input falls below this set point.
OATDiff is an adjustable item which sets a differential above
the OAT Clg Lock parameter. Mechanical cooling operation is
re-enabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input rises
above the OAT Clg Lock value by more than this differential.
www.DaikinApplied.com41
Min Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the
minimum DAT cooling set point value.
Max Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
Max Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the
maximum DAT cooling set point value.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Variable Compressor Set-up
Table 25: Variable Compresor Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Compressor Status
Var Cmp Status=
—
Var Spd Cmd=
—
Comp 1=
—
Comp 3=
—
Comp 5=
—
OFF
ON
0–100%
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4
4
4
4
4
Refrig Circuit Status
PTD1=
—
0–5000kPa
4
PTD2=
—
0–5000kPa
4
VCmpDischSH=
—
-100.0–100.0°F
4
C1DschSatTmp=
—
-50.0–212.0°F
4
C2DschSatTmp=
—
-50.0–212.0°F
4
DRT1=
—
-50.0–392.0°F
6
DRT2=
—
-50.0–392.0°F
6
Cond Sol 1=
OFF
Cond Sol 2=
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4
4
Compressor Setup
Var Cmp Period=
20s
1–300s
4
Var Cmp Gain=
1
0.0–100.0
4
Var Cmp PAT=
40s
0–999s
4
VarCmp MaxChg=
10%
0–50%
4
OilBoost=
OFF
OFF
ON
2
LowOilTime=
10m
1–30m
2
OilBoostTime=
15m
1–15m
2
LowTcOAT=
80°F
50–122°F
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER42www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Var Cmp Status is a status only item that indicates whether
variable speed compressor on circuit # 2 is ON or OFF.
Var Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current
commanded speed of variable speed compressor on circuit # 2
Comp 1 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed
speed compressor# 1 is ON or OFF.
Comp 3 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed
speed compressor# 3 is ON or OFF.
Comp 5 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed
speed compressor# 5 is ON or OFF
PTD 1 is a status only item which displays the current value of
the discharge line refrigerant pressure for circuit #1.
PTD 2 is a status only item which displays the current value of
the discharge line refrigerant pressure for circuit #2.
VCmpDischSH is a status only item that indicates the current
discharge superheat value for the variable compressor
circuit based on discharge refrigerant temperature minus the
discharge saturation temperature.
VarCmp Period is an adjustable item that sets the sample
period for the PI loop used to control the variable speed
compressor capacity to maintain the effective discharge air
temperature setpoint.
Var Cmp Gain is an adjustable item that sets the Gain for the
PI loop used for the PI loop used to control the variable speed
compressor capacity to maintain the effective discharge air
temperature setpoint.
Var Cmp PAT is an adjustable item that sets the project ahead
time for the PI loop used for the PI loop used to control the
variable speed compressor capacity to maintain the effective
discharge air temperature setpoint.
Var Cmp MaxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
change value for the PI loop used for the PI loop used to
control the variable speed compressor capacity to maintain the
effective discharge air temperature setpoint.
OilBoost is an item that indicates whether the l variable speed
compressor oil boost sequence is On or Off and also allows
the sequence to be manually initiated or terminated.
DRT 2 is a status only item which displays the current
discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for
variable speed compressor on circuit #2.
LowOilTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time a low oil level signal must be detected before the variable
speed compressor low oil boost sequence is initiated.
C1DschSatTmp is a status only item which displays the
current discharge pressure equivalent saturation temperature
for circuit #1.
OilBoostTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the oil boost sequence remains active once initiated.
C2DschSatTmp is a status only item which displays the
current discharge pressure equivalent saturation temperature
for circuit #2.
LowTcOAT is an adjustable item that sets the OAT solenoid
valve setpoint used with condenser coil splitter valve control.
Cond Sol 1 is a status only item that indicates whether the
condenser coil splitter valve for circuit #1 is ON or OFF.
Cond Sol 2 is a status only item that indicates whether the
condenser coil splitter valve for circuit #2 is ON or OFF.
www.DaikinApplied.com43
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Figure 10 graphically shows the cooling reset operation. The
normal DAT cooling set point is 55.0 F. The cooling reset
scheme is set to airflow. The unit is to adjust the DAT from 55.0
F to 65.0 F. When the unit is at 35% of the design airflow the
discharge temperature is to be 65.0 F. When the unit is at 80%
of its airflow the DAT is to be 55.0F. This example would give
the following inputs:
Unocc Diff is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied
cooling differential.
Figure 10: Cooling Setpoint
• Min Clg Spt= 55.0 F
• Min Clg Spt @= 80%
• Max Clg Spt= 65.0 F
• Max Clg Spt @= 35%
Based on the above, the unit will have a discharge air
temperature set point of 55.0 F from 80% to 100% of the
airflow.
Econo Set-up
Table 26: Economizer Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
EconChgovr=
Enth&DB
Econo FDD=
ON
Clg Stg Time=
Clg Stg Time=
Chgover Temp=
Clg DB=
Econo Period=
Econo Gain=
Econo PAT=
Econo Max Chg=
5min
5min
55.0°F
2.0°F
30/40s (air/water)
1-Oct (air/water)
60/40s (air/water)
10/15% (air/water)
Flush Econo=
Yes
Econo Diff=
EWT Diff=
2°F
3.0°F
Clg Reset=
None
Min Clg Spt=
55.0°F
Min Clg Spt @=
0/NA
Max Clg Spt=
65.0°F
Max Clg Spt @=
100/NA
Max OAT Lmt=
Min OAT Lmt=
75.0°F
70.0°F
Calibrate OAD=
No
PosSwOpen=
Max Sw Diff=
PosSwClose=
Min Sw Diff=
97%
3%
3%
5%
OAD Sw Status=
—
Range
None
OAT
OAT/RAT
Enth&OAT
OFF
ON
5–60min
2–60min
0.0–100.0°F
1.0–10.0°F
0-999s
0.0–100.0
0–999s
0–100%
No
Yes
0–10°F
0.0–10.0°F
None
Network
Space
Return
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow
40.0–100.0°F
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
%
40.0–100.0°F
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
%
50.0–100.0°F
50.0–100.0°F
No
Yes
0–100%
0–100%
0–100%
0–100%
Open
Closed
Password Level
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER44www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
EconChangover is an adjustable item used to set how
economizer operation will be enabled
Econo FDD is an adjustable item used to enable or disable the
Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics function
Clg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period between compressor stage changes.
Chgover Temp is an adjustable item which sets the OA dry
bulb temperature at which the units changes over to the
economizer operation.
Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the discharge cooling setpoint parameter. For example, if the
discharge cooling setpoint parameter is set to 55ºF and the Clg
DB parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point
would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF.
Econo Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.
Econo Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.
Econo PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.
Econo Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the economizer actuator.
Flush Econo is an adjustable item used to enable the
waterside economizer flush mode sequence.
Econo Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential
above the EconChgovrT parameter. Economizer operation is
disabled when the OA Temp parameter indicates a value above
the EconChgovrT= parameter by more than this differential.
EWT Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential below
the MAT at which waterside economizer operation is enabled
based on entering water temperature.
Min Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
Max Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
Max Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the
maximum DAT cooling setpoint value.
Max OAT Lmt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
outdoor air temperature for the applicable climate zone above
which economizer should not be enabled.
Min OAT Lmt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
outdoor air temperature for the applicable climate zone below
which economizer should be enabled. .
Calibrate OAD is an adjustable item used to initiate the
calibration function that captures the command position at which
the outdoor damper position end switches open and close at the
closed and open ends of the damper modulation range.
PosSwOpen is an item that indicates the captured command
position at which the outdoor damper position end switch
closes at the open end of the damper modulation range. This
parameter can also be manually adjusted.
Max Sw Diff is an item that indicates the captured switch
differential at the open (maximum) end of the damper
modulation. This parameter can also be manually adjusted.
PosSwClose is an item that indicates the captured command
position at which the outdoor damper position end switch
closes at the closed end of the damper modulation range. This
parameter can also be manually adjusted.
Min SW Diff is an item that indicates the captured switch
differential at the closed (minimum) end of the damper
modulation. This parameter can also be manually adjusted.
OAD Sw Status is a status only item that indicates the
current condition of the damper end switch position input
(Open/Closed).
Min Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the
minimum DAT cooling setpoint value.
www.DaikinApplied.com45
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Min OA Set-Up
Table 27: Min OA Damper Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Apply Changes
No
4
Min OA Reset=
None
BSP OA Ovrd
No
Rst Lmt Snsr
None
OA @ MinV/mA=
OA @ MaxV/mA=
0%
100%
Min V/mA=
0.0/
V
Max V/mA=
10.0/
V
PPM @DCV Lmt=
PPM @Vnt Lmt=
IAQ PPM=
Min PPM=
Max PPM=
800ppm
1000ppm
0ppm
2000ppm
V/A @Min PPM=
0.0/
V
No, Yes
None
Network
Ext VDC
Ext mA
IAQ VDC
IAQ mA
No/Yes
None
DAT
EFT
MAT
0–100%
0–100%
0.0–20.0/
V
mA
0.0–20.0/
V
mA
0–5000ppm
0-5000ppm
0–5000ppm
0–5000ppm
0–5000ppm
0.0–20.0/
V
mA
V/A @Max PPM=
10.0/
V
V
mA
Min CFM
Max CFM
4
0CFM
10000CFM
V/A @ Min CFM
0.0/
V
V/A @ Max CFM
10.0/
V
Min Fan Diff=
Max Fan Diff=
Min Clg Spd=
Des Clg Spd
DesignFlow=
20%
50%
40%
100%
Yes
Field AO Stn
None
OA Flow=
Min OA Flw Spt=
Des Flo DB=
DF Period=
Des Flo Gain=
DF Max Chg=
OA CFM DB
OA CFMPerod
OA CFM Gain
OA CFM Max Chg
LH Lvl Pos=
RH Lvl Pos=
MinRFEFTm=
BSPOvdST=
BSPOvdGain=
BSPOvdMxChg=
ResetTLmt=
RstTSmplT=
RstTGain=
RstTPAT=
RstTMaxChg=
Min Inc Rate=
Max Inc Rate=
0-30% OA Max=
2000CFM
3%
30s
0.1
5%
3%
30s
0.1
5%
120sec
5sec
0.2
4%
32.0°F
5sec
0.2
60sec
4%
0.03
1.0
30%
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0.0–20.0/
0–60000CFM
0–60000CFM
0.0–20.0/
V
mA
0.0–20.0/
V
mA
0–100%
0–100%
0–100%
0–100%
Yes, No
None
VDC
mA
0–60000CFM
0–60000CFM
0–100%
0–999s
0.0–100.0
0–100%
0–100%
0–999s
0.0–100.0
0–100%
0.00–100.00%
0.00–100.00%
0–3600sec
0–999sec
0–999
0–100%
0–100°F
0–999sec
0–999
0-999sec
0–100%
0.0–100.0
0.0–100.0
0–100%
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER46www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Apply Changes - the Apply Changes flag must be changed
from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize
the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to YES will
automatically reset the controller.
Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM
value.
Min OA Reset is an adjustable item that sets the type of
minimum OA damper position reset to be used. When this
is set to “None” the Min OA Pos= parameter is set to the
Ventilation Limit. When this is set to “Network,” “Ext VDC,” “Ext
mA,” “IAQ VDC,” or “IAQ mA” then the Min OA Pos= parameter
varies from the Ventilation Limit down to the Demand Control
Ventilation Limit as the reset signal goes from its maximum to
minimum value.
V/mA @ Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the
minimum PPM value at the minimum DC voltage or mA value
of the CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to “IAQ
VDC” or “IAQ mA.”
NOTE: When the Min OA Reset type is set to Network and
the Apply changes flag is set to yes, the value of the
Vent Limit is automatically set to 100%, the value of
the DCV limit is set to 0% and the LoFlo V Lmt is set
to 0%.
BSP OA Ovrd is an adjustable item used to enable/disable the
building static pressure override feature.
Rst Lmt Snsr is an adjustable item used to set the sensor to
be used in conjunction with the OA reset limit function.
OA @ MinV/mA is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min OA
Pos= is when the field signal is at minimum value.
NOTE: Min OA Pos= is limited above the Demand Control
Ventilation Limit.
OA @ MaxV/mA is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min OA
Pos= when the field signal is at the minimum value.
NOTE: Min OA Pos= is limited below the ventilation limit.
Min V/mA is an adjustable item used to set the minimum value
of the field input signal.
Max V/mA is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
value of the field input signal.
PPM @ DCV Limit is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what
PPM value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Demand Control
Ventilation Limit value.
PPM @ Vent Limit is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what PPM
value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Ventilation Limit value.
IAQ PPM is a status only item which indicates the current
reading from the CO2 sensor.
www.DaikinApplied.com47
Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM
value.
V/mA @ Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the
maximum PPM value at the maximum DC voltage or mA value
of the CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to “IAQ
VDC” or “IAQ mA.”
Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM
value of the field supplied flow station.
Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM
value of the field supplied flow station.
V/A @ Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the sensor
input value at minimum CFM reading.
V/A @ Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the sensor
input value at maximum CFM reading.
Min Fan Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential
between the discharge and return fan capacities above which
the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= begins to be reset
upwards from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit toward the
Ventilation Limit.
Max Fan Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential
between the discharge and return fan capacities at which
the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= is fully reset up to the
Ventilation Limit.
Min Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the discharge fan
speed on a VAV unit at which the Ventilation Limit reaches the
LoFloVent= value.
Des Clg Spd is an adjustable item used to adjust the design
cooling speed setpoint.
Design Flow is an adjustable item used to turn the optional
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring reset function on and
off. This is one of several available methods of automatically
resetting the Min OA Pos parameter.
Field OA Stn is an adjustable item used to turn the optional
field supplied outdoor airflow measuring station function ON
and OFF.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
OA Flow is a status only item which indicates the current
outdoor airflow based on an optional OA airflow sensor input
used when the unit is equipped the DesignFlow OA control
feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.
Min OAFlw Spt is an adjustable item that is used to set the
minimum design flow CFM’s when the unit is equipped with the
optional DesignFlow OA control feature, or a field supplied OA
measuring station.
OA CFM DB is an adjustable item which sets the “deadband”
used in the control function that modulates Min OA Pos
parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the MinOA
Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field
supplied OA measuring station.
OA CFMPeriod is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function that modulates the Min
OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the
MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field
supplied OA measuring station.
OA CFM Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain”
used in the PI control function that modulates the Min OA Pos
parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the MinOA
Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field
supplied OA measuring station.
OA CFM Max Chg is an adjustable item which sets the
“maximum step” used in the control function that modulates
the Min OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter
at the MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the
optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a
field supplied OA measuring station.
LH Lvl Pos is a status item which is used to calibrate the lefthand side (unit opposite drive side) of the optional DesignFlow
outdoor measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration
of the DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable modelspecific installation and maintenance manual.
BSPOvdST an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
used in the PI control function used for the building static
pressure override feature.
BSPOvdGain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
in the PI control function used for the building static pressure
override feature.
BSPOvdMxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the outside air damper
position due to the building static pressure override feature.
ResetTLmt is an adjustable item which sets a temperature low
limit which overrides functions that reset the outside air damper
position if the temperature gets too cold.
RstTSmplT an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
used in the PI control function used for the Reset Temperature
Limit feature.
RstTGain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
the PI control function used for the Reset Temperature Limit
feature.
RstTPAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function used for the Reset
Temperature Limit feature.
RstTMaxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
change value PI loop used for the Reset Temperature Limit
feature.
Min Inc Rate is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.
Max Inc Rate is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.
0-30% OA Max is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
outside air damper position when the unit is configured for a
30% damper.
RH Lvl Pos is a status item which is used to calibrate the righthand side (unit drive side) of the optional DesignFlow outdoor
measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration of the
DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable model-specific
installation and maintenance manual.
MinRFEFTm is an adjustable item used to set the time period
for which the return/exhaust fan must operate at the minimum
speed before the building static pressure override function is
activated.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER48www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Heating Set-Up
The Heating menu provides a summary of the control
parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode
of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the
heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating
mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.
The control temperature can be return temperature, space
temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the
heating mode of operation when the control temperature is
below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
Table 28: Heating Set-Up Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Htg Stage Time
5min
2–60min
4
Htg DB
2.0°F
1.0–10.0°F
4
Htg Period=
60s
0–999s
4
Htg Gain=
0.1
0.0–100.0
4
Htg PAT=
600s
0–999s
4
Htg Max Chg
10%
0–100%
4
Htg Hi OAT Lock
55°F
0–100°F
4
OAT Diff
2°F
0–10°F
4
Htg Reset=
None
None
Ntwrk
Space
Return
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
6
Min Htg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–140.0°F
6
Min Htg Spt @
0/NA
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
6
Max Htg Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–140.0°F
6
100.0°F
0–100/
NA
°F
°C
mA
6
Max Htg Spt @
Min DAT Ctrl=
Yes
Yes, No
6
Min Dat Limit
55.0°F
0.0–70.0°F
4
4
F&BP Method=
OpenVlv
OpenVlv
ModVlv
F&BP ChgOvrT=
37°F
0–60°F
4
Occ Heating=
Yes
Yes, No
6
Unocc Diff=
3°F
0–10°F
2
Htg Warmup Tm=
240s
0–999s
2
Htg Hld Period=
240s
0–999s
2
Max Purge Hld=
20s
10–180s
2
Gas Derate V=
10.0V
0–10.0V
2
RAT
RAT
Space
None
2
MWU Sensor
www.DaikinApplied.com49
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Htg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period between heating stage changes.
Htg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the discharge heating setpoint parameter. For example, if the
discharge heating setpoint parameter is set to 100ºF and the
Htg DB= parameter is set to 2ºF, the dead band around the set
point would be from 101.0ºF to 99.0ºF.
Htg Period an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
used in the PI control function that modulates the heating valve
or face & bypass dampers.
Htg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
the PI control function that modulates the heating valve or face
& bypass dampers.
Htg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function that modulates the heating
valve or face & bypass dampers.
Htg Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the heating valve or face
& bypass damper position.
Htg Hi OAT Lock is an adjustable item which sets the high
outdoor air temperature heating lockout point. Heating
operation is disabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor
input rises above this set point.
OAT Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential below
the OATHtg Lock parameter. Heating operation is re-enabled
when the outdoor air temperature sensor input falls below the
OATHtg Lock value by more than this differential.
Htg Reset is an adjustable item used to set the type of heating
reset to be used.
Min Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
Min DAT Limit is a status only item which indicates the
discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control
units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when
the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only
operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the
minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt.
F&BP Method is an adjustable item used to set the face and
bypass control method. When a unit equipped with steam or
hot water and face and bypass damper, there are two methods
available for controlling the heating arrangement. These are
the “Open Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods.
F&BP ChgOvrT is an adjustable item used to set the face and
bypass changeover temperature.
Htg Warmup Tm is an adjustable item which is used to set the
amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position
on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds) during the special
cold start sequence.
Htg Hld Period is an adjustable item used to set the amount
of time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated
value on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds)
during the special cold start sequence. This is to allow the
temperature to approach equilibrium with the modulating gas
heating valve at a fixed position.
Occ Heating is an adjustable item which enables and disables
the “daytime” heating mode of operation. If the Occ Heating
parameter is set to No, the unit will only go into heating during
the initial morning warm-up cycle. If the Occ Heating parameter
is set to Yes, the unit can go into the heating mode of operation
any time during the day.
Unocc Diff is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied
heating differential.
Max Purge Hld is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
maximum purge hold timer.
Min Htg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at
which the heating setpoint is reset to the Min Htg Spt value.
Gas Derate V is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
analog output value for controlling the modulating gas valve
actuator.
Max Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air
temperature set point reset schedule.
MWU Sensor is an adjustable item that sets the temperature
sensor input to be used for morning warmup heating operation
on discharge air control units. Setting this parameter to none
disables morning warm up operation.
Max Htg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at
which the heating setpoint is reset to the Max Htg Spt value.
Min DAT Ctrl is an adjustable item used on VAV or CAV
discharge control units to activate or deactivate the low
discharge temperature limit function available on units
equipped with modulating or multistage heat.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER50www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Dehum Set-Up
Table 29: Dehumidification Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
None
Rel Hum
Dehum Method=
None
RH DB=
2%
0–10%
4
Dewpoint DB=
2.0°F
2–10°F
4
RH Period=
30s
0–999s
4
RH Gain=
1
0.0–100.0
4
RH PAT=
30s
0–999s
4
RH Max Chg=
10%
0–100%
4
LSC Lo Gain=
0.2
0.0–100.0
2
RH Stg Time=
10min
0–60min
4
Stg Rht DB=
5°F
0–20°F
4
DewPt
4
Always
Dehum Ctrl=
Occupied
Sensor Loc=
Return
Occupied
Always
4
Return
OAT
4
Space
Mn Lvg Coil T=
45.0°F
40–100°F
4
Mx Lvg Coil T=
52.0°F
40–100°F
4
Rht Cmp Lmtg=
Yes
No
Yes
2
Min Rheat Spt=
55.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
4
Max Rheat Spt =
65.0°F
40.0–100.0°F
4
VDC
VDC
mA
2
RH Sens Type=
RH Min Sig=
0.0V
RH Max Sig=
10.0V
0.0–20.0
V/mA
0.0–20.0
V/mA
2
2
Min Dehum Spd=
33%
0–100%
2
Max Dehum Spd=
100%
0–100%
2
0–100%
2
0–10.00%/s
2
Rht Min Pos=
RH Dec Rate=
10% (RPS)
15% (MPS, DPS, DPH)
1
www.DaikinApplied.com51
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Dehum Method is an adjustable item used to set the
dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When
this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation is
controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity value at the Relative
Humidity Set Point. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,”
dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew
Point= value at the Dew Point Set Point. When this parameter
is set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as
mechanical cooling is not disabled.
RH DB is an adjustable item that sets a dead band around
the relative humidity set point. For example, if the RH Setpoint
parameter is set to 50% and the RH Db parameter is set to 2%
the dead band around the set point would be from 49% to 51%.
Dewpoint DB is an adjustable item that sets a dead band
around the dew point set point. For example, if the DewPoint
Spt parameter is set to 50ºF and the DewPntDb parameter is
set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from
49ºF to 51ºF.
Sensor Loc is an adjustable item which is used to select the
location of the humidity sensor. The location is selected by
setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,
Space, or OAT. The significance of the sensor location is that
this determines which temperature sensor is use to calculate the
Dewpoint. OAT can only be selected for units with DAT control.
Mn Lvg Coil T is an adjustable item which is used to set the
minimum leaving coil temperature (Default = 45°F).
Mx Lvg Coil T is an adjustable item which is used to set the
maximum leaving coil temperature (Default = 52°F).
Rht Cmp Lmtg is an adjustable item used to enable or
disable the Compressorized Reheat Cooling Capacity
Limiting Function.
Min Reheat Spt is an adjustable item which is used to set the
minimum DAT during dehumidification.
Max Reheat Spt is an adjustable item which is used to set the
maximum DAT during dehumidification.
RH Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
used in the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve.
RH Sen Type is an adjustable item used to define the field
supplied humidity sensor input signal type.
RH Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve.
RH Min Signal is an adjustable item used to define the
minimum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or
voltage signal.
RH PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function for controlling the
reheat valve.
RH Max Chg an adjustable item that sets the maximum value
for an increase or decrease for controlling the reheat valve.
LSC Lo Gain - is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain”
used in the PI control function for controlling the liquid
subcooling reheat valve.
RH Stg Time is an adjustable item is an adjustable item
which sets a stage time period for controlling reheat on units
equipped with a single stage of hot gas reheat.
Stg Rht DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band
around the reheat setpoint parameter.
RH Max Signal is an adjustable item used to define the
maximum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or
voltage signal.
Min Dehum Spd is an adjustable item used to set the
minimum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.
Max Dehum Spd is an adjustable item used to set the
maximum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.
Rht Min Pos is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
position of the reheat valve when the PI loop is active.
RH Dec Rate is an adjustable item used to set the rate of
decrease for the reheat valve, where the unit leaves the
dehumidification operation.
Dehum Ctrl is an adjustable item used to select whether
dehumidification as “always” allowed or only during “occupied”
modes of operation.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER52www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Energy Recovery Set-up
The Energy Recovery Set-up menu contains parameters that
relate to or are used to control the enthalpy wheel and exhaust
fan when a unit is equipped with an optional energy recovery
wheel system.
Table 30: Energy Recovery
Item Display Name
Energy Rvcy=
ER Wheel=
Wheel Speed=
Whl Spd Cmd=
ER LAT=
ER EAT=
Min ExhT Diff=
Max ExhT Diff=
ER Whl Stg Tm=
ER Whl Off Tm=
Rel Humidity=
Min Whl Spd
Intersect Pt=
Fst Mgmt Meth=
OA Fst Temp=
Defrost Time=
Defrst Period=
Defrst On Tm=
Defrst Off Tm=
ER Whl Period=
ER Whl Gain=
ER Whl PAT=
ER Max Chg=
Default Setting
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
2.0°F
6.0°F
5min
20min
—
5%
—
Timed
-20.56°C
5min
60min
1s
24s
30.0s
1.0
30.0s
10%
Capacity Limiting
Yes
www.DaikinApplied.com53
Range
Yes, No
On, Off
0–100%
0–100%
-50.0–200.0°F
–50.0–200.0°F
1.0–20.0°F
1.0–20.0°F
1–100min
1–100min
0–100%
0–100%
-146.2.0–150.0°F
Timed ExhAir
-40.0 – 37.78°C
0–60min
0–1440min
0–999s
0–999s
0–999.0s
0–100
0–999.0s
0–100%
Yes
No
Password Level
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Energy Rvcy is an adjustable item which turns the optional
energy recovery system ON /OFF.
Rel Humidity is a status only item that indicates the current
relative humidity reading of the sensor.
ER Wheel is a status only item used to indicate whether the
energy recovery wheel is currently ON or OFF.
Min Whl Spd is an adjustable item used to set the energy
recovery minimum wheel speed.
Wheel Speed is a status only item that indicates the energy
wheel variable speed supply air fan speed.
Intersect Pt is a status only item used to indicate the current
intersection point value from the psychometric chart where
potential for wheel frosting exists.
Wheel Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current
energy wheel variable speed supply air fan commanded speed.
ER LAT is status only item which displays the current discharge
air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.
Fst Mgmt Meth is an adjustable item used to select the frost
protection method to be used on a constant speed energy
wheel application.
ER EAT is status only item which displays the current exhaust
air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.
OA Fst Temp is an adjustable item used to set the outside air
frost temperature.
Min Exh T Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential
below the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air
frosting point. When the ER Exh T falls below the calculated
frosting point by more that this value, the energy wheel will be
driven to its minimum speed, or turned OFF, to prevent frosting.
Defrost Time is an adjustable item used to set the duration of
a defrost cycle.
Max Exh T Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential
above the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air
frosting point. Once the wheel is driven to minimum speed,
or turned off, to prevent frosting, it is driven back to maximum
speed, or turned ON, only when ER Exh T rises back above
the calculated frosting point by more that this value.
Defrst Period is an adjustable item used to set how often a
defrost cycle will be initiated.
Defrst On Tm is an adjustable item used to select how long
the constant speed energy wheel is energized during defrost.
Defrst Off Tm is an adjustable item used to select how long the
constant speed energy wheel is de-energized during defrost.
ER Whl Period an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function.
ER Whl Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum
speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost
protect mode of operation.
ER Whl Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
in the PI control function.
ER Whl Off Tm is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being
turned OFF due to a frosting/condensation condition.
ER Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value
for an increase or decrease of the energy recovery wheel speed.
ER Whl PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project
ahead time” used in the PI control function.
Capacity Limiting is an adjustable item used to turn ON and
OFF the energy wheel capacity limiting function.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER54www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Head Pressure Set-Up
The Head Pressure Set-Up menu contains parameters that are used to maintain head pressure control.
Table 31: Head Pressure Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Wtr Reg Vlv=
—
0–100%
6
Head P Circ 1=
—
0–750psi
6
Head P Circ 2=
—
0–750psi
6
Setpoint=
260psi
230–340psi
6
Head Press DB=
10psi
0–50psi
4
WRV Period=
10s
0–999s
4
WRV Gain=
3.6
0.0–100.0
4
WRV PAT=
10s
0–999s
4
WRV Max Chg=
7%
0–100%
4
WRV Init Tm=
60s
0–3600s
2
Min WRV Pos=
10%
0–100%
2
Min WRV Tmp=
58°F
20–150°F
2
Max WRV Tmp=
105°F
20–150°F
2
WRV Act Time=
130s
0–300s
2
Min WRV Time=
60s
0–3600s
2
Wtr Reg Vlv is a status only item that indicates the current
water regulating valve position.
Head P Circ 1 is a status only item that indicates the current
refrigerant pressure for circuit 1.
Head P Circ 2 is a status only item that indicates the current
refrigerant pressure for circuit 2.
Setpoint is an adjustable item that sets the refrigerant setpoint
used for controlling the water regulating valve. The waterregulating valve is modulated to maintain the refrigerant
pressure.
Head Press DB is an adjustable item that sets a deadband
around the Head Pressure Setpoint parameter.
WRV Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating
valve.
WRV Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
the PI control function of the water regulating valve.
WRV PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating
valve.
WRV Init Tm is an adjustable item that sets a minimum time
period that the WRV remains at an initial startup position
(InitPos) during the WRV start sequence..
Min WRV Pos is an adjustable item used which sets the
minimum WRV position used in the WRV start sequence
(default 10%).
Min WRV Tmp is an adjustable item which is used to set the
edited temperature where WRV at a minimum position does
not result in a high pressure condition.This is used in the WRV
start sequence.
Max WRV Tmp is an adjustable item which is used to set the
edited temperature where WRV at 100% does not result in a
low pressure condition.This is used in the WRV start sequence.
WRV Act Time is an adjustable item which is used to set the
time required for the WRV to be driven from 0 to 100%.
Min WRV Time is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
WRV time (default 60 seconds) used in the WRV start
sequence.
WRV Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the water regulating valve.
www.DaikinApplied.com55
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Evap Cond Set-Up
Table 32: Evap Condensing Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Cond Fan Spd=
—
0–100%
4
CFan Spd Cmd=
—
0–100%
4
Min Fan Speed=
33%
0–100%
4
EvCond Stg Tm=
10min
0–100min
4
Sump Temp=
—
-50.0–150.0°F
4
Min Sump T=
75.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
4
Max Sump T=
85.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
4
Sump Dump Spt=
35.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
4
Cndtvy=
—
0–5000S/cm
4
Hi Cndtvy Spt=
1100 S/cm
0–5000S/cm
4
SmpWtrLvlDly=
5mim
0–60min
4
PostClgTime=
10min
0–60min
4
SepFlshTime=
1min
0–60min
4
No
No
Yes
4
Dolphin Sys=
Cond Fan Speed is a status only item that displays the current
VFD speed when the evaporative condenser option includes a
VFD to control the first condenser fan on each circuit.
Cond Fan Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the
current condenser fan VFD commanded speed.
Min Fan Speed is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
speed for the VFD speed when the evaporative condenser
option includes a VFD to control the first condenser fan on
each circuit.
EvCond Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
time period between condenser fan stage changes.
Sump Temp is a status only item that displays the current
evaporative condenser sump temperature.
Min Sump T is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value
is used to determine when condenser fans are turned off.
Max Sump T is an adjustable item used to set a maximum
evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value
is used to determine when condenser fans should be turned on.
Sump Dump Spt is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
sump temperature. The sump is emptied to prevent freezing if
the sump temperature drops below this set point.
Sump Pump Status is a status only item that displays the
current evaporative condenser sump pump status.
Smp Pmp Delay adjustable item used to set the amount of
time the sump pump fail alarm is delayed. If the Sump Pump
status remains Off after the Sump Pump Output has been
turned on for more than the Sump Pump Delay time, a Sump
Pump fail alarm is initiated.
Conductivity is a status only item that displays the
conductivity level of the water in the sump of an evaporative
cooled condenser on rooftop units.
Hi Cndtvy Spt is an adjustable item that sets the alarm value
setpoint used to generate a conductivity problem alarm
SmpWtrLvlDly is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time sump water level input is ignored once the unit enters the
cooling state
PostClgTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the sump pump output remains on after the unit leaves
the cooling state.
SepFlshTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the Purge Valve Binary Output is turned on to flush the
solids out of the system separator.
Dolphin System is an adjustable parameter that indicates to
the controller whether or not a Dolphin water treatment method
is being used. When set to “yes” the controller assures the
sump pump is run every three days to reduce scaling.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER56www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Alarm Configuration
Alarm Limits Menu
The Alarm Limits menu is used to set the limits of the discharge
air temperature sensor and the return air temperature sensor.
Table 33: Alarm Limits Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Hi Disch Temp=
170°F
90–250°F
4
Lo Disch Temp=
40°F
-50–50°F
4
Hi Return Temp=
120°F
90–150°F
4
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Faults=
Fast
ON
OFF
Fast
Slow
4
Problems=
Slow
ON
OFF
Fast
Slow
4
Warnings=
OFF
ON
OFF
Fast
Slow
4
Hi Disch Alm is an adjustable item that sets the high
temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air
temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into
the high discharge air alarm.
Lo Disch Alm is an adjustable item that sets the low
temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air
temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into
the low discharge air alarm.
Hi Return Alm is an adjustable item that sets the high
temperature limit for the return air temperature. When the RAT
sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into the high return
air temperature alarm.
Alarm Output Config Menu
Table 34: Alarm Out Configuration Setup Menu
Item Display Name
The digital alarm output indicates the alarm group that contains
the highest priority active alarm. This output is ON when no
alarms are active. The options for the action of this output
when an alarm in a group occurs are ON, Fast Blink, Slow
Blink, or OFF. These can be edited via the keypad/display.
The default values for the three groups of alarms are:
• Warnings - OFF
• Problems - Slow Blink
• Faults - Fast Blink
A user could eliminate any signal of a particular group of
alarms through this output by selecting ON for that alarm group
in the keypad/display.
www.DaikinApplied.com57
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Alarm Delays Menu
The Alarm Delays Setup Menu can be accessed when a level 2
password has been entered. The default settings are the result
of many years of testing and should not be changed.
Table 35: Alarm Delays Setup Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
OffHtClDelay=
120s
0–999s
2
Frz DelayTime=
30s
0–180s
2
LP Delay=
2s
0–10s
2
LP Comp Delay=
5s (410A)
65s (R22/407C)
0–300s
2
Aflw Ignr Tm=
120s
0–999s
2
Sens Alm Dly=
30s
0–300s
2
Temp Alm Dly=
30s
0–300s
2
Man Clr
Auto Clr
2
Alarm Config
Emerg Stop=
Man Clr
OffHtClDelay is an adjustable item that is used to set the
duration the supply fan will remained energized when a unit
transitions to the off state while DX cooling or staged heating is
active.
Frz DelayTime is an adjustable item used to set the freeze
alarm delay time.
LP Delay is an adjustable item used to set the low pressure
switch delay time.
LP Comp Delay is an adjustable item used to set the low
pressure compressor delay time.
Aflw Ignr Tm is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is
started.
Sens Alm Dly is an adjustable item used to set the sensor
alarm delay time.
Temp Alm Dly is an adjustable item used to set the
temperature alarm delay time
Emerg Stop is an adjustable item used to set the emergency
shutdown to either manual or automatic restart.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER58www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Manual Control
The manual control of operation is a function that is used for operating the unit during a service call only. The unit must not be
operated in this mode for any extended period of time.
Table 36: Manual Control Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Manual Ctrl=
Normal
Supply Fan=
OFF
SAF Spd Cmd=
0%
RF/EF VFD=
OFF
RF/EF Spd Cmd=
OAD/Econo=
0%
0%
OAD OpCl=
Close
Var Cmp=
OFF
Var Cmp Cmd=
0%
VCmp Emg Stop=
Nrml
Comp 1 =
OFF
Comp 2 =
OFF
Comp 3 =
OFF
Comp 4 =
OFF
Comp 5 =
OFF
Comp 6 =
OFF
Comp 7 =
OFF
Comp 8 =
OFF
U1 Comp 1=
OFF
U1 Comp 2=
OFF
U2 Comp 1=
OFF
U2 Comp 2=
OFF
Cond Sol 1=
OFF
Cond Sol 2=
OFF
Cfan Outpt 1=
OFF
Cfan Outpt 2=
OFF
Cfan Outpt 3=
OFF
BP/WR Valve=
CW Valve=
0%
0%
ExhFan Out 1=
OFF
ExhFan Out 2=
OFF
ECond VFD=
OFF
ECFan Spd Cmd=
0%
EC Drn Valve=
Close
Sump Pump=
OFF
Sep Flsh Vlv=
OFF
SV1=
OFF
SV2=
OFF
www.DaikinApplied.com59
Range
Normal
ManCtrl
OFF
ON
0–100%
OFF
ON
0–100%
0–100%
Close
Open
OFF
ON
0–100%
Stop
Normal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0–100%
0–100%
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0–100%
Close
Open
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Password Level
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Table 36 continued: Manual Control Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
GasHtg OnOff=
OFF
Htg Valve=
SCR Out=
F&BP Damper=
0%
0%
0%
Htg Stg 1=
OFF
SCR Ena 1=
OFF
Htg Stg 2=
OFF
SCR Ena 2=
OFF
Htg Stg 3=
OFF
Htg Stg 4=
OFF
Htg Stg 5=
OFF
Htg Stg 6=
OFF
Reheat Valve=
0%
RH Output=
OFF
LSCRH Valve=
0%
HGBP Valve=
OFF
ERec Wheel=
OFF
ER Whl Cmd=
0%
ERBP Dmpr Cl=
OFF
ERBP Dmpr Op=
OFF
Cond Wtr Pump=
OFF
Alm Output=
OFF
Fan Op Out=
OFF
Manual Ctrl is an adjustable item that puts the unit into manual
control. Major components of the unit are turned on and off by
this control. The units normal control sequences are overridden
in this state with the exception of all the “fault” alarms and the
cooling circuit high pressure and low pressure alarms.
Supply Fan is an adjustable item that turns on the supply fan.
RF/EF is an adjustable item that turns ON the return/exhaust fan.
SAF Spd Cmd is an adjustable item only on VAV units that
sets the speed of the supply air fan.
RF/EF Spd Cmd is an adjustable item for units with VFD
on the return/exhaust fans that sets the speed of the return/
exhaust fan.
Range
OFF
ON
0–100%
0–100%
0–100%
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0–100%
OFF
ON
0–100%
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0–100%
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Password Level
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Var Cmp is an adjustable item used in manual control to turn on
the variable speed compressor
Var Cmp Cmd is an adjustable item used in manual control to sets
the speed of the variable speed compressor
VCmp Emg Stop is an adjustable item used in manual control to
test the variable speed compressor Emergency Stop function
Comp 1 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #1.
Comp 2 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #2.
Comp 3 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #3.
Comp 4 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #4.
Comp 5 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #5.
OAD/Econo is an adjustable item which is used to set the
economizer damper position.
Comp 6 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #6.
OAD OpCl is an adjustable item which is used to turn the
OA damper output ON. This output is available only on self
contained units.
Comp 8 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #8.
Comp 7 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #7.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER60www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
U1 Comp 1 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 1 on
compressor 1.
Htg Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
modulating heating valve open and closed.
U1 Comp 2 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 1 on
compressor 2.
SCR Out is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
output signal to the SCR.
U2 Comp 1 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 2 on
compressor 1.
F&BP Damper is an adjustable item used to manually drive
the F&BP damper open and closed.
U2 Comp 2 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 2 on
compressor 2.
Htg Stg 1 is an adjustable item that turns on the first stage of
heat on units equipped with staged heating.
CFan Outpt 1 is an adjustable item that turns ON the
condenser fan output #1.
SCR Ena 1 is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.
CFan Outpt 2 is an adjustable item that turns ON the
condenser fan output #2.
Cond Sol 1 is an adjustable item used in manual control to
turn ON/OFF the circuit 1 condenser coil splitter solenoid valve
Cond Sol 2 is an adjustable item used in manual control to
turn ON/OFF the circuit 2 condenser coil splitter solenoid valve
CFan Outpt 3 is an adjustable item that turns ON the
condenser fan output #3.
NOTE: Turning on any one of the compressors will
automatically turn ON the first condenser fan on
the circuit. Other condenser fans must be manually
turned ON to control the head pressure of the unit.
Refrigerant gauges must be connected to the unit
for observation of the head pressure in the manual
control mode of operation. Additional condenser fans
must be turned ON to maintain the head pressure.
Htg Stg 2 is an adjustable item that turns on the second stage
of heat on units equipped with staged heating.
SCR Ena 1 is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.
Htg Stg 3 is an adjustable item that turns on the third stage of
heat on units equipped with staged heating.
Htg Stg 4 is an adjustable item that turns on the fourth stage of
heat on units equipped with staged heating.
Htg Stg 5 is an adjustable item that turns on the fifth stage of
heat on units equipped with staged heating.
Htg Stg 6 is an adjustable item that turns on the sixth stage of
heat on units equipped with staged heating.
Reheat Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
reheat valve open and closed.
RH Output is adjustable output that turns on the Reheat valve
output.
BP/WR Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
bypass/water regulating valve open and closed.
LSCRH Valve is adjustable output that turns on the Liquid
Subcooler Reheat Valve output
CW Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
chilled water valve open and closed.
HGBP Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
HGBP Valve open and closed.
Exh Fan Out 1 is an adjustable item that turns ON Exhaust fan
output # 1.
ERec Wheel is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off
the energy recovery wheel output.
Exh Fan Out 2 is an adjustable item that turns ON Exhaust fan
output # 2.
ERec Whl Cmd is an adjustable item is an adjustable item
which is used to set the energy recovery wheel VFD speed.
ECond VFD is an adjustable item which is used to turn ON/
OFF the evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD.
ERBP Dmpr Cl is an adjustable item which is used to close the
energy recovery bypass damper.
ECFan Spd Cmd is an adjustable item which is used to set the
evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD speed position.
ERBP Dmpr OP is an adjustable item which is used to open
the energy recovery bypass damper.
EC Drn Valve is an adjustable item which is used to open/
close the evaporative cooling drain valve.
Cond Wtr Pump is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/
off the condenser water pump output.
Sump Pump is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off
the evaporative cooling sump pump.
Alm Output is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off
the alarm output.
Sep Flsh Vlv is an adjustable item that turns on the Separator
Flush Valve output.
FanOp is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the
fan operation output.
SV1 is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 1 liquid line
solenoid valve.
NOTE: When Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the Control
Mode is set to OFF so that the unit will not restart
automatically. When Manual Control is set to Normal
all digital outputs in the Manual Control menu are set
to OFF and all the analog outputs are set to 0.0% so
that all outputs are in the OFF or minimum position
when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl.
SV2 is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 2 liquid line
solenoid valve.
GasHtgOnOff is an adjustable item used to manually turn the
main gas valve output ON/OFF.
www.DaikinApplied.com61
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Service Menus
Timer Settings Menu
The Timer Settings Menu is also available from the
Commission Unit Menu, and is described on page 33
Save/Restore Menu
The Save/Restore menu can be used to save or restore the
user configured parameters as well as reset the controller back
to the factory default parameters.
Table 37: Save/Restore Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Save Params=
No
No/Yes
2
Rstr Params=
No
No/Yes
2
Rstr Factory=
No
No/Yes
2
SaveToCard=
No
No/Yes
2
LoadFromCard
No
No/Yes
2
Save Params is an adjustable item used to save the current
parameters and configuration.
SaveToCard is an adjustable item used to save the current
parameters and configuration to an SD card.
Rstr Params is an adjustable item used to restore the current
parameters and configuration.
LoadFromCard is an adjustable item used to restore the
current parameters and configuration from an SD card.
Rstr Factory is an adjustable item used to restore the factory
parameters and configuration.
NOTE: The controller will automatically perform a reset when
the value of Load From Card is changed from No to
Yes and the enter button is pushed.
Active Alarms Menu
All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were
detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These
alarms are displayed in order of group priority: Faults first,
Problems second, and Warnings last. Within each group,
alarms are displayed in the order that they were detected.
Table 38: Active Alarm Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Active Alm Count=
—
0–10
None
ClrAlms=
No
No
ClrFlts
ClrPrblms
ClrWrngs
ClrAllAlms
None
+Alarm 1:Alarm Type
—
None
+Alarm 2:Alarm Type
—
None
Event Log Menu
The last fifty events (such as variable compressor unloading
events, both detection and return to normal) as well as the
date and times that they were detected are displayed on the
Event Log menu. These events are displayed in the order
that they were detected. The event that was detected most
recently is displayed first. Multiple occurrences of the same
event may appear.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER62www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Alarm Log Menu
The last fifty alarm events (alarm detection and return to
normal) as well as the date and times that they were detected
are displayed on the Alarm Log menu. These alarm events are
displayed in the order that they were detected. The alarm event
that was detected most recently is displayed first. Multiple
occurrences of the same alarm may appear.
Table 39: Alarm Log Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Log Alm Count=
—
0–50
None
ClrLog=
No
No
Yes
None
+Alarm 1:Alarm Type
—
None
+Alarm 2:Alarm Type
—
None
Once an alarm is cleared there will be two entries in the Alarm
Log. A (+) sign will be shown next to the entry added when the
alarm became active and a (-) sign will be shown next to the
entry added when the alarm has been cleared.
Alarm Configuration Menu
The Alarm Configuration menu is also available under the
Commission Unit menu. Refer to page 57.
Analog Input Status Menu
The Analog Input Status Menu provides diagnostic information
to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will
provide current status information of the unit’s analog inputs.
The value shown is the input resistance shown in 1/10th of an
ohm scale. Example: MCB-AI1 (DAT sensor) shows a value
of 181380, the actual resistance would be 18,138 ohms. This
would translate to a temperature of 53.5 ºF.
Table 40: Analog Input Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
MCB-AI1=
—
0–99999999
2
MCB AI2=
—
0–99999999
2
MCB AI3=
—
0–99999999
2
www.DaikinApplied.com63
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Universal I/O Status Menu
The Universal I/O Status Menu provides diagnostic information
to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu
will provide current status information of the Universal inputs
and outputs. If the universal I/O is configured for resistance,
the value will be displayed in 1/10th ohm scale. If the I/O is
configured for mA, the value will be displayed in micro amps
(1 mA = 1000 micro amps). If I/O is configured for voltage, the
value is displayed in 1/1000th volt scale. Example: MCB-X7
(OA Damper analog output) shows a value of 3000, this would
translate into 3 VDC.
Table 41: Universal I/O Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
MCB X1=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X1=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X2=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X2=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X3=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X3=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X4=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X4=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X5=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X5=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X6=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X6=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X7=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X7=
—
0–9999999
2
MCB X8=
—
0–9999999
2
EMC X8=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X1=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X1=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X2=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X2=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X3=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X3=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X4=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X4=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X5=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X5=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X6=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X6=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X7=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X7=
—
0–9999999
2
EMA X8=
—
0–9999999
2
EMD X8=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X1=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X1=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X2=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X2=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X3=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X3=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X4=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X4=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X5=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X5=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X6=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X6=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X7=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X7=
—
0–9999999
2
EMB X8=
—
0–9999999
2
EME X8=
—
0–9999999
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER64www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Digital Input Status Menu
The Digital Input Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s digital inputs.
Table 42: Digital Input Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
MCB DI1=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
MCB-DI2=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
MCB DI3=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
MCB DI4=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
MCB DI5=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
MCB DI6=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
Digital Output Status Menu
The Digital Output Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s digital outputs.
Table 43: Digital Output Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
MCB DO1=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO1=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO2=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO2=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO3=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO3=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO4=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO4=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO5=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO5=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO6=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMC DO6=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO7=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO1=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO8=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO2=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO9=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO3=
Off
Off/On
2
MCB DO10=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO4=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO1=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO5=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO2=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMD DO6=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO3=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO1=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO4=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO2=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO5=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO3=
Off
Off/On
2
EMA DO6=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO4=
Off
Off/On
2
EMB DO1=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO5=
Off
Off/On
2
EMB DO2=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EME DO6=
Off
Off/On
2
EMB DO3=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMB DO4=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMB DO5=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
EMB DO6=
OFF
OFF/ON
2
www.DaikinApplied.com65
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Network Input Status Menu
The Network Input Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s network inputs.
Table 44: Network Input Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default
Setting
Net OAT In=
—
Net SpaceT In=
—
NetCurrState=
NetNextState=
—
—
Range
(No Network
value in Bold)
-50.0–200.0°F
(621.8°F)
-0.0–150.0°F
(621.8°F)
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
Standby
Auto
Password
Level
Item Display
Name
Default
Setting
Range
(No Network value
in Bold)
Password
Level
2
Net Cl Ena Vl=
—
0–255% (255%)
2
2
Net Ht Ena Sw=
—
-1.0–1.0 (-1.0)
2
Net Ht Ena Vl=
Net Ec Ena Sw=
Net Ec Ena Vl=
Net SAF Cap=
Net ExhF Cap=
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
(NULL)
Net Space IAQ=
—
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
Net Rel Humid=
Net DATClgSpt=
Net DATHtgSpt=
—
—
—
nviSetpoint=
—
OccManCmd=
—
Net MinOA=
nvoEffSpt=
nciOccClgSpt=
nciOccHtgSpt=
nciHVACType=
—
—
—
—
—
0–255% (255%)
-1.0–1.0 (-1.0)
0-255% (255%)
0–100% (164%)
0–100% (164%)
0–5000ppm
(65535ppm)
0-100% (164%)
40.0–100.0°F
40.0–140.0°F
0.0-100.0°F
(621.8°F)
Occ
Unocc
TntOvrd
Standby
Auto
0–100%
0.0–100.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
HVT_GEN
Standby
2
2
Auto
(NULL)
—
0–65534min
(65535min)
Net App Mode=
—
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
FanOnly
Auto
(Auto)
2
Net Cl Ena Sw=
—
-1.0–1.0(-1.0)
2
NetTmToNxtSt=
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER66www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Modbus Status Menu
The Modbus Status Menu provides diagnostic information
to qualified service personnel. The items listed provide the
status of the Modbus communications with the various devices
controlled by the internal Modbus network
Table 45: Modbus Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
SF MB Status=
—
Fault/OK
2
RFEF MB Status=
—
Fault/OK
2
ER MB Status=
—
Fault/OK
2
IFB MB Status=
—
Fault/OK
2
D3 MB Status=
—
Fault/OK
2
MB Resistance=
Yes
Yes/No
2
Done
Set Add 1
Set Add 2
Set AICtl
2
ECM Config=
SF MB Status is a status only item which indicates the status
of the Modbus communications between the main controller
and the supply fan motor.
RFEF MB Status is a status only item which indicates the
status of the Modbus communications between the main
controller and the return/exhaust fan motor.
ER MB Status is a status only s item which indicates the
status of the Modbus communications between the main
controller and the energy recover wheel variable speed supply
air fan.
D3 Status Menu
The D3 Status menu is provided for viewing the status of an
interface with the unit via a D3 gateway. Refer to IM 1133 –
DIII-Net Communication Gateway for detailed information.
Table 46: D3 Status Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
D3 Comm Sts=
—
D3 Addr Err=
—
D3 On/Off=
—
D3 Mode=
—
Range
OK
Error
OK
Error
Item Display Name
OA Hum Ratio= g/kg
D3 SWVers=
OAAdd1–16=
OAAdd17–32=
Default Setting
—
—
—
—
Range
0–30 g/Kg
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Password Level
2
2
2
2
OAAdd33–49=
—
XXXXXXXX
2
OAAdd50–64=
—
XXXXXXXX
2
Auto
SetOAAddr=
0
0–64
2
Cooling
CurrOAAddr=
—
0–64
2
CurrOAAmps=
—
0–200A
2
CurrOARLA=
—
0–200A
2
On
Off
Heating
Password Level
2
2
2
2
Fan
D3 Clg Spt=
—
0–100ºF
2
D3 Htg Spt=
—
0–120ºF
2
NA
Low
D3 SAF Spd=
—
D3 Min Load=
—
0–100%
2
D3 Max Load=
—
0–100%
2
Med
2
High
D3 Eco Ena=
—
OA Enthalpy=
—
Enabled
Disabled
0–86 BTU/lb
2
2
www.DaikinApplied.com67
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Sensor Offsets Menu
The Sensor Offsets Menu provides a means of calibrating the
various temperature sensor inputs to the unit. Each sensor
can be “biased” by as much as +/- 10.0°F.
Table 47: Sensor Offset Menu
Item Display Name
Disch Air=
Return Air=
SpaceTemp=
OA Temp=
ER LAT=
ER EAT=
DRT1=
DRT2=
Default Setting
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
0.0°F
Range
0.0–10.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
0.0–10.0°F
-10.0–10.0°C
-10.0–10.0°C
Password Level
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER68www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Unit Maintenance
Operating Hours
The Operating Hours menu gives a summary of the hours of
operation for each of the supply fans, return/exhaust fans,
compressors, heating and economizer operation.
Table 48: Operating Hours Menu
Item Display Name
Default Setting
Range
Password Level
Supply Fan=
—
0–50000H
6
Ret/Exh Fan=
—
0–50000H
6
Mech Cool=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 1=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 2=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 3=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 4=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 5=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 6=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 7=
—
0–50000H
6
Comp # 8=
—
0–50000H
6
Heating=
—
0–50000H
6
Economizer=
—
0–50000H
6
Tnt Override=
—
0–50000H
6
Dehumid=
—
0–50000H
6
ER Wheel=
—
0–50000H
6
Exh Out 1=
—
0–50000h
4
Exh Out 2=
—
0–50000h
4
Reheat=
—
0–50000h
4
Supply Fan is a status item which gives the number of hours
the supply fan has operated.
Heating is a status item which gives the number of hours that
the heating mode has operated.
Return/Exhaust Fan is a status item which gives the number
of hours the return/exhaust fans have operated.
Economizer is a status item which gives the number of hours
that the economizer has operated.
Mech Cool is a status item which gives the number of hours
that mechanical cooling has operated.
Tnt Override is a status item which gives the number of hours
that the unit has operated in the Tenant Override mode of
operation.
Comp #1 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #1 has operated.
Comp #2 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #2 has operated.
Comp #3 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #3 has operated.
Comp #4 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #4 has operated.
Comp #5 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #5 has operated.
Comp #6 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #6 has operated.
Dehumid is a status item which gives the number of hours that
the dehumidification has operated.
ER Wheel is a status item which gives the number of hours
that the energy recovery wheel has operated.
Exh Out 1 is a status item which gives the number of hours the
first stage exhaust fan has operated.
Exh Out 2 is a status item which gives the number of hours the
second stage exhaust fan has operated.
Reheat is a status item which gives the number of hours the
Reheat has operated
Comp #7 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #7 has operated.
Comp #8 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #8 has operated.
www.DaikinApplied.com69
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
BMS Communications Menu
LON/BACnetIP/BACnetMSTP Setup Menu
See the Installation & Maintenance Manuals below for detailed
instructions
• IM 916 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet IP
communications
• IM 917 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet
MSTP communications
• IM 918 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet
LON communications
Network Unit Set-up Menu
The Network Unit Set-up menu provides one location for the Set-up of items that can be controlled via a network BMS system.
Table 49: Network Unit Set-up Menu
Item Display Name
Default
Setting
Range
Space Sensor=
Digtl/Net
Anlog/Net
Password
Level
Item Display Name
Default
Setting
Range
Heat/Cool Changeover
None
RAT
2
Digtl/Net
Space
Unit Mode Settings
Ctrl Mode=
OFF
Ctrl Temp Src=
Heat Only
None
2
No
UseTstatSpt=
No
Occ
Oc c Clg Spt=
72.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
2
Unocc
Occ Htg Spt=
68.0°F
0.0–100.0°F
2
TntOvrd
2
Auto/Net
No
Yes
2
2
DSP
Spd/Net
None
SAF Ctrl=
Network
DSP
Space
None
Yes
Fan Control Options
Reset Options
Clg Reset=
No
2
AplyTstatChg=
Fan Only
Auto/Net
Auto/Net
MAT
OAT
Heat/Cool
Occ Mode=
RAT
OFF
Cool Only
Password
Level
Return
OAT
1ZnVAV
BPS
2
CO2
CFM
2
None
ExtmA
Tracking
ExtV
RFEF
BldgP
BldgP
Airflow
Spd/Net
None
OA Damper
2
Network
Space
Htg Reset=
None
Return
OAT
2
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow
AplyMinOAChg=
No
No, Yes
2
None
Network
Min OA Reset=
None
Ext VDC
Ext mA
2
IAQ VDC
IAQ mA
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER70www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Unit Configuration
Unit Configuration Setup Menu
After the main control board application software is loaded
into the MCB, it must be “configured” for the specific
control application. This consists of setting the value of 25
configuration variables within the MCB. These variables define
things such as the type of cooling, number of compressors and
cooling stages and the type of heat. If all of these items are not
set appropriately for the specific unit, the unit will not function
properly. The correct settings for these parameters are defined
for a given unit by the unit “Software Configuration Code.”
the control panel door.
Table 50 lists the configuration code variables including the
position within the code, description of the parameter, and the
applicable settings for each. The default values are shown
in bold font. The unit is configured at the factory however
may also be configured in the field by accessing the Unit
Configuration Menu. Once changes have been made to the
Unit Configuration Menu, the Apply Changes flag must be
changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize
the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to yes will
automatically rest the controller.
The “Software Configuration Code” consists of a 29-character
string of numbers and letters. The code can be found on the
Unit Software Identification Label located on the back side of
Table 50: Unit Configuration Menu
Configuration
Code Position
Description
1
Unit Type
2
Control Type
3
Cooling Type
4
Compressorized Cooling
Configuration
Values (Default in Bold)
Special Condition
0=Applied Rooftop (RTU)
1=Self-Contained (SCU)
2=Commercial Rooftop (MPS)
3=Rebel Cool Only (DPS)
4=Rebel Heat Pump (DPH)
0=Zone Control
1=DAT Control
2=1ZoneVAV
0 = None
1=Standard Compressorized Clg
2=Chilled Water
3=F&BP
4=Variable Comp Circuit 1
5=Variable Comp Circuit 2
6=NA
7=NA)
8=NA)
9=Digital Comp 1 Circuit
10=Digital Comp 2 Circuits
0=None
1=Generic Condenser
2=2Cmp/2Circ/3Stg
3=3Cmp/2Circ/4Stg
4=2Cmp/2Circ/2or6StgorVar
(6 stg if 7=2,3,4or5)
5=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_NoWRV
6=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_WRV
7=4Cmp/2Circ/4StgorVar
8=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_NoWRV
9=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_WRV
A=6Cmp/2Circ/6StgorVar
B=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_NoWRV
C=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_WRV
D=3Cmp/2Circ/5StgorVar
E=4Cmp/2Circ/5or8Stg)
(8 stg if 7=2,3,4or5)
F=8Cmp/4Circ/8Stg
G=8Cmp/8Circ/8Stg
H=6Cmp/3Circ/6Stg
I=Not Used
J=3 Cmp/3Circ/4Stg
K=Spare
L=1Var/1Circ
M=Var/1STD/1Circ
www.DaikinApplied.com71
RTU
MPS
DPS
DPS_H
SCU
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Table 50 continued: Unit Configuration Menu
Configuration
Code Position
Description
Values (Default in Bold)
5
Generic Condenser Stages/
VFD Comp Cfg
1 – 8 Stages (default = 8)/ 0=NA
1=Single
2=Tandom
3=Trio
6
Low Ambient
7
8
Condenser Control
Damper Type
9
OA Flow Station
10
Heating Type
11
12, 13, 14
Max Heating Stages
Max Heat Rise
15
Supply Fan Type
16
Return Fan Type
0 = No
1 = Yes
0=Std Method 1
1=Std Method 2
2=Evap ABB
3=Evap MD2
4=Evap MD3
5=Evap DF
6=Not Used
7=EBM
8=INV
9=INV w/MicroC OA Coil
0=None
1=Single Position 30%
2=Single Position 100%
3=Economizer Airside
4=Economizer Waterside
5=100%OA_D3
6=AirEcon_D3
7=30%_DOAS
8=EconoAirsideFDD
9=D3EconFDD
0=None
1=DF_015-030 (800)
2=DF_036-042 (802)
3=DF_045-075 (047)
4=DF_080-135 (077)
5=Generic Flow Station
6=Generic Flow Station w/CO2
7=Ebtron MB
0=None
1=F&BP Control
2=Staged
3=Modulated Gas, 3-1
4=Modulated Gas 20-1
5=Steam or Hot Water
6=SCR Electric
7=MPSLoGas
8=MPSHiGas
1-8 Stages (Default = 1)
Three Digits (Default = 100)
0=Constant Volume
1=VFD/ABB
2=VFD/DF
3=VFD/MD2
4=VFD/MD3
5=VFD/MD6
6=EBMVAV
7=EBMCAV
0=CAV
1=RF_EF VFD/ABB
2=RF_EF VFD/DF
3=RF_EF VFD/MD2
4=RF_EF VFD/MD3
5=RF_EF VFD/MD6
6=PrpEx VFD/ABB
7=PrpEx VFD/DF
8=PrpEx VFD/MD2
9=PrpEx VFD/MD3
A=PrpEx VFD/MD6
B=None
C=1StageExh
D=2StageExh
E=3StageExh
F=EBMVAV
G=EBMCAV
Special Condition
RTU
●
MPS
DPS
DPS_H
SCU
●
●
(if 4=4, 5or 6) (if 4=4, 5or 6)
This position currently
has no effect on unit
operation.
Values 1, 2, 5 & 7
only apply if
Position 1 = 0 (RTU),
2 (MPS), 3 or 4 (DPS)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Value 4 only applies if
Position 1 = 1 (SCU)
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER72www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Table 50 continued: Unit Configuration Menu
Configuration
Code Position
Description
17
Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity
Control Method
18
Second Duct Pressure Sensor
19
Entering Fan Temp Sensor
20
Energy Recovery
21
Cooling Circuit Type
22
Head Pressure Control
23
Bypass Valve Control
24, 25, 26
Unit Size
27
Refrigerant Type
28
Reheat Type
29
Unit Voltage
30
EVType
Values (Default in Bold)
0=None
1=Tracking
2=Building Pressure
3=Speed
4=OADamper
0=No
1= Yes
0=No
1=Yes
0=None
1=ConstSpdWhl/NoRH
2=VarSpdWhl/Danfoss
3=VarSpdWhl/MD2
4=VarSpdWhl/MD3
5=VarSpdWhl/ABB
6=ConstSpdWhl/wRH
0=Individual
1=2,3 or 4 Circ. Water Condenser
2=2 Circ. Air Condenser
0=No
1=Yes
0=Slave
1=Bypass
Special Condition
RTU
MPS
DPS
DPS_H
●
●
●
●
●
Values 0 and 1
are valid only when
Position 1 = 1 (SCU)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
This position
is valid only when
Position 1 = 1 (SCU).
This position
is valid only when
Position 1 = 1 (SCU).
Three digits (default 050)
0=R22
1=R407C
2=R410A
0=None
1=StgHG
2=ModHG
3=StdHtRht
4=ModLSC
5=ModHG&LSC
0=208/60Hz
1=230/60Hz
2=460/60Hz
3=575/60Hz
4=208/50Hz
5=230/50Hz
6=460/50Hz
7=575/50Hz
0=None
1=EVB_Sag
2=EVB_DF
3=MTIII_Sag
4=MTIII_DF
5=MTIII_Sag_DF
6=MTIII_DF_Sag
SCU
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Alarm Lists Menu
The Alarm Lists Menu is also available from the Service Menu
and is described on page 62.
www.DaikinApplied.com73
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Trending Menus
The Trending Menus allow for setting up and managing onboard
trending of up to 30 data points within the controller. This data
can then be exported to an SD card. The trending memory will
begin over-writing the oldest existing data in the controller’s
memory when the allocated trending memory fills up. If an
SD card is installed in the controllers SD card reader slot, an
automatic export of the data will occur every night at midnight.
Table 51: Trending Menu
Item Display
Name
Default Setting
Trending Ena=
No
Apply Chgs=
Sample Time=
No
300s
TrendOnOff=
Off
Export Data=
No
Range
No
Yes
No
Yes
1–3600s
Off
On
No
Yes
Password
Level
2
2
2
Done
ClrData
The first 8 trending points are fixed and will automatically be trended
when ever the trending function is activated.
Table 52: Points 1-8 (Fixed)
Item Display
Name
Default Setting
Range
Password
Level
Point 1=
UnitSt
UnitSt
2
Point 2=
Clg%
Clg%
2
Point 3=
Htg%
Htg%
2
Point 4=
SAF%
SAF%
2
Point 5=
OAD/Eco%
OAD/Eco%
2
Point 6=
CtrlTmp
CtrlTmp
2
Point 7=
DAT
DAT
2
Point 8=
OAT
OAT
2
2
Points 9-24 (From List)
2
Trending Points 9 through 16 can be selected from a primary
list of available date points. Trending Points 17 through 24
can be selected from a secondary list of available date points.
See Table 56 on page 76 and Table 57 on page 77 for
the primary and secondary listing of points.
Done
Clear Trend=
Points 1-8 (Fixed)
2
ClrCfg
Trending Ena is an adjustable item which enables and
disables the on board trending function.
Apply Changes is an adjustable item which must be set to
make changes to trending point definitions and sampling rate
take effect.
Sample Time is an adjustable item used to the sampling rate
for trending data points.
TrendOnOff is an adjustable item which starts and stops the
on board trending function.
Export Data is an adjustable item which initiates a manual
export of the current on board trend data to an SD card.
Clear Trend is an adjustable item used to either clear only the
current trend data or the entire trend configuration.
Table 53: Points 9-4 (From List)
Item Display
Name
Default Setting
Range
Password
Level
Point 9=
None
Primary List
2
Point 10=
None
Primary List
2
Point 11=
None
Primary List
2
Point 12=
None
Primary List
2
Point 13=
None
Primary List
2
Point 14=
None
Primary List
2
Point 15=
None
Primary List
2
Point 16=
None
Primary List
2
Point 17=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 18=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 19=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 20=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 21=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 22=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 23=
None
Secondary List
2
Point 24=
None
Secondary List
2
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER74www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Points 25-27 (With IDs)
Points 28-30 (With IDs)
Trending Points 25 through 27 can be freely selected all
the available points and point members that exist within the
controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point
ID number, point Type number and point Member number.
Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this
information for a specific point.
Trending Points 28 through 30 can be freely selected all
the available points and point members that exist within the
controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point
ID number, point Type number and point Member number.
Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this
information for a specific point.
Table 54: Points 25-27 (With IDs)
Table 55: Points 28-30 (With IDs)
Item Display
Name
Range
Password
Level
Default Setting
ID=
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
ID=
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
2
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
2
Item Display
Name
Range
Password
Level
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
2
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
2
Default Setting
Point 25
Point 28
Point 26
Point 29
ID=
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
ID=
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
2
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
2
2
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
2
Point 27
Point 30
ID=
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
ID=
F0AF0000
00000000–
FFFFFFFF
2
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
2
Type=
0000
0000–FFFF
2
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
2
Mem Num=
0100
0000–FFFF
2
www.DaikinApplied.com75
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Menu Descriptions
Trending Selection Lists
Table 56: Primary Trending Select List
HMI Name
Select Abbreviation
Type
ID
Bldg Press=
BSP
2203
F0AFC4BB
Clg State=
ClgSt
230B
F0AF3991
Clg Status=
ClgSts
230B
F0AFF6A6
Clg Press Lmtg=
ClPLmtg
230B
F0AF3B4E
Cmp Ratio Lmtg=
CpRLmtg
230B
F0AF7BA2
DAT Clg Spt=
DAClgSp
2300
F0AF64FD
Dehum Status=
DeHmSts
230B
F0AF56EA
DFT=
DFT
2203
F0AFCA19
Ref DLT Lmtg=
DLLmtg
230B
F0AFB273
DRT1=
DRT1
2203
F0AFD8D7
DRT3=
DRT3
2203
F0AFF895
Duct Press=
DSP
230A
F0AF143C
Econo Status=
EcoSts
230B
F0AFC1AB
EF/LC Temp=
EFT/LCT
2203
F0AF356B
ER EAT=
EREAT
2203
F0AF0DBB
F0AFFD44
ER LAT=
ERLAT
2203
EVI Pos=
EVI%
2203
F0AF3028
EVO Pos=
EVO%
2203
F0AF17B1
F0AFCD6B
EW Temp=
EWT
2203
Htg Press Lmtg=
HtPLmtg
230B
F0AF3FE7
INV Brd Lmtg=
IBLmtg
230B
F0AFBAB2
INV Cmp Spd=
INV%
2203
F0AFDA3E
Mixed Air=
MAT
2203
F0AFCD1F
Min OA Pos=
MinOA%
230A
F0AFEEC9
Occ Clg Spt=
OcClgSp
2300
F0AFF8A8
OccSrc=
OcSrc
230B
F0AFF838
PTD=
PTD
2203
F0AF229A
PTS=
PTS
2203
F0AF404C
Return Air=
RAT
2203
F0AFA24D
Reheat Cap=
ReHt%
230A
F0AF00F8
RF/EF Cap=
RFEF%
2203
F0AFAECF
F0AF842E
Subcooling=
SbClg
230A
Space Temp=
SpaceT
2203
F0AFF74A
SRT=
SRT
2203
F0AFC35D
Superheat=
SSH
230A
F0AFB846
STD3=
STD3
2207
F0AF03CC
Sump Temp=
SumpT
2203
F0AF503D
UnoccSrc=
UnOcSrc
230B
F0AFF6B4
Unit Status =
UntSts
230B
F0AF4FF0
Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER76www.DaikinApplied.com
Menu Descriptions
Table 57: Secondary Trending Select List
HMI Name
Select Abbreviation
Type
ID
Alarm Enumeration
Alm
230A
F0AFCF76
IAQ PPM=
CO2
2203
F0AF7F77
Cmp Ratio Lmtg=
CpRLmtg
230B
F0AF7BA2
DAT Htg Spt=
DAHtgSp
2300
F0AF6054
Dewpoint=
Dewpt
230A
F0AF532C
Dewpoint Spt=
DewptSp
2300
F0AF75C1
Defrost State=
DFSt
230B
F0AFBD68
Ref DLT Lmtg=
DLLmtg
230B
F0AFB273
EF/LC Temp=
EFT/LCT
2203
F0AF356B
Wheel Speed=
ERWhl%
2203
F0AF101D
EVI Pos=
EVI%
2203
F0AF3028
EVO Pos=
EVO%
2203
F0AF17B1
EW Temp=
EWT
2203
F0AFCD6B
Head P Circ 1=
HdPr1
2203
F0AFD3C4
Head P Circ 2=
HdPr2
2203
F0AFE3A7
Htg State=
HtgSt
230B
F0AF4BE8
Htg Status=
HtgSts
230B
F0AFD173
Htg Press Lmtg=
HtPLmtg
230B
F0AF3FE7
INV Brd Lmtg=
IBLmtg
230B
F0AFBAB2
INV Cmp Spd=
INV%
2203
F0AFDA3E
Mixed Air=
MAT
2203
F0AFCD1F
OA Flow=
OAFlw
230A
F0AFF10A
MinOAFlw Spt=
OAFlwSp
2300
F0AF6B95
Occ Htg Spt=
OcHtgSp
2300
F0AF8A33
PTD=
PTD
2203
F0AF229A
PTS=
PTS
2203
F0AF404C
F0AFA24D
Return Air=
RAT
2203
Rem ExhF Cap=
RemEF%
2300
F0AF1969
Rem RAF Cap=
RemRF%
2300
F0AF57A7
Rem SAF Cap=
RemSF%
2300
F0AF211F
Rel Humidity=
RH
2203
F0AF1DDC
RH Setpoint=
RHSp
2300
F0AFFA18
Reheat Spt=
RhtSp
230A
F0AF335D
F0AF842E
Subcooling=
SbClg
230A
Space Temp=
SpaceT
2203
F0AFF74A
SuplHtgStatus=
SpHtSts
230B
F0AF7D21
Superheat=
SSH
230A
F0AFB846
Supl Htg Cap=
SupHt%
230A
F0AF1FEA
STD3=
STD3
2207
F0AF03CC
Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration.
www.DaikinApplied.com77
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Alarms
Alarms
About this Unit
Table 58: About this Unit Menu
Menu Display Name
About this Unit
Item Display Name
SO_Item=
Unit SN=
App Version=
Cf1-15=
Cf16-29=
Main BSP=
LON BSP=
LON App Ver=
BACnet BSP=
D-Net BSP=
HMI GIUD=
OBH GIUD=
SO_Item is an adjustable item which can be used to store the
sales order number of the unit for reference purposes.
Unit SN is an adjustable item which can be used to store the
serial number of the unit for reference purposes.
App Version is the version of application code loaded into the
controller
Cf1-15 describe positions 1-15 of the unit configuration string
Cf16-30 describe positions 16-30 of the unit configuration string
Main BSP is the current version of firmware in the main
controller
LON BSP is a status only item which indicates the current
version of firmware in the LON communication module
connected to the main controller.
LON App Ver is a status only item which indicates the current
version of application code in the LON communication module
connected to the main controller.
BACnet BSP is a status only item which indicates the current
version of firmware in the BACnet communication module
connected to the main controller.
D-Net BSP is a status only item which indicates the current
version of firmware in the D-Net communication module
connected to the main controller.
HMI GUID is the HMI software identifier number unique to each
application code version
OBH GUID is the OBH software identifier number unique to
each application code version
Alarms
Alarms provide the user with information about abnormal
conditions that affect unit operation. The cause of the alarm
should be investigated and eliminated before the unit or any
disabled equipment in it is placed back into service.
Faults are conditions that are serious enough to shut down
the unit. The alarm must be manually cleared to allow unit
operation.
Problems are conditions that result in some limitation of unit
operation, but the unit is allowed to continue to operate. Some
of these alarms must be cleared manually, but others clear
automatically.
Warnings inform the user of conditions that should be
addressed, but do not limit operation in any way. The alarm
condition needs to be fixed and the alarm must be manually
cleared to cause this alarm to no longer be active.
All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were
detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These
alarms are displayed in order of priority. Higher priority alarms
are displayed first. The last fifty alarm “events” detected as well
as the date and times that they were detected are displayed
on the Alarm Log menu. An alarm “event” is either an alarm
becoming active or being cleared. A “+” symbol precedes the
active alarm event and a “-” symbol precedes the cleared
alarm event. These alarms are displayed in the order that they
were detected. The alarm that was detected most recently is
displayed first. Multiple occurrences of the same alarm may
appear.
Alarm Clearing
Active alarms can be cleared through the keypad/display or a
BAS network. Alarms are automatically cleared when power
is cycled. Alarms are cleared only if the conditions required
to initiate the alarm do not exist. All alarms and groups of
alarms can be cleared via the network or keypad by setting the
ClearAlms variable to a non-zero value as indicated in the table
below. Emergency Off Faults can be set to automatically clear
once the condition that caused the alarm is corrected. This
can be accomplished by navigating to Commission Unit/Alarm
Configuration/Emerg Stop and changing the default ManClr
value to AutoClr.
NOTE: The enumeration text is what shows up on the
keypad/display not the number. The value of this
variable automatically reverts to zero when the
alarms are cleared. This variable may be set through
the keypad in the Active Alarm menu. It may be set
via LON using nviClearAlarms and via BACnet using
the ClearAlarms object.
Table 59: Alarm Clearing
Value
Action
0
None
1
Clear All Faults
2
Clear All Problems
3
Clear All Warnings
4
Clear All Alarms
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER78www.DaikinApplied.com
Alarms
Warnings
Over Economizing
A warning alarm indicating the unit is economizing when it
should not be will be generated whenever the outdoor air
dampers are stuck open while operating in the Econo or
Cooling operating state. The dampers are considered stuck
open when either of the following abnormal situations occurs:
• The damper command value is less than the calibrated
damper end switch closed value continuously for 180
seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
• The damper end switch input does not change from
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
maximum switch differential).
The over economizing warning will also be generated if
the Econo Status is Enabled when the OAT is greater than
the Max OAT Limit setting (default 75F). Exception: This
case is ignored when the economizer enable decision is
being controlled by a network input or when the economizer
changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb
comparison (OAT/RAT).
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer present.
NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%),
Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end
switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch
differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
the OAD damper end switch calibration process.
Under Economizing
A warning alarm indicating the unit is not economizing when it
should be will be generated whenever the outdoor air dampers
are stuck closed while operating in the Econo or Cooling state.
The dampers are considered stuck closed when either of the
following abnormal situations occurs:
• The damper command value is greater than the
calibrated damper end switch open value continuously for
180 seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
• The damper end switch input does not change from
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value rising above the calibrated damper end switch
closed value (plus the calibrated minimum switch
differential)
The under economizing alarm will also be generated when the
OAT sensor is unreliable or the RAT sensor is unreliable while
the OAT is below the Min OAT Limit setting (default 70F) and
the economizer changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for
OAT/RAT dry bulb comparison (OAT/RAT).
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer present.
NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%),
Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end
switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch
differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
the OAD damper end switch calibration process.
Excess OA
A warning alarm indicating the unit is delivering excessive
outdoor air will be generated whenever the outdoor air
dampers are stuck open. The outdoor dampers are considered
stuck open when either of the following abnormal situations
occurs:
• The damper command value is less than the calibrated
damper end switch closed value continuously for 180
seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
• The damper end switch input does not change from
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
maximum switch differential).
The excess outdoor air warning will also be generated while
operating in the Econo or Cooling state when the Econo
Status is Enabled and the OAT is greater than the Max OAT
Limit setting (default 75F). Exception: This case is ignored
when the economizer enable decision is being controlled by
a network input or when the economizer changeover method
(EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb comparison (OAT/
RAT).
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer present.
NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%),
Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end
switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch
differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
the OAD damper end switch calibration process.
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer valid.
The under economizing alarm will also be generated if the
Econo Status is not Enabled when the OAT is less than
the Min OAT Limit setting (default 70F). Exception: This
case is ignored when the economizer enable decision is
being controlled by a network input or when the economizer
changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb
comparison (OAT/RAT).
www.DaikinApplied.com79
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Alarms
OAD Stuck
Dirty Filter - (Dirty Filter: Warning)
A warning alarm indicating the outdoor air dampers are stuck
and not modulating will be generated whenever the damper
are stuck open or stuck closed.
If the pressure drop across the filter section in the unit
exceeds the setting of the differential pressure switch the
Dirty Filter warning occurs. When the Dirty Filter warning
occurs, unit operation is not affected. The Dirty Filter warning
must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
network signal.
The dampers are considered stuck open when either of the
following abnormal situations occurs:
• The damper command value is less than the calibrated
damper end switch closed value continuously for 180
seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
• The damper end switch input does not change from
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
maximum switch differential).
The dampers are considered stuck closed when either of the
following abnormal situations occurs:
• The damper command value is greater than the
calibrated damper end switch open value continuously for
180 seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
• The damper end switch input does not change from
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value rising above the calibrated damper end switch
closed value (plus the calibrated minimum switch
differential)
The damper stuck warning will also be generated when the
damper end switch operation is unreliable. The ends switches
are considered unreliable when the end switch input remains
closed when the damper command value is between the
calibrated end switch closed and open values (plus and minus
the calibrated minimum and maximum switch differentials).
Airflow Switch - (Airflow Sw: Warning)
If the unit has been in the Off operating state for at least
thirty minutes and the PC7 airflow switch input to the main
controller indicates airflow, the Airflow Switch warning occurs.
This normally indicates a problem with the PC7 airflow switch.
When the Airflow Switch warning occurs, unit operation is not
affected. When the alarm condition is corrected, the Airflow
Switch warning must be manually cleared through the unit
keypad or via a network signal.
Conductivity - (Conductivity: Warning)
If the unit is equipped with a Dolphin system and the
Conductivity value rises above the alarm setpoint value,
the conductivity alarm occurs. When the alarm condition is
corrected, the conductivity warning must be manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
Return/Exh Fan Warning
When the unit is equipped with a Return/Exhaust fan VFD or
ECM motor and a loss of Modbus communications for longer
than 10 seconds a Return/Exhaust fan warning alarm occurs.
The alarm is automatically clears when the condition causing
the alarm is corrected.
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer present.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER80www.DaikinApplied.com
Alarms
Problems
Hi DL Temp: Problem
Low Discharge Superheat: Problem
Normal compressor control is limited when a high discharge
line temperature conditions occur. If the variable speed
compressor is operating and the discharge line temperature
is greater than 250F for 15 seconds a High Discharge Line
Temperature Event is generated and the variable speed
compressor capacity is reduced every 15 seconds until the
discharge line temperature falls below 220F. If the discharge
line temperature is above 250F continuously for 3 minutes the
variable speed compressor is stopped and a High Discharge
Line Temperature problem alarm is generated. The alarm must
be manually cleared.
Normal compressor control is limited when low superheat
conditions occur. If the variable speed compressor is operating
and the discharge superheat is less than 20F continuously
for 15 minutes a Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
Event is generated and the variable speed compressor
speed is increased. The variable speed compressor speed
is increased every 10 minutes as long as the discharge
superheat remains less than 20F until the maximum allowed
variable speed compressor speed (based on unit size) is
reached. If the discharge superheat remains below 20F the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a Low Superheat
alarm is generated.
DRT2 Sensor: Problem
This alarm occurs when the DRT2 sensor input is shorted or
open circuited for the Sensor Alarm Delay (default 30 seconds).
It can also occur when the variable speed compressor is off
and the input is above 329°F or the compressor has been off
for 20 minutes and the input is below -4°F.
When this alarm is active compressor cooling operation is
disabled.
The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is
taken.
Variable Compressor: Problem
If the variable speed compressor is enabled (MCB-D03
is closed) and commanded to run for 30 seconds but the
controller fails to receive the variable speed run verification
input (EMC-X4 is open) the variable speed compressor enable
output (MCB-D03) is cycled OFF for 5 seconds ( a variable
speed Compressor Emergency Stop Control Event is logged)
and then back on. The variable speed compressor is then
ramped to 45%. If this occurs 3 times in a 30 minute period the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a variable speed
Compressor Problem alarm is generated.
Low Discharge Pressure: Problem
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when
a low pressure condition occurs on the variable speed
compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor is
operating and the suction pressure (PTS) is less than 250 PSI
a Low Pressure Unloading Control Event is generated and
the variable speed compressor speed is increased every 30
seconds until either the suction pressure rises above 250 PSI
or remains lower than 250 PSI continuously for 15 minutes.
If the suction pressure is below 250 PSI continuously for 15
minutes the variable speed compressor is shut OFF and a
Low Pressure Problem alarm is generated. The alarm must be
manually cleared.
www.DaikinApplied.com81
High Discharge Superheat: Problem
Normal compressor control is limited when high superheat
conditions occur. If the variable speed compressor is operating
and the discharge superheat is greater than 75F continuously
for 15 minutes a High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
Event is generated and the variable speed compressor
speed is decreased. The variable speed compressor speed
is decreased every 10 minutes as long as the discharge
superheat remains great than 75F until the minimum allowed
variable speed compressor speed (based on unit size) is
reached. If the discharge superheat remains above 75F the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Superheat
alarm is generated.
PTD2 Sensor: Problem
This alarm occurs when either the circuit 2 discharge line
pressure inputs (PTD2) remains above 700 psi for 10 seconds
or a compressor on circuit 2 has been operating for 60 seconds
and the PTD2 value remains less than 155 psi. When this
alarm is active compressor cooling operation is disabled.
The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is
taken.
PTD1 Sensor: Problem
This alarm occurs when either the circuit 1 discharge line
pressure inputs (PTD1) remains above 700 psi for 10 seconds
or a compressor on circuit 2 has been operating for 60 seconds
and the PTD1 value remains less than 155 psi. When this
alarm is active compressor cooling operation is disabled.
The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is
taken.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Alarms
Variable Compressor Oil: Problem
If the variable speed compressor has been operating at the High
Oil Boost value for the Oil Boost Timing period and the low oil
input (EMC-X3) is still open the variable speed compressor is
stopped and a Low Oil problem alarm is generated. The alarm is
also generated if the oil boost sequence becomes active 5 times
in a 24 hour operating period.
High Pressure Circuit 2
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when
a high discharge pressure conditions occur on the variable
speed compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor
is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is greater
than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event
is generated and the VFD compressor is slowed every 10
seconds until either the discharge pressure falls to less than
525 PSI or remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes. If
the discharge pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Pressure
Problem alarm is generated. If the OAT is below 45F at the
time the variable speed compressor is shut off immediately
and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated anytime the
discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm must be
manually cleared.
High Pressure Circuit 1
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when
a high discharge pressure conditions occur on the variable
speed compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor
is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is greater
than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event is
generated and the variable speed compressor is slowed every
10 seconds until either the discharge pressure falls to less
than 525 PSI or remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes.
If the discharge pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Pressure
Problem alarm is generated. If the OAT is below 45F at the
time the variable speed compressor is shut off immediately
and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated anytime the
discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm must be
manually cleared. (Not Yet Applicable – except normal fixed
circuit high pressure switch alarm still applies
No Water Flow Problem - (Water Flw Sw: Problem)
(Self Contained only)
When a unit is equipped with a water flow switch WFS, the No
Water Flow problem occurs when lack of water flow is indicated
by an open water flow switch or a network signal and all of the
following conditions are true:
• Lack of water flow is indicated by an open water flow
switch or a Network signal
• Either of the following is true:
• The Bypass Valve has been opened greater than 50% for
more than the Bypass Valve Timer
• A water side economizer is installed and its position is
greater than 50%
• Unit is not in the Off, Start or Recirc operating state
When the No Water Flow problem occurs, the unit continues
to operate however cooling provided by compressors disabled.
When all of the alarm condition are no longer present, the
No Water Flow problem normally clears automatically and
normal unit operation resumes. If the alarm occurs three times
between 2:00 am of one day and 2:00 am of the next day, it
becomes necessary to manually clear the alarm.
Water Regulating Valve Problem - (Water RegVlv:
Problem) (Self Contained only)
When a unit is equipped with the head pressure control
option, the Water Regulating Valve Problem occurs when the
greater of the two refrigerant pressure readings drops below
the head pressure setpoint by more than the deadband while
at least one compressor is operating and the entering water
temperature is less than 58°F. These conditions have to be true
for more than 5 minutes for the alarm to become active. When
the Water Regulating Valve problem occurs, the unit continues
to operate but mechanical cooling is disabled. Mechanical
cooling remains disabled until the Water Regulating Valve
problem is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
network signal.
Low Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - (Lo Press 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6: Problem)
When a unit is equipped with individual cooling circuits, the
Low Pressure Circuit 1 problem occurs when the compressor
on circuit #1 has been running longer than the low pressure
alarm delay (65 seconds factory default for R22 or 407C
application, 5 seconds for 410A) and the low pressure switch
LP1 remains open. The alarm also occurs any time afterward
if the low pressure switch opens up while the compressor on
the circuit is running. Note: The Low Pressure Circuit 2, 3, 4, 5,
& 6 problems occur in the same manner for cooling circuits 2,
3, 4, 5, 6. Compressor #1 (2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) remains disabled for
at least one cooling stage time period. After the cooling stage
time period expires, the alarm automatically clears and the
circuit is re-enabled. If the alarm occurs three times between
2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 a.m. of the next, the alarm does
not automatically clear the third time but must be manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER82www.DaikinApplied.com
Alarms
High Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - (Hi Press 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6: Problem)
Space Temperature Sensor Problem - (Space
Sensor: Problem)
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized
cooling only. If the high pressure switch opens indicating a high
refrigerant pressure situation, the High Pressure Circuit 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 problems occurs.
If the Space Sensor Present setting is set to Yes, a valid Space
Temperature value is not provided via a network signal and
the local space sensor is shorted or open circuited longer
than the Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the
Space Temperature Sensor problem occurs. When the Space
Temperature Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to
operate with the following modifications:
When the High Pressure Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 problem occurs,
the unit continues to operate but the cooling circuit is disabled.
NOTE: The Circuit remains disabled until the high pressure
switch closes and the High Pressure Circuit problem
is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
network signal.
Sump Water Level Problem
Unit state has been cooling for the Sump Water Level Delay
time and the Sump Water Level input remains in the open
position
Entering Fan Temperature/Leaving Coil Temperature
Sensor Problem (EFT/LCT Snsr: Problem)
This alarm occurs when the Entering Fan Temperature/Leaving
Coil Temperature sensor is present and either shorted or open
circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay (Default = 30
seconds). When this alarm occurs the unit continues to operate
however dehumidification operation is disabled until the sensor
becomes reliable. The maximum DAT limit function associated
with gas or electric heat is also disabled until the sensor
becomes reliable.
Return Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (RAT
Sensor: Problem)
If the return air temperature sensor (RAT) is present and either
shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm
Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Return Air Sensor problem
occurs. When the RAT Sensor problem occurs, the unit
continues to operate with the following modifications:
• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they
are set to Return
• Control temperature source reverts from return to space if
a space temperature sensor is present and reliable
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the RAT Sensor
problem automatically clears.
• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none they are
set to Space
• Control temperature source reverts from space to return if
a return air sensor is present and reliable.
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Space
Temperature Sensor problem automatically clears.
OAT Temperature Sensor Problem -(OAT Sensor:
Problem)
If the outside air temperature sensor (OAT) is present, a valid
OAT value is not provided via the network and the local OAT
sensor is either shorted or open circuited for longer than the
Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Outside
Air Sensor problem occurs. When the OAT Sensor problem
occurs, the unit continues to operate with the following
modifications:
• Heating is not locked out due to high OAT
• Cooling is not locked out due to low OAT
• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they
are set to OAT
• Economizer is locked out due to high OAT
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the OAT Sensor
problem automatically clears.
Entering Water Temperature Sensor Problem - (EWT
Sensor: Problem)
If the entering water temperature sensor (EWT) is present and
either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor
Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the EWT Sensor problem
occurs. When the EWT Sensor problem occurs, waterside
economizer cooling is disabled. Mechanical cooling is not
locked out based on EWT. When the alarm condition is no
longer present, the EWT Sensor problem automatically clears.
Mixed Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (MAT
Sensor: Problem)
If the Mixed Air Temperature (MAT) sensor is present and
either shorted or open-circuited for longer than the sensor
alarm delay (default is 30 seconds), the MAT sensor problem
occurs. When the MAT sensor problem occurs, waterside
economizer cooling is disabled. When the alarm condition is no
longer present, the MAT sensor problem automatically clears.
www.DaikinApplied.com83
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Alarms
Freeze Problem - (Freeze: Problem)
When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled
water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze problem occurs
when the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of
detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature
while the fans are off.
Faults
Airflow Fault - (Airflow: Fault)
When the Freeze problem occurs, the controller opens the
waterside economizer valve, chilled water and heating valves,
and sets a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with a
waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on.
When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the
freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed
the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the
freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains
energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer
resets. This continues while the unit remains off. Whenever
the freezestat closes the Freeze problem automatically clears.
This feature protects the coil(s) and allows the system to start
normally when an occupied command is received.
If differential pressure switch PC7 fails to detect airflow for
longer than the airflow timer (default = 120 seconds) and on
VAV units the current duct static pressure indication is less than
half the static pressure setpoint after the unit leaves the Startup
operating state or any time afterward, while the unit is running,
the Fan Fail fault occurs. When the Fan Fail fault occurs, the
unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the Fan Fail fault
is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network
signal. On units equipped with a discharge fan VFD, the Fan
Fail fault only occurs if the Fan Retry condition described
above has first occurred twice within the previous twenty-four
hour period. The conditions that cause the Fan Retry and the
action taken are the same as for the Fan Fail fault with the
difference being that the Fan Retry is automatically reset once
the unit is shut off. This allows the unit to attempt to restart up
to three times within a twenty-four hour period.
Heat Fail Problem - (Heat Fail: Problem)
NOTE: There is no Fan Retry function or three retry function
when a unit has a CAV supply fan.
If an RPS unit is equipped with a Daikin gas furnace and
the burner flame safeguard (FSG) control enters the “safety
lockout” state after a call for heat, a digital input is provided to
EXP B-X4 on the controller. When this digital input is present
the Heat Fail problem occurs. When the Heat Fail problem
occurs, the unit continues to operate with the heating system
disabled by the FSG. Heating remains disabled until the flame
safeguard control is manually reset. The heat fail problem
clears automatically when the FSG control is reset.
If Modbus communication is lost between the MCB
and the supply fan VFD the duct static pressure is not
considered in the Fan Fail logic.
Low Discharge Air Temperature - (Lo Disch Temp:
Fault)
If the unit is not in the operating state and the discharge air
temperature is less than the Low Discharge Temperature Limit
(Default = 40°F) for longer than 30 seconds and the supply
fan has been on for longer than the LowDAT temperature
alarm delay (Default = 6 minutes), the Low Discharge Air
Temperature fault occurs. When the Low Discharge Air
Temperature fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut
down until the Low Discharge Air Temperature fault is manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
High Discharge Air Temperature - (Hi Disch Temp:
Fault)
If the discharge air temperature is greater than the High
Discharge Temperature Limit (Default = 170°F) and the supply
fan has been on for longer than the Temperature Alarm Delay
(Default = 30 seconds), the High Discharge Air Temperature
fault occurs. When the High Discharge Air Temperature fault
occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the
High Discharge Air Temperature fault is manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER84www.DaikinApplied.com
Alarms
High Return Air Temperature - (Hi Return Tmp: Fault)
Emergency Stop Fault - (Emerg Stop: Fault)
If the return air temperature is greater than the Return Air
Temperature Limit (Default = 120°F) and the supply fan has
been on for longer than the temperature alarm delay (Default
= 30 seconds), the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs.
When the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs, the unit
is shut down. It remains shut down until the High Return Air
Temperature fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad
or via a network signal.
An Emergency Stop Fault will occur if either of the following
conditions is true:
Duct High Limit Fault - (Duct Hi Limit: Fault)
If the unit is variable air volume, the contacts of the duct high
pressure limit control (DHL) open, and the unit state is not Off
or Startup, the Duct High Limit fault occurs. When the Duct
High Limit fault occurs, the unit is shut down. The unit remains
shut down until the Duct High Limit fault is manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
Discharge Air Sensor Fault -(Disch Tmp: Fault)
If the discharge air temperature sensor (DAT) is open or
short circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay
(Default= 30 seconds), the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs.
When the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut
down. It remains shut down until the Discharge Air Sensor
fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
networksignal.
Control Temperature Fault - (Control Temp: Fault)
• Emergency Stop Input in the Alarm (Open) condition
• The Net Emrg Ovrd input is set to Off via a network signal
or the keypad/display
Freeze Fault - (Freeze: Fault)
When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled
water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze Fault occurs when
the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of detecting
an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature while the
fans are running.
When the Freeze fault occurs, the controller shuts down
the fans, opens the chilled water, economizer, and heating
valves and set a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with
a waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on.
When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the
freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed
the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the
freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains
energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer
resets. This continues until the fault is manually cleared
through the keypad or via a network signal.
NOTE: Water valves remain open and Pump output remains
on for 10 minutes after alarmconditions disappear.
If the temperature sensor (ZNT1, RAT, OAT, MAT) selected
as the control temperature source is not reliable for longer
than the Sensor Alarm Delay (Default= 30 seconds), a Control
Temperature Fault occurs. When the Control Temperature
Fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until
the Control Temperature Fault is manually cleared through the
unit keypad or via a network signal.
www.DaikinApplied.com85
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
The following “Operator’s Guide” sections provide information
regarding the day-to-day operation of the MicroTech III
Unit Controller. Topics covered are such common tasks as
scheduling, displaying and clearing alarms, and setting the
controller for manual operation.
Figure 11: State Diagram
Operator’s Guide
The supply fan is turned ON when the unit enters the
Recirculation state. The supply fan in VAV units is controlled as
described in the Supply Fan Capacity Control (VAV) on page
136. The outdoor dampers remain closed.
A separate morning warm-up state is not provided, but an
edited ZeroOATime is used to keep the outside air damper
closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA Position is
set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for less than
the ZeroOATime.
DAT Control units have a MWU setpoint available.
The Minimum OA Position is set to zero as long as the as the
fan has been on for less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the
Return Air type units to cool down the space with mechanical
cooling or to warm up the space with the dampers closed. If the
ZeroOATime is set correctly, the OA dampers will be open only
during occupied periods. When Optimal Start is used Zero OA
Time is set equal to the time to occupancy when the unit starts
so that the OA dampers will open at occupancy time.
Neither heating nor cooling is provided when the unit is in the
fan only state, with the exception of when dehumidification
is active. The outdoor dampers are opened to the minimum
position in this state when the fan on time exceeds the Zero
OA Time.
In the other four states, temperature is controlled as describe
in the appropriate sections of this document. These states are
Minimum DAT, Heating, Economizer, and Cooling. The outdoor
dampers are opened to at least the minimum position in these
states when the fan on time exceeds the Zero OA Time.
OFF Operating State
The transition from any operating state to another is graphically
represented in this figure. With a “start up” command from an
OFF State the unit will always go into the “Start Up” state of
operation for 3 minutes (adjustable). Next, it will transition into
the “Recirculation” state of operation for another 3 minutes
(adjustable) before finally going into the Fan Only state of
operation. Then, based on sensor inputs it will go into any
of the 4 remaining states of operation - heating, cooling,
economizer, or minimum discharge air heating.
Determining Unit State
The unit will operate in one of eight operating states. The
current state will be displayed by the Unit State parameter in
the system summary menu.
In the OFF state, all heating, cooling, and fans are OFF. The
alarm output indicates the type of alarm, if any, that is active.
In the Off operating state the fans are off, the outside air
dampers are closed and any VFD’s are driven to 0%. Cooling
and heating are disabled. The unit is in the off state when it is
not enabled, or when it is in the unoccupied mode with no call
for unoccupied operation. refer to “Determining Unit Status” on
page 70 for reasons the unit can be disabled.
Start Up Operating State
When a unit is commanded to start it will always enter the
Startup operating state from the OFF operating state. The unit
remains in the Startup operating state for an adjustable time
period (default 180 seconds) before entering the Recirculating
operating state.
During the Start up operating state the fans remain OFF, the
outdoor air dampers are driven closed, and VFD’s remain at
0%. Cooling and heating are disabled, except for 100% OA
heating start sequences.
In the start up state, the Fan Operation output is turned ON to
allow shut OFF dampers to be opened before any the supply
fan is turned ON. The outdoor air dampers remain closed.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER86www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Recirculating Operating State
Heating
Units with return air always enter the Recirculating operating
state after the completion of the Startup operating state.
In the Recirculating operating state fans are started and
operate while the outdoor air dampers remain closed. This
allows temperature conditions throughout the unit and space
to equalize before temperature control begins. Cooling and
heating remain disabled. The unit remains in the Recirculating
operating state until the Recirculate State Timer (default 180
seconds) expires.
The unit enters the Heating operating state when the control
temperature falls below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint by more than ½ the occupied or unoccupied heating
deadband. During the Heating operating state, the outdoor air
dampers are either 100% open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air
unit or controlled to the minimum outside air position. Cooling
is disabled.
NOTE: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the
Recirculating operating state.
Fan Only
The unit enters the Fan Only operating state after the
recirculation timer expires. Units configured for 100% outside
air operation will transition directly from the Start up operating
state into the Fan Only operating state. Once entering the Fan
Only state of operation the unit will then, based on sensor
inputs transition into any of the 4 remaining states of operation
- heating, cooling, economizer, or minimum discharge air
heating.
Min DAT
If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally
FanOnly operating state), the controller activates the units
heating equipment as required to prevent the discharge air
temperature from becoming too cool if the Min DAT Control
Flag is set to yes via the Heating menu (Commission Unit/
Heating/MinDAT Ctrl). The unit enters the Min DAT operating
state during occupied operation when neither cooling nor
heating is required based on the heat/cool changeover
function but the discharge temperature falls below a minimum
discharge temperature limit. If the discharge air temperature
falls below the this minimum discharge temperature limit
by more than half the discharge heating deadband, the unit
operating state changes from Fan Only to Min DAT. The
unit transitions out of the Min DAT operating state once the
discharge air temperature is above minimum discharge
temperature limit and the heating capacity has been at its
minimum position for the duration of the heating stage timer.
Economizer
If the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer
(waterside or airside) and the conditions are suitable for free
cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using
either outdoor air or the waterside economizer before using
mechanical cooling.
If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the
transition to economizer operation will occur if all the following
are true:
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
or unoccupied cooling high deadband
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min
DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT
• heating deadband. This will prevent more cold air from
being brought in when the DAT is already cold
• The economizer operation is not disabled
If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature Control
the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following
are true:
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
or unoccupied cooling deadband
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the DAT
cooling setpoint
NOTE: On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT
cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts
as the minimum discharge temperature limit. On CAV
zone control units the Min DAT Limit parameter in
the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge
temperature limit.
www.DaikinApplied.com87
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Mechanical Cooling
Off Alarm
The unit enters the mechanical cooling operating state when
cooling is required and the economizer is disabled, not present,
or already fully open.
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffAlm
when an active alarm of the “fault” type has the unit shutdown.
If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the
transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following are
true:
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
or unoccupied cooling deadband
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min
DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT heating deadband.
This will prevent more cold air from being brought in when
the DAT is already cold
• The economizer operation is disabled or not present
• Mechanical cooling is enabled
If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature Control
the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following
are true:
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
or unoccupied cooling deadband
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the
DAT cooling setpoint by more than ½ the DAT cooling
deadband
Off Fan Retry
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffFnRty
when The fan retry conditions below indicate that the unit
should be shutdown and restarted after airflow is lost.
• The supply fan is controlled by a VFD
• The airflow switch (PC7) is open AND the duct static
pressure is less than ½ the duct static pressure setpoint
• There are no active faults that would shut down the unit
Determining Control Mode
The unit cooling and heating can be set up for automatic
heat/cool, cool only, heat only, fan only, or network cool/heat
operation by setting the Control Mode. The unit can also be
manually disabled via the Control Mode. The following are
descriptions of the six available Control Mode selections.
OFF
When the Control Mode is set to “OFF,” the Unit Status is
“Off Man” and the unit is completely disabled.
Heat Only
• Economizer operation is disabled
When the Control Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating operation
is allowed to operate to maintain the heating set points.
Cooling operation is disabled (Cooing Status is “Off Man”).
• Mechanical cooling is enabled
Cool Only
• Post heat operation is complete
Determining Unit Status
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not
the unit is enabled and if not why.
Enabled
When the Control Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling operation
is allowed to operate to maintain the cooling set points. Heating
operation is disabled (Heating Status is “Off Man”).
Fan Only
Unit operation has not been disabled for any of the following
reasons.
When the Control Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are
allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is
disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Man”).
Off Manual
Heat Cool
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffMan
when the control mode is set to OFF via the keypad. The
control mode can only be changed via the System menu on the
keypad/display.
When the Control Mode is set to “Heat/Cool,” both cooling
and heating operation are allowed to operate as required to
maintain the cooling and heating set points.
OffManCtrl
When the Control Mode is set to “Auto,” the heat/cool, cool
only, heat only, and fan only decision is determined by
the network application mode parameter, which is set via
a network signal as described below. The NetApp Mode
parameter has no effect on unit operation unless the Control
Mode is set to “Auto.”
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffManCtl
when the controller is set to manual control via the Manual
Control menu.
Off Network
Auto
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffNet
when the control mode is set to Auto via the System menu and
the network Net App Mode is set to OFF.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER88www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Determining Cooling Status
Determining Heat Status
Clg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not
mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled,
the reason is indicated.
Htg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not
heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason
is indicated.
The following are descriptions of cooling status states.
The following are descriptions of heating status states:
Enabled
Enabled
Mechanical cooling is enabled if all the following are true:
Heating is enabled if all the following are true:
• Cooling capability is provided
• Heating capability is provided
• Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or heat
only
• Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or cool
only
• Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not
disabled via a network command
• Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not
disabled via a network command
• The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or
the entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled
units is high enough for operation
• The outdoor air temperature (OAT) is low enough for
operation
• Compressor operation is not disabled by an alarm
condition
None
Heating capability is not provided.
None
Off Ambient
Cooling capability is not provided.
The OAT is too high for operation. The OAT becomes too
high for operation when the OAT rises above the OAT heating
lockout set point. OAT becomes low enough for operation
when the OAT drops below the OAT heating lockout set point
by more than the Heating Lockout Differential.
Off Ambient
The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or the
entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled units is too
low for operation.
The OAT becomes too low for operation when it drops below
the OAT cooling lockout setting. OAT becomes high enough for
operation when it rises above the OAT cooling lockout setting
by more than 2°F (adjustable - OAT Diff). The EWT becomes
too low for operation when it drops below the minimum EWT
set point. EWT becomes high enough for operation when it
rises above the minimum EWT set point by more than 2°F
(adjustable - Econo Diff).
Off Network
Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and the unit is
disabled via a network command.
Off Manual
Control mode is set to Fan Only or Cool Only via the keypad.
NOTE: The OAT cooling lockout cannot be set lower than
40°F when the unit is equipped with an evaporative
condenser and should not be set lower than 50°F
unless the unit is equipped with low ambient
capability.
Off Alarm
Compressor operation is disabled by an alarm condition. This
happens when either all circuits are disabled by either a high
or low pressure alarm, when applicable the water flow switch
alarm is active, when applicable sump pump fail alarm is active
or applicable water regulating valve alarm is active.
Off Network
Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and cooling is
disabled via a network command.
Off Manual
Control mode is set to Fan Only or Heat Only via the keypad
display.
www.DaikinApplied.com89
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Determining Economizer Status
Determining Cooling Capacity
If the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer
(waterside or airside) and the conditions are suitable for free
cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using
either outdoor air or the waterside economizer before using
mechanical cooling.
Clg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage
of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operating.
When the unit is equipped with chilled water cooling, 0-100%
is displayed as the cooling valve actuator strokes from the
closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with
compressorized cooling, the percentage value changes
incrementally based on the number of operating cooling
stages.
The following are descriptions of Economizer Status states
Off Ambient
• Unit is an SCU configured for waterside economizer
and the Entering Water Temperature (EWT) sensor is
unreliable.
• Unit is an SCU configured for waterside economizer
and the EWT exceeds (Mixed Air Temperature – EWT
Differential). It is enabled if EWT drops below (Mixed Air
Temperature – EWT Differential).
• Unit is configured for airside economizer and the outdoor
air temperature (OAT) sensor is unreliable.
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT and
the Enthalpy Input is in the High (Open) position.
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT
and the OAT rises above the Economizer Changeover
Temperature by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT becomes
low enough for operation when the OAT drops to or below
the Economizer.
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT
and the OAT rises above the Economizer Changeover
Temperature by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT becomes
low enough for operation when the OAT drops to or below
the Economizer Changeover Temperature).
• Economizer Changeover is set to OAT_RAT and the OAT
rises above the RAT by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT
becomes low enough for operation when the OAT drops
below the RAT a fixed 2°F differential).
Off Network
• A network signal is set to OFF
Off None
Determining Heating Capacity
Htg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage of
the unit maximum heating capacity currently operating. When
the unit is equipped with modulating heat, 0-100% is displayed
as the heating valve actuator strokes from the closed to open
position. When the unit is equipped with staged heat, the
percentage value changes incrementally based on the number
of operating heating stages.
Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity
SAF Speed is a status only item which indicates the supply air
fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum speed is indicated if the
unit is equipped with a supply air fan VFD. 100% is indicated if
the supply fan is constant volume and is running.
Determining RF/EF Capacity
RF/EF capacity is a status only item which indicates the current
return or exhaust fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum
speed is indicated if the unit is equipped with a modulating
return or exhaust fan VFD. 100% is indicated if the return/
exhaust fan is constant volume and is running. When the unit
is equipped with staged exhaust fans, the percentage value
changes incrementally based on the number of operating
exhaust fan stages.
Determining Outside Air Damper Position
OAD/Econo Cap is a status only item which indicates the
current outdoor air damper or economizer valve position.
• Economizer Changeover is set to None
Determining Emergency Mode
• Economizer capability is not provided
Emergency Mode is an adjustable item which is normally used
by a network system to shutdown the unit in an emergency
situation.
• Unit is not configured for an airside or waterside
economizer
NOTE: Economizer is not disabled based on Control Mode or
Application Mode.
Economizer operation is disabled via a network command.
Off Dehumidification
Economizer operation is disabled if dehumidification operation
is enabled.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER90www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Determining Application Mode
Determining Occupancy Status
The unit heating and cooling can be set up for automatic
heat/cool, heat only, cool only or fan only operation based
on a network signal by setting the Control Mode parameter
to “Auto.” With the Control Mode parameters set to “Auto,”
the heat/cool, cool only, heat only, and fan only decision is
determined by the Net App Mode. The Net App Mode is set
by a network signal. The following sections describe the five
available Net App Mode selections.
Occupancy is a status item which indicates whether the unit
is in an occupied, unoccupied or tenant override mode of
operation.
NOTE: The Net App Mode has no effect on the unit operation
unless the Control Mode parameter is set to “Auto.”
Off
When the Net App Mode is set to “OFF,” the Unit Status is “Off
Net” and the unit is completely disabled, including unoccupied
heating (night set back) and unoccupied or unoccupied cooling
(night set up) operation.
Heat Only
When the Net App Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the
heating set points. Cooling operation is disabled (Cooling
Status is “Off Net”).
Cool Only
When the Net App Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the
cooling set points. Heating operation is disabled (Heating
Status is “Off Net”).
The following are descriptions of the various “Occupancy”
states.
Occ
The Occupancy parameter indicates “Occ” when the unit is
in the occupied mode. In this mode, the unit starts and runs
continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain the
occupied temperature set points. The unit is in the occupied
mode if any of the following conditions are true:
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to occupied
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, and
a manual network occupancy command is sent to the
controller
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, a
manual network occupancy command is set to Auto, and
any of the following is true:
• The External Start/Stop switch is closed
• A network schedule signal is set to Occupied or Standby
• The internal schedule function is in the Occupied
condition
Unocc
When the Net App Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are
allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is
disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Net”).
The Occupancy parameter indicates “Unocc” when the unit
is in the unoccupied mode. In this mode, the unit remains
off unless unoccupied operation becomes active. When
unoccupied operation is active the unit operates normally
except that Minimum OA Position is set to zero. See
Unoccupied Operation, page 92 for information regarding
when unoccupied operation is activated.
Auto
TntOvrd
Fan Only
When the Net App Mode is set to “Auto” heating and cooling
operation are allowed to operate as required to maintain the
heating and cooling set points.
www.DaikinApplied.com91
The Occupancy parameter indicates “TntOvrd” when the unit
is in the tenant override mode. In this mode, the unit starts and
runs continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain
the occupied temperature.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Tenant override operation is initiated when the Tenant Override
Timer is greater than zero. The Tenant Override Timer is set
equal to the Local Tenant Override Time (Timer Settings menu)
if the unit is enabled and any of the following is true:
• The Space Temperature sensor is present and its tenant
override button is pressed for less than 10 seconds.
Nothing happens if the button is pushed for more than
10 seconds but less than the time required to initiate a
shorted sensor alarm (30 seconds). Subsequent presses
on the button resets the Tenant Override Timer to the
Local Tenant Override Time, i.e. the max time
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Tenant
Override. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the
Occ Mode entry on the keypad reverts to auto after a 2
second time delay
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto or
Unocc, and a manual network occupancy command is
set to Bypass. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the
network occupancy command reverts to Auto Subsequent
presses on the button, setting of the keypad occupancy
entry to Tenant Override again, or setting of the network
occupancy command to Bypass again resets the Tenant
Override Timer to the Local Tenant Override Time.
Determining Occupancy Source
When the Occupancy parameter indicates Occ, the occupancy
source is set to one of the following values to indicate the
function responsible for placing the unit into the occupied mode
of operation.
None The Occ Src= parameter indicates “None” when the
Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” or “Tnt Ovrd.”
NetSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Net Schd”
when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a
network schedule indicating an occupied period.
IntSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int Sched”
when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the
unit internal schedule.
OneEventSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int
Sched” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due
to the unit one event schedule.
RemoteSwitch The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Remote
Sw” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to
a field supplied external time clock or a tenant override switch
signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is closed across
terminals 101 and102 on the unit field terminal block TB2.
The TOTime entry on the keypad can also be manually set to a
non-zero value. In this case the value begins timing down from
the edited value.
OccManCmd The Occ Src= parameter indicates
“OccManCmd” when OccMode is set to Auto and the network
manual occupancy command is set to Occupied.
Tenant Override Operation may be terminated by manually
setting the Tenant Override parameter on the keypad to zero or
by disabling the unit.
OccMode The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Occ Mode”
when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the
Occupancy Mode being manually set to “Occ.”
Determining Occupancy Mode
Occ Mode is an adjustable item which sets the unit for manual
occupied, unoccupied, tenant override or automatic operation.
Occ
When Occ Mode is set to “Occ,” the unit is manually placed in
the occupied mode of operation.
Unocc
When Occ Mode is set to “Unocc,” the unit is manually placed
in the unoccupied mode of operation.
TStatTO The Occ Src = parameter indicates “TStatTO” when
the Occupancy= parameter indicates “TntOvrd” due to the
tenant override button on the zone thermostat being pushed.
The button must be held for at least 1 second but not more
than 10 seconds.
ManTO The TntOvrd Src = parameter indicates “ManTO” when
the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the being
manually set via the keypad/display. When the Tenant Override
Timer is set to a non-zero value, the unit starts and runs in the
tenant override mode regardless of any scheduling features.
The unit stops when the timer expires. The Tenant Override
Timer can be set from 0-300 minutes.
TntOvrd
When Occ Mode is set to “TntOvrd,” the unit is manually
placed in the tenant override mode of operation.
NOTE: Once tenant override operation is activated the
parameter automatically reverts back to “Auto.”
Auto
When Occ Mode is set to “Auto” the automatically changes
between occupied, unoccupied and tenant override operation.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER92www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Unoccupied Operation
Scheduling
During unoccupied operation the unit operates normally except
that Min OA Pos is set to zero so that the damper is closed to
the outdoor air.
The Air Handling unit can be scheduled for operation by using
the following three methods:
Unoccupied Dehumidification
Dehumidification may be initiated in the unoccupied mode only
if Dehumidification Control is set to Always instead of Occupied
on the keypad. When this is the case and the humidity goes
high the unit transitions in the normal manner through Start
up and Recirc to Fan Only and then into the Dehumidification
Mode. In this case, the UnoccSrc= parameter indicates “Unocc
Dehum”.
Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup)
Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable,
the space temperature is greater than the Unoccupied Cooling
Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint is set lower
than its maximum setting. In this case, the unoccupied source
indicates “UnoccClg”.
Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)
Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable,
the space temperature is less than the Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint is set higher
than its minimum setting. In this case, the Unoccupied Source
indicates “UnoccHtg”
• Unit internal time scheduling functions
• External time clock function
• Network time scheduling function
Provided the unit is not locally or remotely disabled, the unit
operates when any of these scheduling functions is calling for
occupied operation. Conversely, the unit enters the unoccupied
mode when all of these scheduling functions are calling for
unoccupied operation. Therefore, any unused scheduling
functions should be set for continuous unoccupied operation.
The next four sections: “Setting Controller Date and Time,”
“Internal Daily Scheduling,” “Holiday Scheduling,” and “One
Event Scheduling” describe functions related to the internal
unit scheduling functions. These are followed by a section
describing the optimal start function which can be use with
internal scheduling and network scheduling. This is followed
by two sections that describe the external time scheduling and
network time scheduling functions.
Setting Controller Date and Time
Unoccupied operation is enabled due to an internal optimal
start schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoocupied
Source indicates “IntOptStrt”.
The controller uses the date and time to execute its internal
scheduling functions. The current time and date will not be lost
if the unit is turned off for up to forty-eight hours. The clock and
date are settable from the keypad. The time of day can be set
by entering the hour (00-23), minute (00-59), and second (0059) into three fields of the Current Time. Note that MicroTech
III uses “military” time. The current date can be set by entering
the date (00-31), month (01- 12) and year (1999-2155) into the
three fields of the Current Date.
Network Optimal Start
Internal Daily Schedule
Unoccupied operation is enabled due to a network optimal start
schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoccupied Source
indicates “NetOpStrt”.
An internal Daily Schedule provides one start time and one
stop time for each of the seven days of the week and for
holidays. When the Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto/Net”,
and the unit is not disabled for other reasons, it starts and
stops according to the controller internal schedule.
Internal Optimal Start
None
The Unoccupied Source is set to “None” when Unoccupied
operation is inactive.
Holiday Scheduling
The operator may select the days when start and stop times
for holidays are used by selecting a start date and an end
date for up to ten periods during the year by using the holiday
scheduling feature. Whenever a holiday period occurs, the
controller uses the Holiday Schedule start and stop time for
the period. For example, assume that Christmas Eve occurs
on a Thursday. The building is shut down on both Christmas
Eve and Christmas Day, but operates normally on the
weekend. This holiday period would be scheduled by setting
the Holiday Schedule to the default “no schedule” values
“HH:MM- HH:MM” and setting the Holiday Period to “12/24/08
- 12/25/08.”
www.DaikinApplied.com93
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
One Event Scheduling
Temperature Control Configurations
A One-Event Schedule is provided so that one operating
period can be scheduled without affecting the regular internal
schedule. A start date/time and an end date/time can be set.
Temperature control is based on a Control Type that may be
set to Zone, DAT, or Single Zone VAV.
The unit can be scheduled to operate during a specified period
by using this feature. During the specified period defined by
the One Event Beginning Date/Time and One Event Ending
Date/Time parameters the unit starts up and runs continuously
regardless of any other time scheduling functions. For
example, assume that a space served by the unit is occupied
for a special event on March 12, 2008 from 5:00 p.m. to 10:00
p.m. when the normal time scheduling has the unit shut off
after 4:00 p.m. on that date. This event can be accounted for
by setting the One Event Beginning Date/Time to “3/12/08 @
17:00:00” and the One Event Ending Date/Time to “3/12/08 @
22:00:00.”
Optimal Start
When Optimal Start is active (Optimal Start = Yes), an early
start time is determined before each scheduled start. The
schedule must be based on an internal schedule or a signal
via a connected network that indicates time to occupancy. The
controller uses start history, outdoor air temperature and space
temperature to determine when the unit should start. The unit
may start up to four hours before the scheduled occupancy
time. Optimal start based on heating operates when the space
temperature is below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Spt
by ½ the Zone Htg Deadband. Optimal start based on cooling
operates when the space temperature is above the Occupied
or Unoccupied Cooling Spt by ½ the Cooling Deadband. If
space temperature is between the above two points, the unit
starts at the occupancy time.
External Time Scheduling
An external time clock can be used to schedule unit operation.
This is accomplished by a field supplied external time clock
signal in the form of a set of dry contacts wired across
terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block TB2. In
this case, all internal daily schedules should be set to “HH:MMHH:MM” (default setting).
When the Control Type is set to Zone temperature control,
heating, compressors, and the economizer are controlled to
maintain the temperature of the zone at a desired setpoint.
This configuration is used on units equipped with constant
volume supply fans. Compressors and heating stages are
staged to maintain space or return temperature. The number
of compressors is decreased when it is too cold and increased
when it is too hot subject to stage timers. The number of heat
stages is decreased when it is too hot and increased when it is
too cold subject to stage timers.
When the Control Type is set to DAT, heating, compressors,
and the economizer are controlled to maintain the discharge air
temperature at a desired setpoint. This configuration is typically
used on units equipped with variable air volume supply fans.
When the Control Type is set to (single zone VAV), heating,
compressors and the economizer are controlled to maintain
the discharge air temperature at the desired setpoint while
the variable volume supply fan is modulated to maintain the
temperature of the zone at the desired heating and cooling
setpoints. In heating mode the supply fan capacity is increased
as the zone temperature falls and decreased as the zone
temperature rises.
Heat/Cool Changeover
In general, a unit configured for discharge air temperature
control either operates to deliver the cooling discharge
temperature set point using economizer and/or mechanical
cooling or the heating discharge air temperature set point using
the heating equipment. Cooling and heating never operate
simultaneously. A unit configured for zone (or space comfort)
control either operates to maintain the Occupied or Unoccupied
Cooling Set Point using economizer and/or mechanical cooling
or the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point using the
heating equipment.
The occupied or unoccupied cooling/occupied or unoccupied
heating setpoints can be set via the keypad/display or based
on a signal from an optional space temperature sensor with set
point adjustment capability. The following sections describe the
unit heat/ cool changeover function.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER94www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Illustrative Heat/Cool Changeover Sequence
The following is an illustration of the heat/cool changeover
function.
When the control temperature is below the occupied or
unoccupied heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband
(point A), heating operation is enabled. Heating operation then
remains enabled until the control temperature begins to rise
and rises above the occupied or unoccupied heating setpoint
by more than ½ the deadband (point B), at which point heating
operation is disabled and the unit enters the fan only (or Min
DAT) operating state. If the control temperature rises above
the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more than ½
the deadband (point C) cooling operation is enabled. Cooling
operation remains enabled until the control temperature begins
to fall below the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by
more than ½ the deadband (point D), at which point the unit
returns or fan only (or Min DAT) operating state.
Figure 12: Heat/Cool Changeover
The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
Return to Space if both of the following are true:
• The Return Air Sensor is not present and reliable
• A network or local Space Sensor is present and reliable
The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
Space to Return if both of the following are true:
• The space sensor is not reliable (a valid space
temperature value is not provided via the network and
the space temperature sensor is either in alarm or not
present)
• The return air sensor is reliable (present and not in alarm)
The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts
from either Outdoor Air or Mixed Air to Return if the Control
Type is Zone (Not DAT). If the return air temperature is not
reliable, the control temperature may then revert to space as
described above.
The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
Mixed Air to Outdoor Air if Unit Type is not SCU.
A Control Temperature Fault that shuts down the unit is
initiated if any of the following is true.
• The return air sensor is not present and reliable and
Return Air is selected as the control temperature and a
space sensor is not available.
• A network or local space sensor is not present and
reliable and Space is selected as the control temperature
and a return temperature sensor is not available.
• The OAT Sensor is not present and reliable and Outdoor
Air is selected as the control temperature
• The mixed air temperature sensor is not present
or reliable and Mixed Air is selected as the control
temperature
Control Temperature
The “Control Temperature” is defined as the unit temperature
input used to make the heat/cool changeover decision. This
determines whether or not cooling or heating is enabled.
The user may select Space Temperature, Return
Temperature, Outdoor Air Temperature or None for DAT units.
Normally either the Return or Space Temperature is selected
as the control temperature. Outdoor Air Temperature may
be used as the control temperature for DAT units, but not for
Zone Control units.
When the Control Temperature Source is set to None, the unit
no longer “changes over” between heating and cooling in the
normal manner. Instead it acts as if it is always in the “cooling”
mode of operation controlling to the discharge air cooling set
point. In this case the unit operating state will vary between
Cooling, Fan Only and Min DAT (heating) in order to maintain
the discharge air cooling set point. The unit will only enter the
Heating operating state and control to the discharge heating
set point for morning warm up purposes.
www.DaikinApplied.com95
Occupied Temperature Set Points
When the Use Tstat set point parameter is set to No, the
Occupied Cooling Set Point and the Occupied Heating Set
Point may be set through the keypad or via a network signal.
In this case these set points are changed whenever the
network or keypad value changes. When the Use Tstat set
point parameter is set to Yes these set points can only be
adjusted through the zone thermostat. Heating and cooling set
points must not overlap. The Occupied Heating Set Point must
be equal to or less than the Occupied Cooling Set Point. If a
conflict occurs from values entered via the keypad or network,
the Occupied Heating Set Point is automatically adjusted down
to eliminate the conflict. When the Occupied Cooling Set point
is changed by more than 0.5 degrees through the wall mounted
sensor, the Occupied Heating Set Point is raised or lowered
the same amount so that the difference between the Cooling
and Heating set points does not change.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
OA/EWT Lockout
Zero OA Time (Morning Warm-up)
Heating is disabled whenever the outdoor air temperature
is greater than the Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout
Set Point. When the outdoor air temperature drops below
the Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout Set Point by more
than the Heating Lockout Differential, heating operation is
re-enabled. Cooling is disabled if outdoor air temperature
or entering water temperature is too low for operation. The
outdoor air temperature becomes too low for operation when
it drops below the Outdoor Air Ambient Cooling Lockout
Set Point. Outdoor air temperature becomes high enough
for operation when it rises above the Outdoor Air Ambient
Cooling Lockout Set Point by more than the Cooling Lockout
Differential. The entering water temperature becomes too low
for operation when it drops below the Minimum Entering Water
Temperature Setpoint. Entering water temperature becomes
high enough for operation when it rises above the Minimum
Entering Water Temperature Setpoint by more the Cooling
Lockout Differential.
A separate Morning Warm-up operating state is not provided,
but an editable ZeroOATime is used to keep the Outside Air
damper closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA
Position is set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for
less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the Return Air type units
to cool down the space with mechanical cooling or to warm up
the space with the dampers closed. If the ZeroOATime is set
correctly, the OA dampers will be open only during occupied
periods. When Optimal Start is used ZeroOATime is set equal
to the time to occupancy when the unit starts so that the OA
dampers will open at occupancy time.
Tenant Override
The tenant-override button provided with the optional zone
temperature sensor packages is used to override unoccupied
operation for a pre programmed time period. This time period is
set with the Tenant Override Time Increment. This value can be
adjusted from 0 to 300 minutes (default is 120 minutes). When
an occupant presses and releases the tenant override button
on the zone temperature sensor (ZNT1), the Tenant Override
Timer is set equal to the Tenant Override Time Increment. (The
button must be held for at least 1 second but not more than 10
seconds.) The unit then starts and runs in the tenant override
mode which is the same as occupied mode except that it is
temporary. The Tenant Override Timer begins timing out and
the unit runs until the timer expires. If the tenant override
button is pressed again while the unit is operating in tenant
override mode, the Tenant Override Timer is reset to the Tenant
Override Time Increment and the unit continues to operate. For
example, assume that the Tenant Override Time Increment is
120 minutes. One press of the override button provides at least
120 minutes of unit operation. If the button is pressed again
60 minutes later, the Tenant Override Timer is reset to 120
minutes, and a total of 180 minutes of uninterrupted operation
results.
Post Heat Operation
After leaving the Recirc or Heating operating state and entering
either the Fan Only or Min DAT operating state, the unit
performs “post heat” operation if the Post Heat Timer is set to
a non zero value. “Post heat” operation occurs within the Fan
Only or MinDAT operating state. During “post heat” operation,
the VAV Box Output remains open (heat) while the discharge
fan capacity is forced to a minimum value (default 33% speed
for VFD). By forcing the discharge fan capacity to a minimum
value before the VAV Box Output closes (cool), “post heat”
operation is designed to prevent duct over-pressurization by
decreasing the duct pressure before the VAV boxes can close.
“Post heat” operation remains active until either the discharge
fan capacity reaches the minimum value or until the Post
Heat Timer expires, whichever occurs first. When “post heat”
operation ends, normal duct static pressure or position control
resumes.
NOTE: During “post heat” operation and for 120 seconds
afterward, the proof of airflow input is ignored. This
is to prevent nuisance Fan Fail fault alarms that may
occur if the airflow switch opens during or following
“post heat” operation. The unit cannot leave the Fan
Only or Min DAT operating state while the airflow
switch input is being ignored. The VAV output is only
available to the field via network communications.
NOTE: The same operation occurs if, instead of pressing the
override button on a zone temperature sensor, the
Occupancy Mode is set to “Tnt Ovrd.” Once set to “Tnt
Ovrd”, the Occupancy Mode automatically reverts to
the “Auto” setting once the Tnt Ovrd Timer is set to
the Tnt Ovrd Time Increment. The same operation
will also occur if the network occupancy manual
command it set to bypass
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER96www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Dehumidification
Dehumidification Mechanical Cooling Control
In the dehumidification mode, mechanical cooling is used to
cool air low enough to wring moisture out of it. Hot Gas Reheat
or the standard unit heating equipment (Gas, SCR Electric
or Steam/Hot water) is used to raise the temperature of this
cooled air to a desirable value.
During dehumidification, control of mechanical cooling is
based on the following two editable values of the Leaving Coil
Temperature setpoint.
Dehumidification Initiation
An analog sensor is mounted in the return duct, the space, or
outdoor to sense relative humidity. The location is selected by
setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,
Space, or OAT.
NOTE: This setting is used to dictate which temperature
sensor is used to calculate the dewpoint. OAT
can only be selected for units with DAT control.
The relative humidity and a calculated dewpoint
temperature are both displayed on the keypad. The
calculated dewpoint temperature is based on the
relative humidity and Return, Space, or OAT value
depending on the location of the humidity sensor.
Humidity control is disabled if cooling is disabled for
any reason. Dehumidification operation is initiated
when Humidity Control is set to either relative
humidity or dewpoint and that value rises above the
appropriate setpoint by more than half its deadband.
Dehumidification Termination
Dehumidification is terminated if the selected variable, Relative
Humidity or Dew Point, drops below the appropriate humidity
setpoint by more than half its deadband. Dehumidification is
also terminated if cooling is disabled for any reason. Other
ways that dehumidification may be terminated are if Dehum
Method is set to “None” on the keypad, or if the unit goes to Off
Net, Off Sw, Off Alm, or Off Man Ctrl.
When Dehumidification is terminated, all mechanical
cooling is turned off except when the unit is in the Cooling
state. Modulated cooling reverts to normal control when
dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. For
units with compressors, the number of cooling stages is
reduced by one and control reverts to normal control when
dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. Another
compressor stage change could then occur after one Cooling
Stage Time has elapsed
www.DaikinApplied.com97
• Mx Lvg Coil T (Default = 52°F)
• Mn Lvg Coil T (Default = 45°F)
For compressorized units, the number of compressor stages
increases when all of the following are true:
• The time since the last stage change exceeds the
Clg Stage Time
• Leaving Coil Temperature is greater than the
Mx Lvg Coil T
• The current cooling stage is less than the available
number of stages
During the dehumidification mode, the number of compressor
stages decreases when all of the following are true:
• The time since the last stage change exceeds the
Clg Stage Time
• Leaving Coil Temperature is less than Mn Lvg Coil T Spt
• The current cooling stage is greater than zero
Units with modulated cooling are controlled by a PI Loop to
maintain the temperature leaving the coil at the Mn Lvg Coil T.
The normal DAT Cooling Deadband and PI Loop parameters
are used in this PI Loop.
MPS HGBP Valve
When the Unit Type is MPS and the unit is equipped with
modulating hot gas reheat control an HGBP valve output
(MCB-DO6) is controlled to make sure hot gas is not flowing
through both the hot gas bypass and hot gas reheat circuits
simultaneously.
The HGBP Valve Output is ON (energized) whenever Unit
State is Cooling and dehumidification operation is inactive. The
HGBP Valve Output is OFF (de-energized) any other time.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Dehumidification Reheat Control
Modulating HGRH Control
During dehumidification control either an analog or digital
Hot Gas Reheat (HGRH) output or the standard modulating
heating output is controlled to maintain the current Reheat
Setpoint. If Reheat Type software configuration parameter is
set to Staged Hot Gas, then a digital HGRH output is controlled
to maintain the Reheat Setpoint. If the Reheat Type software
configuration parameter is set to Modulating Hot Gas, then
an analog HGRH output is controlled to maintain the Reheat
Setpoint. If the Reheat Type software configuration parameter
is set to Standard Heat, then the normal heating analog output
is controlled to maintain the Reheat Setpoint.
In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a PI Loop is used
to control the HGRH valve to maintain the discharge air
temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint. The PI
Loop is enabled when the unit is in the Cooling or Fan Only
operating state and dehumidification becomes active.
• Cooling/Fan Only: In the Cooling and Fan Only states,
a PI Loop is used to control the HGRH valve to maintain
the Discharge Air Temperature at the Dehumidification
Reheat Setpoint. The deadband for this loop is the same
one used for other control of heating to maintain the DAT
Heating setpoint.
• Cooling: In the Cooling state, the Dehumidification
Reheat Setpoint equals the DAT Cooling Setpoint. For
DAT units, this is the normal DAT setpoint resulting from
any reset. For Zone Control units, this setpoint is the
result of a PI Loop based on the control temperature as is
done in the Economizer state or with modulated cooling
in the Cooling state.
• Fan Only: In the Fan Only state, the Dehumidification
Reheat Setpoint equals an editable MaxReheatSpt
(Default = 65°F) when the control temperature drops to
the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint and equals
an editable MinReheatSpt (Default = 55°F) when the
control temperature rises to the Occupied or Unoccupied
Cooling setpoint. The Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint
varies linearly between these two points.
This means that no matter what the Control Temperature
is, including OAT, the temperature leaving the unit is at a
maximum just before the unit needs to go into heating and at
a minimum just before the unit needs to go into cooling. This
reduces opportunity for unit to go into heating or cooling during
dehumidification.
Staged HGRH Control
In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a staged output is turned
ON and OFF to control the HGRH valve to maintain the
discharge air temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat
Setpoint. The deadband for this setpoint is an adjustable.
When the DAT is above the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint
by more than half the deadband, cooling capacity is greater
than 0% and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has expired,
the reheat output is turned on. When the DAT is below
the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint by more than half
the deadband and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has
expired, or if the cooling capacity is 0%, the reheat output is
turned OFF.
NOTE: When configured for modulating hot gas reheat the
reheat valve is stroked open and then closed every
day at 2:00 AM as long as dehumidification is inactive
and the unit is not in the Cooling operating state at
the time.
Reheat Compressor Limiting Control
A special cooling capacity limiting function is used when a
unit is configured for Hot Gas and/or Liquid subcooling control
types of reheat. During dehumidification, if the unit cannot
provide enough reheat to meet the discharge temperature
setpoint this limiting function will act to reduce the cooling
capacity of the circuit opposite the reheat circuit in an attempt
to increase the leaving coil temperature and therefore the
reheat temperature. An Event will also be logged.
Reheat compressor limiting is allowed during dehumidification
operation if the following are true for longer than the cooling
stage time:
• Reheat compressor limiting is set to Yes
• Reheat type equals ModHGRH, ModLSC or ModHG &
LSC
• A fixed compressor in the circuit opposite the reheat
circuit in ON
• The Reheat capacity equals 100%
• The DAT is less than the Reheat set point-1/2 DB
If all of the above items are true for longer than the cooling
stage timer setting, the limiting function would reduce the
cooling capacity of the circuit opposite the reheat circuit by one
stage. This reduction in cooling capacity would continue until
all compressors opposite the reheat circuit have been staged
off as long as all of the above remained true.
The limiting function will remain active until the following are
true for longer than the cooling stage time:
• Reheat capacity is less than or equal to the minimum
reheat capacity
• The DAT is greater than the Reheat set point-1/2 DB
• All of the fixed stages have been staged back ON.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER98www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Energy Recovery
Energy recovery is provided by drawing outside air across half
of an enthalpy wheel and drawing exhaust air across the other
half. Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter,
moister exhaust air to the colder dryer outside air in winter.
Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter more
moist outside air to the cooler dryer exhaust air in summer.
Control consists of starting and stopping an exhaust fan,
modulating the speed of the exhaust fan, starting and stopping
the enthalpy wheel, and optionally controlling the speed of
the enthalpy wheel. The outdoor dampers are controlled in
the normal manner. The current statuses as well as editable
parameters associated with energy recovery are located in the
Energy Rec Setup menu.
Enthalpy Wheel
The enthalpy wheel is turned on when all of the following are
true. The speed of the enthalpy wheel is set to the maximum
speed for units with a VFD controlling the speed of the
enthalpy wheel.
• The exhaust fan is ON
• The OA Dampers are at the minimum position
• The unit is not in the Economizer operating state
• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned OFF due to frost
prevention (variable or constant speed wheels)
• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned OFF due to
defrost control (constant speed wheels only)
• The wheel has not been turned OFF due to Variable
Effectiveness Operation
The enthalpy wheel is turned OFF when any of the following is
true
• The exhaust fan is OFF
• The OA Damper Position is driven above the Minimum
OA Damper Position by more than 3%.
• Either of the frost prevention functions dictate that the
wheel be OFF.
Enthalpy Wheel Frost Prevention
Two different frost protection methods are provided depending
on whether or not the enthalpy wheel is controlled by a VFD.
When there is a threat of frost or condensation on the enthalpy
wheel, a variable speed wheel may be first slowed down and
then stopped and a constant speed wheel may be stopped so
that less enthalpy transfer occurs and frosting or condensation
on the enthalpy wheel is avoided. In either case the frost
control is based on an Intersection Point described as follows:
Condensation and frosting can occur on the enthalpy wheel
when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is saturated. This
condition will occur when two lines intersect on a psychometric
chart, and it will not occur when these two lines do not intersect.
One of these lines is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry bulb for
saturated air. The other line is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry
bulb temperature of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel.
The two ends of this second straight line on a psychometric
chart are the OAT at 95% RH and the return air temperature
at the return air relative humidity. One line showing frosting
conditions and another line showing no frost conditions are
shown on the sketch of a psychometric chart shown.
A continuous calculation determines if and at what
temperatures these two lines intersect. If they do intersect they
intersect at two points. The higher of the two points is referred
to as the “Intersection Point”. When they do not intersect, the
enthalpy wheel runs at full speed. When they do intersect, the
variable speed enthalpy wheel may be slowed to its minimum
speed as described above to maintain the dry bulb temperature
of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel high enough
to eliminate the Intersection Point and therefore the threat of
frosting conditions. If slowing the wheel does not eliminate
the Intersection Point after a stage time period, the wheel
may be stopped. A constant speed wheel is stopped when an
Intersection Point exists.
Figure 13: Exhaust Air Psychometric Chart
• The constant speed wheels defrost function dictates the
wheel is to be OFF.
www.DaikinApplied.com99
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Constant Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control
The enthalpy wheel is stopped when both of the following are
true:
• The enthalpy wheel has been ON for longer than the
edited Wheel Stage Time
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited minimum
temperature difference.
• Defrost Method=ExhAir
• Enthalpy wheel is constant speed
The enthalpy wheel is turned back ON when the wheel has
been OFF due to Frosting/Condensation for longer than an
edited Minimum Off Time and the exhaust air temperature
leaving the enthalpy wheel is above the Intersection Point plus
an edited Maximum Temperature Difference.
Variable Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control
The enthalpy wheel VFD speed is set to a minimum wheel
speed (default 5%) value when all of the following are true:
• The enthalpy wheel has been operating at maximum
speed for longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum
Temperature Difference.
• Enthalpy wheel is variable speed
To prevent Frosting/Condensation ON the enthalpy wheel, the
enthalpy wheel is turned OFF when both of the following are
true:
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum
Temperature Difference.
• The wheel has been operating at the minimum wheel
speed for longer than an edited Wheel Stage Time
The enthalpy wheel is turned ON at minimum speed when both
of the following are true:
• The enthalpy wheel has been OFF due to Frosting/
Condensation for longer than an edited Minimum Off Time
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum
Temperature Difference.
The Enthalpy Wheel speed will be increased to its maximum
speed when both of the following are true:
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum
Temperature Difference (MaxExhTDiff)
• The wheel has been operating at the minimum speed for
longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time
Enthalpy Wheel Defrost Control (Constant Speed
Wheels Only)
In lieu of the frost prevention method described above, a
constant speed enthalpy wheel can be set for a simpler
timed defrost method of frost management. With this method
the enthalpy wheel is stopped periodically for a defrost time
duration when the outdoor air temperature is below an outdoor
frost temperature threshold setpoint.
Defrost operation becomes enabled when all of the following
are true:
• Defrost Method = Timed
• Energy wheel is constant speed
• OAT is less than the OA frost temperature setpoint.
• Normal wheel operation has the enthalpy wheel ON
When defrost operation is enabled, the wheel is stopped for the
Defrost Time (default 5 minutes) every Defrost Period (default
60 minutes).
When the wheel is stopped due to defrost operation the wheel
must be slowly rotated so that both halves of the wheel are
allowed to be defrosted by the relative warm exhaust air
leaving the wheel. This is accomplished by alternately turning
the wheel off for the editable Defrost Off Time (default 24
seconds) and on for the editable Defrost On time (default 1
second) during defrost operation.
Enthalpy Wheel Capacity Limiting
Enthalpy wheel capacity limiting control is a means to limit
the capacity of an energy wheel during part load conditions.
Normally wheels are sized for worst case winter/summer
load and, therefore, at part load the wheel may be oversized.
Capacity limiting control is allowed when the energy recovery
wheel leaving air temperature (ERDAT) sensor is present and
reliable and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) is colder than
the returning air temperature.
Capacity limiting control is not allowed during dehumidification
operation or when either the wheel frost prevention or defrost
operation are active.
Capacity limiting operation differs depending on whether the
energy recovery wheel is constant or variable speed.
Constant Speed Wheel
The conditions that cause the energy recovery wheel to turn
due to capacity limiting are different depending on the unit
operation state as follows:
Fan Only
When the unit is operating in the Fan Only state, the energy
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever
the discharge air temperature (DAT) is above the MinDATLimit
setpoint by more than ½ the discharge air heating deadband.
The wheel is re-started when the DAT falls back to or below
the MinDATLimit setpoint plus ½ the discharge air heating
deadband.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER100www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Heating
When the unit is operating in the Heating state, the energy
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever
all heating is OFF and the discharge air temperature (DAT)
is above the discharge heating setpoint by more than ½ the
discharge air heating deadband. The wheel is re-started when
the DAT falls back to or below the discharge heating setpoint
plus ½ the discharge air heating deadband.
Cooling
All four of the following are true:
• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
• The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA
Position
• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0%
• The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to a value above
the minimum value (Default = 5%) by a BAS for longer
than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default = 120
seconds)
When the unit is operating in the Cooling state, the energy
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever
the energy recovery wheel leaving air temperature (ER LAT)
is above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than ½ the
discharge air cooling deadband. The wheel is re-started
when the ER LAT falls back to or below the discharge cooling
setpoint plus ½ the discharge air cooling deadband.
Both of the following are true:
Variable Speed Wheel
All three of the following are true:
When the enthalpy wheel is variable speed and the Variable
Effectiveness Control PI_Loop is active the ER LAT is
controlled to the current effective discharge temperature
setpoint.
Exhaust Fan
A variable speed exhaust fan controlled by a VFD is provided
for all Economizer units with either constant volume or VAV
supply fans and on 100% Outside Air units with VAV supply
fans. Either a constant volume exhaust fan or a variable speed
exhaust fan controlled by a VFD may be provided on 100%
Outside Air units with constant volume supply fans.
The exhaust fan is turned ON when any of the following sets of
conditions is true:
All four of the following are true:
• The Exhaust Fan is controlled by a VFD
• The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA
Position
• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0%
• The exhaust fan is constant volume
• The supply fan has been commanded on for at least 4
seconds
The exhaust fan is turned OFF when any of the following sets
of conditions is true:
• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
• The building static pressure is below the building static
pressure setpoint by more than the deadband
• The exhaust fan capacity is at or below its minimum value
(Default = 5%) for longer than the Min Exhaust Fan Stop
Time (Default = 120 seconds)
Both of the following are true:
• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
• The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to less than or
equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) by the BAS for
longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default
= 120 seconds)
The exhaust fan is OFF when the supply fan is OFF
Whenever a variable speed exhaust fan is ON, its capacity will
be modulated using a VFD. The speed of the fan will be either
(1) modulated to maintain the building static pressure at a
desired value or (2) set at a fixed speed provided by a Building
Automation System via a network.
• The building static pressure is above the building static
pressure setpoint by more than the deadband for longer
than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default =
120 seconds)
www.DaikinApplied.com101
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Bypass Dampers (Not Applicable for 100% OA
Units)
Figure 14: Damper Position versus Fan Speed Chart
The bypass dampers are driven closed (Bypass Damper
Closed output is energized) whenever the OA Damper position
is less than or equal to the Minimum OA Position
The Bypass dampers are driven open (Bypass Damper Open
output is energized) whenever the OA Damper Position
exceeds the Minimum OA Damper Position by more that 3%
Outside Air Damper Control
Minimum Outside Air Damper Control
Control of the dampers in the Economizer state is described
in the Economizer Control section. The outdoor air dampers
are driven open in the cooling operating state if economizer
operation is enabled and to the Minimum OA Position if
economizer operation is disabled. For all other operating
conditions, the outdoor air dampers are set to the Minimum
OA Position. The Minimum OA Position is set to zero or
closed position when the supply fan is off, the unit is in the
Recirculation state, Occupancy is set to Unocc, or the fan has
been on for less than the Zero OA Time.
As a result, the OA dampers are driven closed in night
setback, night setup, morning warm-up, and morning cool
down situations unless economizer operation is required. In all
other conditions the Minimum OA Position is equal to or below
a Ventilation Limit and equal to or above a Demand Control
Ventilation limit. For CAV units, the Ventilation Limit equals the
keypad editable Vent Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation
Limit equals the keypad editable DCV Limit. For VAV units, the
Ventilation Limit varies with VFD speed between the editable
Vent Limit at 100% Supply Fan speed and the editable LoFlo
Vent Limit at the Min Clg Spd, as shown in Figure 14. For
VAV units, the Demand Control Ventilation Limit varies as
the Ventilation Limit value changes so that the ratio between
them remains constant. In the example shown in Figure 14
the Demand Control Ventilation Limit would always be 1/2 the
Ventilation Limit since the DCV Limit= parameter (10%) is half
of the Vent Limit= parameter (20%).
The editable parameters are to be determined when the airflow
for the unit is balanced and are located in the Min OA Set-up
menu.
NOTE: The MinClgSpd is prevented from being set equal
to the Design Cooling Speed. The DCV Limit is
prevented from being set greater than the Vent Limit.
If the VentLimit or the LoFloVent Limit is set to 0, the
Ventilation Limit is overridden to 0.
Cold Start Operation
A special “cold start” sequence will slow the opening of the
dampers when it is cold outdoors and the unit is equipped
with either Hot water/Steam or F&BP heating. This is to try
to prevent nuisance freezestat trips associated with dampers
opening up rapidly to minimum position before the heat has a
chance to ramp up. This “cold start” sequence is initiated if the
following conditions are all true:
• OAT is below the current LoDATLimit
• The unit is equipped with an Airside Economizer
• The current Unit State is beyond the Recirc
• The current Minimum Outdoor Damper Position set point
is greater than 0%
• The unit is equipped with Hot water/Steam or F&BP
heating
When the sequence is active the dampers will move more
slowly the colder it is outdoors. The minimum and maximum
ramp rates are adjustable via the keypad by navigating to the
Commission Unit/Min OA Set-up menu. The effective ramp rate
will vary from the minimum 40% 100% (Minimum) Airflow rate
at OAT equal to -30°F to the maximum at OAT equal to 100°F.
Once the damper position reaches a point 1% below the actual
effective minimum position normal operation will begin. If the
unit enters the Economizer operating state before the damper
regulation begins, the regulation will begin from the current
economizer position.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER102www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Minimum Outside Air Reset - None
Example #1 Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC
If None is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum
OA Position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit. The Demand
Control Ventilation Limit value is ignored when Min OA reset is
set to None.
If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum
(Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the CO2 levels are
less than 800 PPM and to be at its maximum (Ventilation Limit)
when the CO2 levels are greater than 1000 PPM, the controller
would be set up as follow:
Minimum Outside Air Reset - Network Control
If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid
value for the minimum position is provided via a network the
Minimum OA Position is set equal to that value. The network
is only allowed to write a value that is between the Ventilation
Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit current values.
If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid
value for the minimum position is not provided, the Min OA
position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit.
Minimum Outside Air Reset - External Control
If ExtV is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal.
If ExtmA is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on an external 0-20 mA signal.
This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero
% at the editable minimum external signal to the maximum
value at the editable maximum external signal, but it is set no
lower than the Demand Control Ventilation Limit and no higher
than the Ventilation Limit.
Minimum Outside Air Reset -IAQ
If either IAQV or IAQ mA is selected as the Min OA Type,
the Minimum OA Position is calculated based on a 0-10V or
0-20 mA CO2 sensor input. The CO2 level is expressed as
Parts Per Million. The minimum and maximum sensor input
values (0-10V or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum
and maximum PPM values are user defined. This calculated
Minimum OA Position varies linearly from the Demand Control
Ventilation Limit at the “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the Ventilation
Limit at the “PPM @ VentLimit””. The “PPM @ DCV Limit”
is not allow to be set equal to or greater than the “PPM @
VentLimit”
Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules.
If IAQ VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on a 0-10V CO2 sensor input.
The CO2 level is expressed as PPM (Parts Per Million). The
minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V) and the
corresponding minimum and maximum PPM values are user
changeable. This calculated Minimum OA Position varies
linearly from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit at the value
labeled “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the Ventilation Limit at the value
labeled “PPM @ VentLimit”. The “PPM @ DCV Limit” is not
allow to be set equal to or greater than the “PPM @ VentLimit”
www.DaikinApplied.com103
• Vent Limit = 100%
• Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%
• DCV Limit = 0%
• Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC
• PPM@DCV Limit = 800
• PPM@Vent Limit = 1000
• IAQ PPM = Current PPM
• Min PPM = 0 (From CO2 transducer)
• Max PPM = 2000 (From CO2 transducer)
• V/A @ Min PPM = 0 VDC
• V/A @ Max PPM = 10 VDC
In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly
from 0% outside air at 800 PPM or less to 100% outside air at
1000 PPM or greater.
Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules.
If EXT VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal.
This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero
% at the changeable minimum external signal to 100% at the
changeable maximum external signal, but it is set no lower
than the Demand Control Ventilation Limit and no higher than
the Ventilation Limit.
Example #2 Min OA reset type = EXT VDC
If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum
(Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied
signal is at its minimum (0 VDC) and to be at its maximum
(Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied signal is at its
maximum (10 VDC), the controller would be set up as follow:
• Vent Limit = 100%
• Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%
• DCV Limit = 10%
• Min OA reset type = EXT VDC
• OA@MinV/mA = 0%
• OA@MaxV/mA = 100%
• Min V/mA = 0 VDC
• Max V/mA = 10 VDC
In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly
from 0% outside air at 0 VDC to 100% outside air at 10 VDC.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Reset Temperature Limit
The user has the option of setting a low temperature limit that
will override all the outdoor air reset functions described in this
section except the Return Fan Capacity Override function if the
discharge air temperature or entering fan temperature gets too
cold as a result of the reset. The user can choose the override
sensor by setting the Reset Temperature Limit to None, DAT or
EFT. When set to None the Reset Temperature Limit function
is disabled. A Reset Temperature Limit PI_Loop will be used
to reset the minimum outside air damper setpoint downward
when the selected temperature input drops below the Reset
Temperature Limit.
Minimum Position Control -Field Supplied Outdoor
Airflow Station Input
When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Software
Configuration Code is set to Field Station and the Field Station
parameter on the keypad is set to VDC or mA, the Minimum
OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount
of outdoor air being brought into the unit from a field supplied
airflow monitoring station. If the airflow is below the desired
value, the Minimum OA Position is increased and if the airflow
is above the desired value, Minimum OA Position is decreased.
The field airflow signal will be in the form of a 0-10V or 0-20 mA
input. The minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V
or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum and maximum
CFM values are user editable.
NOTE: The Minimum OA Position is reset up and down
between the Ventilation Limit and the Demand
Control Ventilation Limit by a PI_Loop function to
maintain the field OA CFM value at an adjustable OA
CFM Setpoint.
When the MinOAType is set to Ext or IAQ and the
Field OA Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the
OA flow input is assigned to a specially added I/O
expansion module (EXPE) position X1. When the
MinOAType is not set to Ext or IAQ and the Field OA
Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the OA flow
input is assigned to the main control board(MCB)
position X1.
Minimum Position Control - Design Flow (RPS
Airside Economizer Units Only)
NOTE: The factory default for Min OA Reset is set to none
however changes may be made by accessing the Min
OA Set-Up menu. Once changes have been made to
the Min OA Reset type, the Apply Changes flag must
be changed from no to yes in order for the controller
to recognize the changes. Setting the Apply Changes
flag to YES will automatically reset the controller.
0-30%OA Units
A two position 0-30% OA actuator is controlled by a modulating
analog output. This actuator is driven to its fully open position,
nominally 30%, when the OA damper analog output is at its
maximum value and it is driven closed when the OA damper
analog output is at its minimum value. The desired minimum
open position between 0% and 30% normally is set by an
editable keypad menu item (Vent Limit). If a valid value is
provided via the network, that position is used as the desired
minimum open position instead of the keypad value.
The two position damper is driven to the closed position when
the supply fan is OFF (OFF and Startup state), the unit is in the
Recirculation state, unoccupied operation is active, or the fan
has been on for less than the Zero OA Time. As a result the
OA dampers are driven closed in night setback, night setup,
morning warm-up, and morning cool down situations. The two
position damper is driven to the desired minimum open position
in all other conditions.
The Ventilation Limit equals the keypad editable Vent Limit
and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit equals the keypad
editable DCV Limit. The Vent Limit cannot be set higher than
the 0-30%OAMax value. The DCV Limit cannot be set higher
than the Vent Limit.
Return Fan Capacity Override (RTU Airside
Economizer Units Only)
The minimum position determined by any method below
may be overridden for a variable speed return fan when the
return fan speed is below the supply fan speed by more than
an adjustable value. In this situation, the outdoor air damper
minimum position is reset up based on the schedule shown
below if normal control of the minimum position would result in
a lower value. The minimum position will be controlled in the
normal manner if that results in a higher value than determined
by the reset schedule.
When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Unit configuration
menu is set to Design Flow and the Design Flow control
flag is set to Yes, the minimum outside air damper position
is controlled to maintain the minimum OA flow setpoint.
Design Flow is only available when for RTU units with Airside
Economizers.
When the DesignFlow control flag is set to Yes, the Minimum
OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount
of outdoor air being brought into the unit using a PI_Loop
function. If the airflow is below the desired value, the Minimum
OA Position is increased and if the airflow is above the desired
value, Minimum OA Position is decreased.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER104www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Table 50: Outdoor Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
Schedule
Discharge Fan
Speed – Return
Fan Speed
<= 20% Min Fan
Differential
Between Min and
Max Differential
>= 50% Max Fan
Differential
Outdoor Air
Damper Minimum
Position
Demand Control
Ventilation Limit
Linear
Interpolation
Ventilation Limit
NOTE: If the supply fan is a constant volume fan, the
Supply Fan Speed is assumed to be 100% when
the discharge fan is on. If the Min Fan Differential
is set equal to the Max Fan Differential, the return
fan capacity override value reverts to the Ventilation
Limit. This capability is not provided for exhaust fans.
Building Static Pressure Override (Airside
Economizer Units Only)
The minimum position determined by any method described
below may be overridden for a variable speed return fan or
exhaust fan controlled by building static pressure when the
return fan speed is at minimum or the exhaust fan has been
stopped due to low building static pressure if the building
pressure remains negative. If the user elects to use this function
and the return fan has been at the minimum speed or the
exhaust fan has been stopped for a minimum return/exhaust fan
off time (default = 120 seconds) a PI_Loop will begin modulating
the Min OA Pos setpoint upward to maintain the building static
pressure at the building static pressure setpoint.
100% Outside Air Damper Control, Two
Position
100% OA two position actuators are controlled by a digital
output for SCU unit and by a modulating analog output for
RTU units.
• Digital Output - The OA damper is driven fully open when
the digital output is On and fully closed when the digital
output is OFF
• Analog Output (100% OA Units) - The OA damper is
driven to its 100% open position when the OA damper
analog output is at its maximum value and it is driven
closed when the OA damper analog output is at its
minimum value
The OA damper is open during the Start Initial period, and
it remains open during all operating states. The OA damper
remains open after the fan is turned off until 30 seconds after
the Airflow Switch digital input indicates loss of airflow. This
keeps the outside air dampers open in case there is a failure
or external override that keeps the fan running after it is turned
OFF by controller logic. If the fan is turned ON by bypassing the
controls that have it OFF, the Damper Output is NOT turned ON.
www.DaikinApplied.com105
Airside Economizer
If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer,
and the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling, the unit attempts
to satisfy the cooling load by using outdoor air before using
mechanical cooling. When the control temperature is above
the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Dead Band and the
discharge air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set
Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the
controller enters the Econo state. When the unit is in the Econo
operating state, the outdoor air dampers are modulated as
required to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.
Economizer to Cooling Operating State
The transition from the Econo to Cooling operating state
occurs when the economizer is unable to satisfy the cooling
load and mechanical cooling is available. This will occur when
the commanded economizer position indicates more than 95%
open and the discharge air temperature (DAT control units) or
control temperature (Zone control units) is above the applicable
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the applicable Cooling
Deadband for longer than the Cooling Interstage Timer.
Waterside Economizer
If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating waterside
economizer, and the conditions are suitable for free cooling,
the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using waterside
economizer before using mechanical cooling. When the control
temperature is above the Cooling Enable Set Point by more
than half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and the discharge
air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set Point
by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the
controller enters the Econo state. When the unit is in the Econo
operating state, the economizer valve is modulated as required
to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.
Economizer FDD
The economizer fault detection and diagnostics function
provides warning alarm indication of over economizing, under
economizing, stuck dampers and excess outdoor air. This
function is available when a fault detection type of OA damper
is selected in the unit configuration menu. Once it is selected
via the unit configuration menu it can be disabled/enabled via
the Economizer set-up menu.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
OAD End Switch Calibration
The outdoor air damper end switch input requires a calibration
function that captures the command position at which the
switches open and close at the closed and open ends of the
damper modulation range. This function consists of a manually
initiated sequence that strokes the dampers fully open and
then fully closed and detects the changes of state of the
switch input and records the points where changes occur.
The sequence must be initiated while the Unit State is Off and
starting with the end switch input in the closed position.
When the CalibrateOAD parameter is set from No to Yes the
following sequence occurs:
Step 1: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens.
Step 2: The damper command is then be decreased 1%
every 2 seconds until the OAD End Switch input
closes. At this point the current command % is
captured.
Step 3: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens. At this
point the difference between the current command %
and the damper end switch closed value is captured.
Step 4: The damper command is increased and held at 100%
until the OAD End Switch input closes.
Step 5: The damper command is decreased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens.
Step 6: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input closes. At
this point the current command % is captured.
Step 7: The damper command is decreased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens. At
this point the difference between the damper open
end switch value and current command % value is
captured.
Step 8: The damper command is decreased and held
at 0% until the OAD End Switch input closes at
which point the values captured in Step 2, Step 3,
Step 6 and Step 7 are written to the damper end
switch open (PosSwOpen%), Minimum switch
differential (MinSwDiff), damper end switch closed
(PosSwClose%) and maximum switch differential
(MaxSwDiff) parameters respectively.
CalibrateOAD= parameter is then be set back to No and
normal unit operation resumes.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER106www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Bypass Valve Control
This section describes the operation of an analog output used
to control a valve that allows water to bypass a waterside
economizer and flow directly into a condenser.
When the bypass valve is closed, all water flows through the
waterside economizer before it flows through the condenser.
When the Bypass Valve is open, all water that flows into the
self-contained unit flows directly to the condenser without any
water going through the waterside economizer. There are two
different methods for controlling this valve; Slave Control and
Bypass Control.
Figure 15: Bypass Control Diagram
Slave Control
Water Regulating Valve Control
The bypass valve is linked electrically to the economizer valve
so that the bypass valve closes as the economizer opens.
This provides a nearly constant flow of water through the unit
regardless of the requirements of the economizer. When there
is no cooling required, the bypass valve will be open and the
waterside economizer valve is closed allowing water to flow
through the condenser. This valve control option can be used
in either a variable or constant pumping system.
In the Cooling state, the Water Regulating Valve stays at its last
commanded position when the last compressor is turned OFF.
Bypass Control
The bypass valve and waterside economizer valve are
independently controlled. The bypass valve to the condenser
is closed in all states except the Fan only, Mechanical cooling,
and Economizer. The bypass valve is open when mechanical
cooling is required and the water is not flowing through the
waterside economizer. When the unit is OFF: Unoccupied,
both the bypass valve and the waterside economizer valve are
closed. No water is allowed to flow through the unit. This valve
control option is typically used in variable pumping system or a
constant pumping system with a bypass loop
When all compressors are OFF and a compressor needs to be
turned ON, the Water Regulating Valve must be driven open
long enough to prevent the compressor from being locked
out due to high pressure, but not so long that it is locked out
due to low pressure. The WRV Start Sequence described
below is used to make sure this is the case. This is required
when transitioning to the Cooling state from the Fan Only or
Economizer state.
In the Fan Only state, the Water Regulating Valve is normally
closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below is initiated
in the Fan Only state whenever all of the following are true:
• Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient
• Airside Economizer operation is disabled or not installed
• Either of the following are true:
–– Both of the following are true:
—— Control Temperature Source is something other
than None
—— Control Temperature > Occupied Cooling Setpoint
+ ½ the cooling dead band
–– Both of the following are true:
—— Control Temperature Source is set to None
—— DAT > DAT Cooling Setpoint + ½ the cooling dead
band
www.DaikinApplied.com107
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
In the Economizer state, the Water Regulating Valve is
normally closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below
is initiated in the Economizer state whenever either of the
following is true:
All of the following are true:
• All of the following are true:
–– Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient
–– Economizer Position is greater than 95.0% for more
than the Cooling Stage Time AND
–– Discharge Air Temperature > DAT Cooling Setpoint +
½ the cooling dead band for more than the Cooling
Stage Time
• Both of the following are true:
–– Cooling enabled AND
–– Economizer Disabled
WRV Start Sequence
Water Pump Control
The Pump output is in the on position if any of the following
are true:
• The Bypass Valve output is being driven above 0%
• The Water Regulating Valve output is being driven
above 0%
• A waterside economizer is installed and the unit is in the
Economizer state
• The unit is the Cooling state
• The Unit is in the Start Initial state and Flush Mode is set
to Yes
• The unit has a waterside economizer and a Freeze Fault
or Freeze Problem is active
• The unit has a waterside economizer and 10 minutes
have not yet passed after a Freeze Fault or Freeze
Problem has disappeared
The following Startup Sequence is followed when a stage up
from stage zero is required and the Water Regulating Valve is
closed.
Cooling: Multistage
The Water Regulating Valve is set to an minimum
(Default = 10%)
The unit enters the Cooling operating state from the Fan Only
operating state when the control temperature rises above the
Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half
the Cooling Dead Band and the discharge air temperature is
above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than half the
cooling Dead Band. The unit transitions from Cooling to Fan
only when the control temperature falls below the Occupied or
Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half the Occupied
or Unoccupied Cooling Dead Band. The unit will also transition
from the Cooling to Fan only operating state if Cooling
operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout.
The Entering Water Temperature (EWT) is measured after
the WRV has been at its minimum position for a default of 60
seconds. An Initial WRV Position is then calculated based on
the measured EWT. The Unit transitions to Cooling and the
first compressor is started when the time to initial position
has passed. The first compressor runs for an editable Initial
Operation Time with the WRV at the calculated initial position.
Control then reverts to normal PI control.
Special Procedures for Units with WRV and More
• When the unit enters Cooling, a compressor on either
circuit # 1 or # 2 must start first if one is enabled because
the pressure sensors are on circuits # 1 and # 2.
• If both circuits # 1 and #2 are disabled due to High
Pressure or Low Pressure alarms, the lead compressor
is determined by the compressor circuit that contains the
compressor with the fewest run hours.
• If both circuit # 1 and circuit # 2 are disabled, The WRV
will be controlled based on the EWT and the calculated
initial position.
• Control of the WRV reverts to normal PI control if either
circuit # 1 or circuit # 2 is enabled and its compressor is
turned ON.
• All compressors are disabled if EWT drops below the
minimum WRV temperature value by more than the
Outside air cooling lockout differential.
• Compressors are re-enabled if EWT rises above the
minimum WRV temperature value.
Entering the Cooling Operating State
Staging -DAT Control
In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned on
and off to maintain an average Discharge Air Temperature
near the Discharge Cooling Setpoint. When the load is
such that cooling capacity is being staged up and down
between two stages, this control sequence causes the unit
to operate longer at the stage that produces the discharge
air temperature that is closer to the setpoint over time which
results in an average discharge air temperature that is very
close to the Discharge Cooling Setpoint.
This setpoint may be fixed or reset as described in the
Cooling DAT Reset section. External devices such as VAV
boxes maintain the desired space conditions. The unit may
be a Constant Volume unit, but it is normally a Variable Air
Volume unit. If the Discharge Air Temperature is approaching
the setpoint, the number of stages continues to increase or
decrease until the actual temperature gets within half the
deadband. Control of cooling stages is based on two values,
the Degree Time Above and the Degree Time Below the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint. The difference between the actual
discharge air temperature and the Discharge Cooling Setpoint
is added to one of the Degree Time values every ten seconds.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER108www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
If the Discharge Air Temperature exceeds Discharge Cooling
Setpoint, the difference is added to the Degree Time Above
value. If the Discharge Air Temperature is below the Discharge
Cooling Setpoint, the difference is added to the Degree Time
Below value. These values are limited to a maximum value of
250 to prevent remaining too long in one stage because one
value or the other became very large.
When the unit enters the Cooling state the first compressor
is turned on immediately. When the unit is equipped with
evaporative condensing, the sump pump must be turned on
before any compressor is turned on. If there is a sump pump
fail condition, cooling will stay in stage 0.
With DAT staging control, there are four possible staging
transitions; Stage up after stage up, stage up after stage down,
stage down after stage down, and stage down after stage up.
These are described in the following paragraphs:
Stage Up After Stage Up:
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband,
the last stage change was a stage up, and dehumidification is
not active; cooling capacity is increased by one stage
Stage Up After Stage Down:
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband,
the last stage change was a stage down, the Degree Time
Above value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time Below
value, and the dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity
is increased one stage.
Stage Down After Stage Down:
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is less than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband,
the last stage change was a stage down, and dehumidification
is not active; cooling capacity is decreased one stage.
Stage Down After Stage Up:
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
stage timer, discharge air temperature is less than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband,
the last stage change was a stage up, the Degree Time Below
value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time Above
value, and dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is
decreased one stage.
The Degree Time Below and Degree Time Above values
change whenever a stage change occurs. If the previous stage
change was a stage up and the number of stages increases
again, both Degree Time Above and Degree Time Below are
set to zero.
www.DaikinApplied.com109
If the last stage change was a stage up and the stage
decreases due to the Degree Time Below exceeding the
Degree Time Above, the Degree Time Below is reduced by
an amount equal to Degree Time Above and then the Degree
Time Above is set to zero.
If the last stage change was a stage down and the stage
increases due to the Degree Time Above exceeding the
Degree Time Below, the Degree Time Above is reduced by an
amount equal to Degree Time Below and then the Degree Time
Below is set to zero.
Degree Time logic is not used when dehumidification is
active. When dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is
increased if the time since the last stage change exceeds the
cooling stage timer and the Leaving Coil Temperature (LCT)
is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil Setpoint. When
dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is decreased if
the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
stage timer amd the leaving coil temperature is less than the
minimum leaving coil setpoint.
Average Discharge Control Method Illustration
Figure 16: Average Discharge Control Method on page 110 is
an illustration of the “Degree Time” compressor staging control
method and is meant to show a variety of staging possibilities
not normal unit operation. Figure 16 shows nine points on a
graph of the discharge air temperature changing with time. The
Cooling Interstage Timer setting is 5 minutes.
Point 1 Assume that the controller has just staged up and
that DTA and DTB are zero. As a result, the discharge air
temperature drops and the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset.
Point 2 DTA (Area A) equals DTB (Area B). The discharge air
temperature is below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point
by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band. However,
since the Cooling Interstage Timer has not yet expired, no
staging action occurs.
Point 3 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. DTB (Area
B + Area C) is greater than DTA (Area A) and the discharge
air temperature is below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band.
Therefore, cooling is staged down. As a result, the discharge
air temperature rises, the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset, and
DTA is subtracted from both DTA and DTB. This zeros DTA and
leaves DTB equal to Area C.
Point 4 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The
discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
Dead Band. However, since DTA (Area E) is not yet equal
to DTB (Area C + Area D), no staging action occurs and the
discharge air temperature continues to rise.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Point 5 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The
discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead
Band and DTA (Area E + Area F) is equal to DTB (Area C + Area
D). Therefore, cooling is staged up. As a result, the discharge
air temperature drops, the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset, and
DTB is subtracted from both DTB and DTA. This zeros both DTA
and DTB since they are equal. Note that the elapsed time since
the last stage change in Figure 16 is 6.3 minutes.
Point 6 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Because the
cooling load is now increasing, the discharge air temperature
does not fall below the Effective Discharge
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
Dead Band. No staging action occurs for two reasons: (1) the
discharge air temperature is within the Discharge Cooling
Dead Band and (2) DTB (Area H) is not yet equal to DTA
(Area G). Even if the discharge air temperature falls below
the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half
the Discharge Cooling Dead Band (as shown just after Point
6), a stage down does not occur because DTB remains less
than DTA. The discharge air temperature starts rising again
because the load is increasing.
Point 7 The discharge air temperature is again above the
Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the
Discharge Cooling Dead Band. Since the Cooling Interstage
Timer expired at Point 6, cooling is staged up. As a result, both
DTA and DTB are zeroed and the Cooling Interstage Timer
is reset. Note that DTA and DTB are both zeroed since two
consecutive stage increase actions occurred. The discharge air
temperature continues to rise, however, because the cooling
load is still increasing. Note: that the elapsed time since the
last stage change in this illustration is 11.0 minutes.
Point 8 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Since the
discharge air temperature is still above the Effective Discharge
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
Dead Band, another stage-up occurs. As a result, DTA (Area
K) is again zeroed out (DTB remains zeroed) and the Cooling
Interstage Timer is reset. The cooling load has leveled out, and
the discharge air temperature drops.
Point 9 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired at the
same time that DTB (Area M) becomes equal to DTA (Area
L). Therefore, cooling is staged down, the Cooling Interstage
Timer is reset and DTA is subtracted from both DTA and DTB.
This zeros both DTA and DTB since they are equal.
Figure 16: Average Discharge Control Method
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER110www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Staging - Zone Control
Project Ahead
In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned ON and
OFF to maintain the control temperature close to the Occupied
or Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint. Use of the Projected Control
Temperature reduces overshoot during cool down. See the
Project Ahead section for a description of how the Project
Ahead Temperature is calculated.
This section describes the Projected Control Temperature
used to turn on and off stages of heating and cooling for Zone
Control units. It is not used in DAT Control units.
When the unit enters the Cooling state or dehumidification
operation begins the unit goes directly to Cooling Stage # 1
so that the first compressor is turned on immediately.
During normal cooling operation the number of compressor
stages increases when the time since the last stage
change exceeds the Cooling stage timer, Projected Control
Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control
Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, and the
Discharge Air Temperature is greater than the minimum DAT
cooling setpoint.
During normal cooling operation the number of compressor
stages decreases when the time since the last stage change
exceeds the cooling stage timer, the Projected Control
Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control
Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling
setpoint by more than half the deadband.
During normal cooling operation the compressor stages also
decrease when the time since the last stage change exceeds
the cooling stage timer, and the discharge air temperature is
less than the minimum DAT Cooling setpoint.
When Dehumidification is active, compressor stages are
controlled to maintain the leaving coil temperature between the
minimum leaving coil setpoint and the maximum leaving coil
DAT setpoint.
During dehumidification on operation, the number of
compressor stages increases if the time since the last stage
change exceeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving
coil temperature is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil
Setpoint. During dehumidification operation, the number of
compressor stages decreases if the time since the last stage
change ecxeeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving coil
temperature is less than the Minimum Leavaing Coil Setpoint.
www.DaikinApplied.com111
In Zone Control cooling and heating operation, the Projected
Control Temperature, reduces overshoot as the zone
temperature approaches a setpoint after startup. It does this
by causing stages to stop increasing before the actual control
temperature reaches the setpoint. The rate of change of the
control temperature is calculated once per minute by the
controller and equals the change during the last sixty seconds.
This rate of change is multiplied by the Effective Project Ahead
Time and is added to the current control temperature. The rate
of change may be negative or positive so the Projected Control
Temperature may be higher or lower than the actual control
temperature. This value, the Projected Control Temperature, is
the temperature that would exist after the Project Ahead Time
passes if the control temperature were to continue to change
at the same rate for the Effective Project Ahead Time. The
Effective Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Cooling Project
Ahead Time when the unit is in the Cooling state. The Effective
Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Heating Project Ahead
Time when the unit is in the Heating state. It is set equal to
zero under all other conditions causing the Projected Control
Temperature to equal the actual control temperature
Cooling: Modulating
Modulating Cooling Control: Chilled Water
When the unit’s cooling type is set to chilled water and is in the
Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification operating
state the chilled water valve is modulated to maintain the
discharge air temperature at the Discharge Cooling Set Point
(or leaving coil temperature at the Minimum Leaving Coil
Setpoint if dehumidification is active).
Modulating Cooling Control: Face & Bypass
When the unit’s cooling type is set to Face & Bypass and
is in the Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification
operating state, the chilled water valve is driven fully open
and the face and bypass dampers are modulated to maintain
the discharge air temperature at the Discharge Cooling Set
Point (or leaving coil temperature at the Minimum Leaving Coil
Setpoint if dehumidification is active).
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset - Cooling
The Cooling DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT
Cooling Control. The reset type may be set to one of the
following:
• None: Discharge Cooling Spt is user adjustable
• Network: Discharge Cooling Spt is equal to the Network
DAT Clg Setpoint when it is valid
• Space: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Space
Sensor
• Return: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Return Air
Sensor
• OAT: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Outdoor Air
Temperature
• Ext mA: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-20
mA signal
• Ext V: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-10
VDC signal
• Airflow: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the airflow as
indicated by the variable frequency drive speed
Reset reverts from Return to None when a Return Air Sensor
opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when a
Space Sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to
None when an Outdoor Air Sensor opens or shorts.
When Space, Return, OAT, Airflow, Ext mA, or Ext V is
selected, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Max Clg Spt
when the selected value equals the Max Clg Spt @ value.
Similarly, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Min Clg Spt
when the selected value equals the Min Clg Spt @ value.
When Airflow is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and
“Max Clg Spt @” are entered as percentage values. When
Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg
Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is selected,
the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg Spt @” are entered
as VDC values.
If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min Clg
Spt @ value may be set above the Max Clg Spt @ value to
cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or
the Min Clg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Clg Spt @
value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external
signal increase.
The Min Clg Spt @ value can be set below the Max Clg Spt
@ value for all types of reset, but it only makes sense for
external reset.
When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is
changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert
to default values as follows:
• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt
@=71.0F
• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F
• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt @=20.0mA
• ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V
• Airflow: Min Clg Spt @=33%, Max Clg Spt @=100%
When Space, Return, OAT, or Airflow is selected, the reset
schedule should be set so that the DAT Cooling setpoint
decreases as the selected temperature increases as shown in
the graph.
Figure 17: Cooling Setpoint
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER112www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Compressor Control for RoofPak
VFD Compressor Operation
When an RTU is equipped with the VFD compressor option
there are two compressor circuits, one VFD controlled
compressor in circuit #2 with up to 3 fixed speed compressors
in circuit #1 depending on unit model. Circuit #2 (containing
the VFD compressor) is always the “lead” circuit. The VFD
compressor is controlled via a 0-10VDC analog output signal
from the MT III controller that varies the VFD frequency
between 25rps (0VDC) and 100rps (10VDC). The minimum
and maximum rps (VDC) values actually used vary depending
on unit size, whether or not a fixed speed compressor is
running and whether or not a special oil return boost mode of
operation is active. The following table shows the relationship
between the minimums and maximums and unit size.
Table 51: VFD Compressor Size Range
VFD Modulation Range
VFD Max rps
RPS/RDT Unit
Model
VFDMinrps/
VFDMinV
VFD and Fixed Comp(s) On
1 Fixed On
2 Fixed On
3 Fixed On
VFD1Maxrps/
VFD1MaxV
VFD2Maxrps/
VFD2MaxV
VFD3Maxrps/
VFD3MaxV
VFD Comp Only
VFDMaxrps/
VFDMaxV
LoOilBoostrps/
LoOilBoostV
HiOilBoostrps/
HiOilBoostV
100 rps
10.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
10.0 V
016
25 rps
0 Vdc
55 rps
4.0 V
NA
021
25 rps
0 Vdc
70 rps
6.0 V
NA
NA
100 rps
10.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
10.0 V
026
25 rps
0 Vdc
85 rps
8.0 V
NA
NA
100 rps
10.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
10.0 V
031
25 rps
0 Vdc
70 rps
6.0 V
NA
NA
100 rps
10.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
10.0 V
042
25 rps
0 Vdc
100 rps
10.0 V
95 rps
9.33 V
NA
100 rps
10.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
10.0 V
045
25 rps
0 Vdc
75 rps
6.7 V
75 rps
6.7 V
NA
75 rps
6.7 V
70 rps
6.0 V
75 rps
6.7 V
051
25 rps
0 Vdc
85 rps
8.0 V
85 rps
8.0 V
NA
85 rps
8.0 V
70 rps
6.0 V
85 rps
8.0 V
063
25 rps
0 Vdc
95 rps
9.33 V
95 rps
9.33 V
NA
95 rps
9.33 V
70 rps
6.0 V
95 rps
9.33 V
074
25 rps
0 Vdc
70 rps
6.0 V
50 rps
3.3 V
100 rps
10.0 V
75 rps
6.7 V
70 rps
6.0 V
100 rps
The basic compressor control sequence is to first start the VFD
compressor and modulate it with a PI control loop to maintain
discharge temperature. When the VFD compressor is at its
maximum speed and more capacity is required, the available
fixed compressor with the fewest run hour total is started (any
fixed compressors on the VFD circuit are started first) while
the VFD compressor is reduced to minimum speed. When the
VFD compressor is at its minimum speed and less capacity is
required the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total
is stopped (any fixed compressors on the circuit opposite the
VFD circuit are stopped first) while the VFD compressor is
increased to maximum speed.
10.0 V
VFD Compressor Start Sequence
On a call for VFD compressor operation the VFD Enable
output (MCB DO3) is energized (on) and the 0-10VDC analog
control signal is set to 3.33VDC (50rps) for 10 seconds. During
this 10 second initial period the VFD compressor’s internal
logic ramps the compressor to 50rps (this aids in starting oil
circulation). After 10 seconds the VFD compressor control
signal begins modulating based on a PI loop to maintain the
cooling discharge setpoint.
NOTE: In addition to enabling VFD compressor operation
the VFD Enable output is used to energize a liquid
line drop solenoid on the VFD circuit and to turn on
auxiliary ventilation fans in the VFD compressor
enclosure.
Compressor Stage Up Transition
When the VFD compressor has been operating at maximum
capacity for the cooling stage time period (default 5 Minutes)
and more capacity is required, the fixed compressor with the
fewest run hours is started (any fixed speed compressors on
the same circuit as the VFD compressor is started first). The
VFD compressor is held at is minimum value for 30 seconds.
www.DaikinApplied.com113
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Compressor Stage Down Transition
Oil Boost Sequence
When the VFD compressor has been operating at minimum
capacity for the cooling stage time period and less capacity is
needed, the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total is
turned off (fixed speed compressors on the circuit opposite the
VFD compressor are stopped first). The VFD compressor is
held at its maximum value for 30 seconds
The VFD compressor is equipped with an oil level sensor.
If low oil level is detected the compressor speed must be
increased for a time period to force oil in the system to
be returned to the compressor. The low oil condition is
communicated to the MicroTech III controller via a digital input
(EMC-X3) signal from the VFD compressor.
Dehumidification Transition During Cooling State
When dehumidification becomes active while the unit is in
the Cooling operating state the VFD compressor is set to
its maximum value and held there for 1 minute. In addition
if the VFD compressor was operating above 75% when
dehumidification became active, a fixed compressor with the
fewest run hours is turned ON.
VFD Compressor Enable/Disable
If the VFD compressor becomes unavailable normal staging
operation (based on run hours) occurs with the available fixed
compressors.
VFD Emergency Stop Output
In normal operation the VFD Emergency Stop Output (EMC
DO4) will be energized (ON). When any cooling related
alarm that shuts off the VFD compressor is active the VFD
Emergency Stop Output will be de-energized (OFF)
When the VFD compressor is ON and low oil level is detected
(digital input EMC-X3 is open) for 10 consecutive minutes
(default) or if oil boost is manually initiated (VFD compressor
must be running for manual initiation of oil boost) the oil boost
sequence is activated. The oil boost sequence is as follows:
• Upon entering into the oil boost operation the MTIII
controller logic captures the current VFD compressor
capacity and fixed speed compressor status.
• If one or more fixed speed compressors are operating
the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total is
staged OFF.
• If the oil boost sequence is activated while the
compressor capacity is less than 60 rps (46.7%) the
VFD compressor capacity is increased to 60 rps (46.7%)
and runs at that capacity for an Oil Boost Timing period
(default 15 minutes).
• If the low oil input (EMC-X3) still open after the Oil
Boost Timing period expires, the compressor capacity is
increased to the High Oil Boost value.
• If the oil boost sequence is activated when the
compressor capacity is equal to or greater than 60 rps
(46.7%) the compressor capacity is increased to the High
Oil Boost value.
• If the VFD compressor has been operating at the High
Oil Boost value for the Oil Boost Timing period and the
low oil input (EMC-X3) is still open the VFD compressor
is stopped and a Low Oil problem alarm is generated.
The alarm is also generated if the oil boost sequence
becomes active 5 times in a 24 hour operating period.
• Once active the oil boost sequence remains active until the
low oil input (EMC-X3) closes continuously for 3 minutes,
until boost mode is manually stopped via the HMI, the Low
Oil: Problem alarm is generated or the compressors are all
stopped due to normal temperature control.
• When the oil boost sequence becomes active an event
is entered in the Event Log, an event is also entered
when the oil boost sequence becomes inactive and VFD
compressor operation returns to normal.
• Once the low oil input (EMC-X3) closes continuously for
3 minutes, compressor capacity reverts to the condition
captured when the oil boost mode became active.
NOTE: This only applies when the current oil boost cycle
returns to inactive in the “normal” manner. It does
not apply for example if the oil boost cycle returns
to inactive due to the Low Oil: Problem alarm being
generated.
The High Oil Boost Value varies with unit size.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER114www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
VFD Compressor Protection Unloading Control
High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
There are several unloading control functions that limit the
speed of the VFD compressor to protect it from damage
under abnormal operating conditions. The following functions
are provided:
Normal compressor control is limited when high superheat
conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is operating and the
discharge superheat is greater than 75°F continuously for 15
minutes a High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control Event
is generated and the VFD compressor speed is decreased.
The VFD compressor speed is decreased every 10 minutes
as long as the discharge superheat remains greater than
75°F until the minimum allowed VFD compressor speed
(based on unit size) is reached. If the discharge superheat
remains above 75°F the VFD compressor is shut OFF and a
High Superheat alarm is generated.
• High Pressure Unloading Control
• High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
• Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
• High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
• Condenser Coil Splitter Coil Unloading Control
• VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
High Pressure Unloading Control
Normal VFD compressor control is limited when a high discharge
pressure conditions occur on the VFD compressor circuit. If the
VFD compressor is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is
greater than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event is
generated and the VFD compressor is slowed every 10 seconds
until either the discharge pressure falls to less than 525 PSI or
remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes. If the discharge
pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the VFD compressor is
shut off and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated. If the
OAT is below 45F at the time the VFD compressor is shut OFF
immediately and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated
anytime the discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm
must be manually cleared.
High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
Normal compressor control is limited when a high discharge
line temperature conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is
operating and the discharge Line temperature is greater than
250°F for 15 seconds a High Discharge Line Temperature
Event is generated and the VFD compressor capacity is
reduced every 15 seconds until the discharge Line temperature
falls below 220°F. If the discharge Line temperature is above
250°F continuously for 3 minutes the VFD compressor is
stopped and a High Discharge Line Temperature problem
alarm is generated. The alarm must be manually cleared.
Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
Normal compressor control is limited when low superheat
conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is operating and
the discharge superheat is less than 20F continuously for 15
minutes a Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control Event
is generated and the VFD compressor speed is increased.
The VFD compressor speed is increased every 10 minutes as
long as the discharge superheat remains less than 20°F until
the maximum allowed VFD compressor speed (based on unit
size) is reached. If the discharge superheat remains below
20°F the VFD compressor is shut OFF and a Low Superheat
alarm is generated.
www.DaikinApplied.com115
VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
If the VFD compressor is enabled (MCB-D03 is closed) and
commanded to run for 30 seconds but the controller fails to
receive the VFD run verification input (EMC-X4 is open) the
VFD compressor enable output (MCB-D03) is cycled OFF for 5
seconds ( a VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control Event
is logged)and then back ON. The VFD compressor is then
ramped to 45%. If this occurs 3 times in a 30 minute period
the VFD compressor is shut off and a VFD Compressor Fault
alarm is generated.
Condenser Coil Splitter Solenoid Valve Control
Condenser coil splitting is required on both circuits of a
VFD compressor unit to maintain head pressure during low
ambient/low modulating operation. This is accomplished with
a solenoid valve on each circuit controlled by a normally open
digital output (EMC DO1, EMC-DO2) from the MicroTech III
controller. The coil splitter solenoid valve is controlled based
on the average discharge line pressure equivalent saturation
temperature (Tc) determined from the corresponding discharge
pressure (PTD) monitored via an analog input to the MicroTech
III controller as follows:
• The average Tc is determined using a sliding average of
the previous 150 actual Tc values
• The splitter valve on a circuit is closed (energized) when
that circuit is operating and the circuit’s average Tc
remains below 83.0°F continuously for 60 seconds and
the OAT is less than or equal to 80.0°F.
• Once closed the solenoid valve is re-opened when
the average Tc rises above 105.0°F continuously for
60 seconds, the OAT rises above 80°F or when all the
compressors on the circuit are OFF.
• When the splitter coil output on the VFD compressor
circuit is closed (EMC-DO2 is energized) normal VFD
compressor control is limited. In this mode of operation
the VFD Compressor Control PI Loop remains active but
the VFD Compressor minimum allowed speed value is
increased and Low Pressure Unloading Event is logged.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Network Load Shed Control
Heating Operation
For Zone Control or Single Zone VAV units a network variable
is provided to allow for overriding the current occupied cooling
and occupied heating setpoints by an adjustable increment.
The parameters for this function are located in the Heat/Cool
Changeover Set-up menu.
When DemandShed= is set to Enabled and the Network
variable parameter is set to Active the current Occupied
Heating Setpoint value will be decreased by the heating shed
increase value at an adjustable rate set by the heating shed
rate value. When load shedding becomes active in this manner
an Auto Load Shed Event will be logged in the Event Log.
Cooling Operation
When DemandShed = is set to Enabled and the Network
variable parameter is set to Active, the current Occupied
Cooling Setpoint value will be increased by the amount of the
cooling shed increase value at an adjustable rate set by the
cooling shed rate value. When load shedding becomes active
in this manner an Auto Load Shed Event will be logged in the
Event Log.
When either the DemandShed= is set to Disabled or the
Network variable parameter is set to Inactive the Occupied
Cooling Setpoint will revert to the value it had prior to the
Network variable parameter being set to Active at an adjustable
rate set by the cooling shed rate value. When load shedding
becomes inactive in this manner a return to normal Auto Load
Shed Event will be logged in the Event Log.
When either the DemandShed= is set to Disabled or the
Network variable parameter is set to Inactive the Occupied
Heating Setpoint will revert to the value it had prior to the
Network variable parameter being set to Active. When load
shedding becomes inactive the Occupied Heating Setpoint
will return to the original value at an adjustable rate set by
the heating shed rate value. When load shedding becomes
inactive in this manner a return to normal Auto Load Shed
Event will be logged in the Event Log.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER116www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Compressor Control for Maverick II
VFD Compressor Operation
When a MPS is equipped with the VFD compressor option
there are two refrigeration circuits, one VFD controlled
compressor with up to 3 fixed speed compressors depending
on unit model. The VFD compressor must always be the “lead”
circuit or first one on and last one off.
VFD compressor modulation is controlled by an analog signal
(0 – 10 Vdc) from the unit controller. Refer to Figure 101. The
minimum VFD compressor speed is 25 rps (1500 rpm) and the
maximum VFD compressor speed is 100 rps (6000 rpm), but
the minimum and maximum limits per unit may vary depending
on operating conditions and unit model size.
The VFD compressor is a 4 pole motor design that operates off
a frequency signal from the VFD between 50Hz and 200Hz.
At Start-up the VFD compressor will automatically ramp up to
50 rps for first 10 seconds for lubrication requirements.
Crankcase heating for VFD Compressor model VZH-088 is
performed by the VFD via DC-holding current through the
motor windings.
VFD compressor modulation is additionally monitored and
adjusted in order to maintain operation within the approved
compressor operating envelope.
If the VFD compressor were to become inoperative, any other
compressors on the VFD circuit will be disabled. The unit can
continue to operate on the remaining fixed speed compressors
of the non-VFD circuit until the unit can be serviced.
When the VFD compressor is at its maximum speed and
more capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor is started
while the VFD compressor is reduced to minimum speed at
which point it resumes modulating to maintain the discharge
temperature. When the VFD compressor is at its minimum
speed and less capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor
is turned off while the VFD compressor is increased to
maximum speed at which point it resumes modulating to
maintain discharge temperature.
Figure 18: VFD Compressor Modulation Signal
Table 52: VFD Compressor Modulation Ranges
VFD Modulation Range
VFD Max rps
MPS Unit Model
VFD Min rps/
VFD Min V
VFD and Fixed Comp(s) On
1 Fixed On
2 Fixed On
3 Fixed On
VFD1Max rps/
VFD1MaxV
VFD2Max rps/
VFD2MaxV
VFD3Max rps/
VFD3MaxV
VFD Comp Only
VFDMax rps/
VFDMaxV
OilBoostrps/
OilBoostV*
026
39 rps / 0 Vdc
60 rps / 4.0 V
55 rps / 4.0 V
NA
70 rps / 6.0 V
70 rps / 4.0 V
030
39 rps / 0 Vdc
100 rps / 8.7 V
80 rps / 7.3 V
NA
100 rps / 10.0 V
100 rps / 7.3 V
035
39 rps / 0 Vdc
100 rps / 8.7 V
80 rps / 7.3 V
NA
100 rps / 10.0 V
100 rps / 7.3 V
040
39 rps / 0 Vdc
85 rps / 8.0 V
85 rps / 8.0 V
80 rps/ 7.3 V
100 rps / 10.0 V
100 rps / 7.3 V
050
39 rps / 0 Vdc
85 rps / 8.0 V
85 rps / 8.0 V
80 rps/ 7.3 V
100 rps / 10.0 V
100 rps / 7.3 V
* High and Low Oil Boost are explained on page 136
www.DaikinApplied.com117
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
VFD Compressor Control
Dehumidification Transition During Cooling State
Control of the VFD compressor is accomplished with a digital
output enable signal and a 0-10VDC analog modulating
control signal.
When dehumidification operation becomes active while the
unit is in the Cooling operating state, The VFD compressor
is ramped to its maximum capacity. If the VFD capacity at
this point is already above 75% of its full modulation a fixed
compressor is also turned on. The compressors are held at this
capacity for 1 minute before normal modulation resumes, to
maintain leaving coil temperature (LCT).
General VFD Compressor Start Sequence
On a call for VFD compressor operation the VFD enable
output is energized (on) and the 0-10VDC analog control
signal is set to 3.33VDC (50 rps) for 10 seconds. During this
10 second initial period the VFD compressor’s internal logic
ramps the compressor to 50 rps to insure compressor startup oil
lubrication. After 10 seconds the VFD compressor control signal
begins modulation to maintain the cooling discharge set point.
NOTE: In addition to enabling VFD compressor operation
the VFD enable output is used to energize the liquid
line drop solenoid on the VFD circuit. (Only for Low
Ambient Option)
Compressor Stage Up Transition
When the VFD compressor has been operating at maximum
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call
for more cooling capacity the following transition sequence is
followed when staging up.
During each fixed compressor stage UP sequence, the VFD
compressor speed is reduced to its minimum, as a fixed speed
compressor is turned on. Note that the VFD compressor
speed range is extended for these staging points to assure
smooth transition and to minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the
VFD compressor is overdriven (higher speed than normal full
load rating speed) before staging up a fixed compressor. The
VFD is held at minimum speed for 30 seconds before normal
modulation resumes.
Compressor Stage Down Transition
When the VFD compressor has been operating at minimum
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call
for less capacity the following transition sequence is followed
when staging down.
During each fixed speed compressor stage DOWN sequence,
the VFD compressor speed is increased to maximum speed
(which varies with unit size and number of operating fixed
compressors) as a fixed speed compressor is turned off. Note
that the VFD compressor speed range has been extended
for these staging points to assure smooth transition and to
minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the VFD compressor will be
overdriven (higher speed than normal full load rating speed)
when staging down a fixed compressor.
• VFD compressor will load up completely before starting
any fixed speed compressors to achieve LCT of 45F
(default) with the VFD compressor option. LCT may be
set between 45F to 52F.
• If reheat signal is at 100% for 10 minutes and the unit is
unable to raise the DAT to desired point, the controller
will stage off 1 fixed compressor and modulate the VFD
compressor speed to achieve the DAT set point.
Oil Balance/Boost Operational Sequence
When a low oil level is indicated in the VFD compressor sump,
the unit switches to either an oil balance or oil boost state. The
VFD compressor speed is increased during these modes to
promote the return of refrigerant oil to the VFD compressor.
To avoid short cycling of the oil balance/boost sequence, no
action is taken until a low oil indication has been present for 5
consecutive run minutes.
The unit determines whether to enter the oil balance or oil
boost mode based on the running conditions when a low oil
indication is experienced. The balance mode is only used when
a VFD compressor is part of a tandem compressor set. The
balance mode is usually entered first, and is utilized to move
oil from the fixed speed compressor to the VFD compressor. If
this mode fails to resolve the low oil indication issue, the unit
will then go into the boost mode. The boost mode is utilized
to return oil from the refrigerant system to the compressors.
VFD compressors that are not part of a tandem compressor
arrangement will skip the balance mode and only utilize the
boost mode.
The balance mode will be entered if the VFD compressor is
part of a tandem compressor arrangement and the fixed speed
compressor is running, and there is a low oil indication. Upon
entering the oil balance mode the fixed speed compressor is
turned off and the VFD compressor speed is increased to the
oil boost value shown in Table 20. The VFD compressor runs
at this condition until the optical oil sensor verifies that oil is
present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit Controller default is set
for a 10 minute max balance.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER118www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
If the oil balance mode fails to resolve the low oil condition,
or the fixed speed compressor was not running when the low
oil indication occurred, or the VFD compressor was not part
of a tandemized compressor set, when the low oil indication
occurred, the unit will enter boost mode
Upon entering oil boost mode, the VFD compressor speed is
increased to the oil boost value shown in Table 20. If the VFD
compressor is part of a tandem arrangement, the fixed speed
compressor is started as well. The VFD compressor runs
at this condition until the optical oil sensor verifies that oil is
present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit Controller default is set
for a 10 minute max boost.
During the oil balance/boost sequence the DAT temperature is
overridden to allow the VFD compressor to continue operating
until oil balance/boost sequence termination.
If one or more fixed speed compressors on the non VFD
compressor circuit is operating, and the fixed speed
compressor on the VFD compressor circuit was not already
running when entering the oil boost mode, one fixed speed
compressor on the non VFD compressor circuit will be turned
off to minimize the disturbance to the DAT.
Oil balance/boost sequences and durations are logged in the
unit controller.
If low oil indication does not clear, the VFD compressor will be
shut down and oil level will be monitored for an additional 15
minutes. If low oil indication still does not clear within these 15
minutes, the VFD compressor will be locked out on alarm.
The low oil problem is also generated and the VFD compressor
circuit is disabled if the oil boost sequence is initiated more
than 4 times in a 24 hour period. If the oil balance/boost
sequence successfully restores the VFD compressor oil level
the fixed compressor stage is returned to its pre-oil balance/
boost condition and normal compressor sequencing and
modulation resumes
www.DaikinApplied.com119
VFD Compressor Protection Unloading Control
There are several modulating control functions that adjust the
speed control range of the VFD compressor to protect it from
damage under abnormal operating conditions. The following
functions are provided by the unit controller
• High Pressure Unloading Control
• High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
• High/Low Discharge Superheat Control
• Condenser Coil Splitter Valve Control (For Low Ambient
Option)
High Pressure Unloading Control
The VFD compressor has an upper operating sat discharge
pressure limit of 575 PSIG. If the discharge pressure exceeds
575 PSIG, the compressor speed is reduced 1 rps every 10
seconds until the discharge pressure is at or below 575 psig.
If the discharge pressure does not drop below 575 PSIG with
the VFD compressor operating at minimum speed (30 rps), the
compressor is locked out on alarm.
In addition, when the VFD compressor is operating above a
sat discharge pressure of 525 PSIG, the VFD compressor
maximum speed is limited to 90 rps and the minimum speed is
limited to 30 rps.
A high side pressure transducer is standard on the VFD circuit
allowing the discharge pressure of the refrigerant circuit to be
viewed at the unit controller display.
If the unit controller needs to reduce the compressor speed in
order to limit discharge pressure, the action is recorded in unit
controller event log section.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
High Superheat
A compressor discharge temperature sensor (Thermistor) is
installed on the VFD compressor as standard. The temperature
is used to measure discharge temperature and superheat
levels at the VFD compressor discharge.
If the VFD compressor discharge superheat rises to 75F for 10
consecutive minutes, the VFD compressor speed is reduced
by 10 rps increments down to a 40 rps operating speed.
Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if
superheat remains above 75F, the VFD compressor speed is
decreased an additional 10 rps. When compressor discharge
superheat level is at 75F or below, the compressor speed is no
longer decreased. If speed correction resolves problem,
If the compressor discharge temp reaches 250F, the VFD
compressor speed is reduced by 10 rps and monitored for
3 additional minutes. The unit controller will continue to
reduce VFD compressor speed by 10-rps increments until
the discharge temp drops below 250F. If the VFD compressor
discharge temp reaches 250F a warning will be logged in the
controller. If reduced compressor speed does not resolve the
issue, the VFD compressor is shut down and allowed to cool
for 30 minutes. The VFD compressor is then re-started and if
the discharge temperature cannot be held under 250F, the VFD
compressor is locked out. The root cause may be connected
to a number of issues (low charge, blocked condenser coil,
condenser fan failure, malfunctioning TEV, etc.) and service is
needed.
The VFD compressor discharge Temp has an upper limit of
275F. The VFD compressor will be shut down if discharge temp
reaches 275F.
NOTE: The fixed speed compressor circuit does not contain
this feature.
Low/High Discharge Superheat
With the high side pressure transducer and discharge
thermistor, the unit controller is capable of monitoring the
variable speed compressor discharge superheat. This feature
protects the VFD compressor against flood back, undercharged
conditions, overcharged conditions, malfunctioning TEV,
etc. Typical compressor superheat range is 20F to 75F. The
discharge temperature of the VFD compressor can be viewed
at the unit controller display.
the unit controller will have logged that a speed correction was
needed for superheat in the event log. If decreasing speed
does not correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and
an alarm is logged in the unit controller.
Manual Control (with VFD Compressor)
For service and troubleshooting the unit controller has capability
to allow the VFD compressor to be operated manually. Refer to
the controller OM-920 for more detail.
The basic manual operations include the following:
• Start or Stop the VFD compressor
• Modulate VFD compressor from 0 – 100% speed
• Ability to energize condenser coil splitter solenoids (Only
for low ambient option)
• Ability to initiate or terminate oil boost sequence
If an electrical issue with the VFD compressor is suspected,
the winding resistance can be checked at the motor terminals.
Table 53: VFD Compressor Winding Resistance
Compressor Model
Voltage
Winding Resistance
(Ohms)
VZH-088B-X
208-230V
0.03
VZH-088B-X
460V
0.10
VZH-088B-X
575V
0.10
Low Superheat
If the compressor discharge superheat falls below 20F for
15 consecutive run minutes, the VFD compressor speed is
increased by 5 rps increments up to a 60 rps operating speed.
Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if
superheat remains below 20F, the VFD compressor speed is
increased an additional 5 rps. When compressor discharge
superheat level is at 20F or above, the compressor speed is no
longer increased. If speed correction resolves problem, the unit
controller will have logged that a speed correction was needed
for superheat in the event log. If increasing speed does not
correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and an alarm
is logged in the unit controller.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER120www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Condenser Coil Splitter Solenoid Valve Control (MPS 040
and 050 Only)
Condenser coil splitting is avaialble only on VFD compressor
circuit of a unit with low ambinet option. This feature assists in
maintaining head pressure during low ambient/low modulating
operation. A solenoid valve on each circuit is controlled by a
digital output from the MicroTech III controller.
The coil splitter solenoid valve is controlled based on the
average discharge line pressure equivalent saturation
temperature determined from the corresponding discharge
pressure transducer monitored via an analog input to the
MicroTech III controller.
The splitter solenoid valve on each circuit is normally open
(digital output de-energized). The splitter valve on a circuit is
closed (energized) when that circuit’s saturation temperature
remains below 83.0°F (250 psig) continuously for 60 seconds
and the OAT is less than or equal to 80.0°F. The solenoid valve
is re-opened when the saturation temperature rises above
105.0°F (350 psig) continuously for 60 seconds and the OAT
rises above 80°F or when all the compressors on the circuit are
OFF.
If the average saturated discharge temp falls below 250 PSIG
(83F) for 60 seconds and condenser coil splitter solenoid coil
is energized (closed), the VFD compressor modulation rate is
increased until an average saturated discharge temp of 250
PSIG (83F) is achieved. This operation will raise the lower
modulation limit of the VFD compressor, but is needed to
keep the VFD compressor inside its operating envelope and
maintain head pressure for TEV control.
VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
If the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
30 seconds and the controller fails to receive the VFD run
verification input, VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control is
activated. When this function is active, VFD compressor enable
output will be turned OFF for 5 seconds and then turned
ON and ramp VFD compressor speed to 60Hz. If controller
receives a VFD run verification input, a log event is set on VFD
Emergency Stop Control. If controller fails to receive the VFD
run verification input after 3 attempts in 30 minutes, the VFD
compressor is locked out and the problem is logged.
Once active the VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
function remains active until one of the conditions are met.
• VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
30 seconds and VFD compressor status Input is ON
• VFD compressor is OFF
If the controller fails to receive the VFD run verification input
after the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON
for 30 seconds, the circuit is shut OFF on VFD Compressor
Emergency Stop Control alarm.
Whenever this protection function becomes active a VFD
Compressor Emergency Stop Control event is recorded in the
Event Log with date and time stamp. Whenever this protection
function returns to normal a VFD Compressor Emergency Stop
Control return to normal event is recorded in the Event Log
with date and time stamp.
When the condenser coil splitter is energized (closed) and the
VFD compressor discharge pressure is below 250 PSIG, the
VFD compressor speed is increased by 5rps increments every
30 seconds until the discharge pressure exceeds 250 PSIG.
When the VFD compressor reaches 250 PSIG, this speed
becomes the new minimum speed of the VFD compressor. As
the discharge pressure rises above 250 PSIG, the minimum
allowable compressor speed is decreased in 5 rps increments
every 30 seconds.
If the condenser coil splitter valve is closed and the VFD
compressor discharge remains below 250 PSIG for 15
minutes the circuit is locked out and an alarm is logged in the
unit controller.
If a speed correction was performed to increase the
compressor discharge pressure, there will be a record of the
action in the unit controller under the event log.
www.DaikinApplied.com121
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Condenser Fan Operation for Variable Speed Compressor Low Ambient Option
(MPS 040 and 050 Only)
Daikin’s head pressure control operates by modulating the
motor speed of one condenser fan on the VFD compressor
refrigeration circuit in response to the condenser pressure.
VFD compressor refrigerant circuit contains a solenoid valve
that blocks refrigerant flow to half of the condenser coil, which
effectively removes 50% of the condenser surface from the
circuit for low load/low ambient conditions.
Figure 19: R-410A Speedtrol
This option allows for mechanical cooling operation down to 0F
(-18C). The VFD option senses refrigerant head pressure and
varies the fan speed accordingly. When the pressure rises, the
SpeedTrol increases the speed of the fan, when the pressure
falls. SpeedTrol decreases the speed of the fan.
The VFD throttling range is 250 to 400 psig, fixed, with a
corresponding fan speed range of 10Hz to 60Hz. The fan
motor is a three-phase motor, identical to the unit voltage
(208V to 575V) and is controlled by a variable frequency
drive. The variable frequency drive receives a signal from a
pressure transducer and varies the speed of the condenser fan
accordingly.
The SpeedTrol arrangement for VFD compressors is also
employing “Start-Stop control by Speed reference Level” in
which the VFD will stop the condenser fan motor under certain
conditions. If the head pressure were to fall below 250 PSIG
with the condenser fan operating at minimum speed of 10Hz
(possibly due to a low ambient or high wind condition) the
VFD will shut down the condenser fan. The VFD will restart
the condenser fan at 20 Hz if head pressure rises to a level
above 250 PSIG. In addition to modulating fan speed, a
refrigerant solenoid valve is included in circuit #1. Operation of
the solenoid valve is based on head pressure. If the average
condensing pressure falls below 250 PSIG (83F sat) for 60
seconds, the condenser solenoid valve closes, effectively
removing 50% of the condensing surface. If the averaging
condensing pressure rises above 350 PSIG (105F sat) for 60
seconds, the condenser solenoid valve is opened, activating
the entire condenser surface. The solenoid valve is disabled
above an outdoor ambient of 80F. The solenoid valve is in a
normally open configuration.
Figure 20: Speedtrol Operating Characteristics (for
Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Units)
Figure 21: Speedtrol Operating Characteristics (for
Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Units with Start-Stop
Control)
Refer to Figure 19 for wiring schematics of SpeedTrol.
Refer to Figure 20 and Figure 21 for SpeedTrol operating
characteristics.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER122www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Variable Frequency Drive for VFD Compressor
WARNING
Never bypass the compressor drive or directly connect
the VFD compressor to the main power supply.
WARNING
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
clockwise.
WARNING
Variable Speed Inverter Compressor
The VFD is factory-programmed and should not
be modified in the field. Any modifications will void
the warranty. Compressors are compatible with the
manufacturer’s VFD only.
The compressor drive used for this option is a special series
(CDS 303) that is intended for use with an IPM compressor
motor and cannot be replaced with any off the shelf VFD.
The compressor drive is mounted in the main control box.
The compressor drive and the LCP (local control panel) are
preset with parameters from the factory and should not need
to be changed in the field. The LCP is removable and is
interchangeable with any of the compressor drives used by
any of the VFD compressors. If the need arises to replace the
compressor drive, the parameters can be downloaded from the
LCP to the new compressor drive.
Basic Operation of Compressor Drive:
Start= Connect terminals 12 & 18 for minimum of 5 secs,
connect terminals 12 &27 and terminals 13 &37
Stop= Disconnect terminals 12 & 27
Emergency Stop= Disconnect terminals 13 & 37
Control/Modulation= 0 to 10Vdc signal to terminals 53 & 55
Run Verification= A contact closure from relay 02 (terminals
04 & 05) is provided when drive is running
Oil Injection= A contact closure from relay 01 (terminals 01 &
02) is provided when compressor speed is greater than 50 rps
(3000 rpm) which energizes the oil solenoid coil.
The compressor drive contains protection for the compressor
against short circuits at the compressor terminals, overload
protection , phase loss and earth faults. The compressor drive
is protected against short-circuits.
Table 54: Compressor Drive Model & Frame Size
Compressor
Model
Drive Model
VZH-088B
Frame Size
208-230V
460V
CDS303-15kW
B4
B3
VZH-117B
CDS303-18kW
C3
B4
VZH-170B
CDS303-22kW
C3
B4
Refer to the VFD operational manual for more information.
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
clockwise and must be connected as shown in the unit
schematic.
The compressor drive is preset for an open loop configuration
with 0-10Vdc reference corresponding to 1500-6000 Rpm.
The compressor drive generates a soft start with an initial ramp
of 2 seconds. In-rush current (or LRA) to the VFD compressor
is typically not more than a few percent more than rated
nominal Current.
Compressor Speed, modulation signal %, frequency signal,
compressor amperage are all displayed in real time on the
compressor drive screen. Alarms and descriptions will also be
visible on the compressor drive screen.
www.DaikinApplied.com123
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Variable Speed Scroll Compressor
WARNING
Figure 22: Compressor Nameplate Information
The compressor must only be used for its designed
purpose(s) and within its scope of application (refer
to the Operating Limits). Consult the Application
Guidelines. Under all circumstances, the EN378 (or
other applicable local safety regulations) requirements
must be fulfilled.
Daikin units with variable speed inverter compressor are
engineered with fixed speed compressor(s) in such a way
that the unit delivers only the required energy to satisfy space
conditions and provides you with exceptional energy savings.
It improves comfort through precise temperature and humidity
control. Variable speed compressor enhances energy efficiency
and capable of providing unit capacity modulation down to 20%
and reduces compressor cycling and wear on compressor.
Daikin rooftop units with variable speed Inverter compressors
are provided with Internal Permanent Magnet (IPM) motors.
Compressors are designed to vary capacity by modulating
the speed of the scroll set. The speed ratio for the IPM motor
compressor is 4:1 (25 rps to 100 rps). Condenser fans staging
and an oil management/monitoring system are provided for
reliable operation. The VFD compressor will always be on the
“lead” circuit and will be the first one ON and last one OFF.
A.
Model number
B.
Serial number
C.
Refrigerant
D.
Supply voltage to CDS303 frequency converter
E.
Housing service pressure
F.
Factory charged lubrication
G.
Compressor frequency and MaxMust trip current
Figure 23: Compressor Components
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER124www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Oil Injection Control
Optical Oil Level Sensor
The VFD compressor contains an oil injection valve and
solenoid (SV11) as standard. The oil injection valve provides
lubrication to the scroll set under low speed/low refrigerant
velocity situations. The oil injection valve is a normally closed
valve. Below 50 rps (100 Hz) the valve is closed and directs oil
to the scroll set suction port. Above 50 rps (100 Hz) the solenoid
is bypassed and sends oil into sump. The oil injection valve/
solenoid is mounted directly on the compressor and is controlled
by the Compressor VFD (relay 1 output, terminals NO & Com).
The coil voltage for the oil injection solenoid is 24 Vac.
An optical oil sensor is used to monitor oil level in VFD
compressor sump. The sensor is mounted directly to a fitting
on the VFD compressor shell and can be removed without
having to depressurize/reclaim the refrigeration system.
Optical oil indication signal is sent to MTIII Expansion Module
‘C’ (terminals X3 & M). Normal oil indication will provide a
contact closure from relay R40. Relay R40 will de-energize
during low oil indication, removing signal to terminal X3 and
will start the unit in an oil boost sequence. Refer to Figure 26
and Figure 27
The coil can be removed if required by carefully prying off
the valve stem. The wiring connector is attached to the coil
by a screw in the center of the housing. Refer to Figure 24
and Figure 25.
Figure 26: Sightglass for Optical Oil Sensor/Switch
Figure 24: Assembly Components
Figure 27: Optical Oil Level Sensor/Switch
Electrical Connections and Wiring
Basic Connections
Figure 25: Oil Injection Control Dismanteling
Depending on the frequency converter version, the physical
position of individual connectors may differ. Always make sure
that the compressor terminals, U, V and W are connected to
the frequency converter terminals, 96, 97 and 98 respectively.
The compressor motor cable is shielded and the armoured
part of the cable is connected to a ground on both cable ends;
at the side of the compressor and at the side of the frequency
converter.
www.DaikinApplied.com125
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Condenser Fan Control
RPS Units
There are up to four condenser fans per circuit. The first fan on
each circuit is always turned on when any compressor on the
circuit is turned on through auxiliary switches on the compressor
contactors. The second two fans on each circuit (if applicable)
are controlled by outputs from the Main Controller. These are
controlled via Condenser Fan Output 1 and Condenser Fan
Output 2. The last fan on each circuit (if applicable) is controlled
by an external refrigerant pressure switch.
Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned ON when any
compressor is ON and the OAT rises above the Condenser
Fan B Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned OFF
when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops below the
Condenser Fan 2 Set Point by more than the Condenser
Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays allow
operation of condenser fans associated with a specific
circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is ON.
Condenser Fan Output 1 is turned ON when any
compressor on is on and the OAT rises above the
Condenser Fan A Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 1 is
turned OFF when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops
below the Condenser Fan 1 Set Point by more than the
Condenser Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays
allow operation of condenser fans associated with a specific
circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is ON.
Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned ON when any
compressor is ON and the OAT rises above the Condenser
Fan 3 Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned OFF
when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops below the
Condenser Fan 3 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan
Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays allow operation of
condenser fans associated with a specific circuit only when a
compressor on that circuit is ON.
The Condenser Fan default setpoints vary by unit size according to the following tables:
Table 55: 410A Condenser Fan Setpoints
Unit
Size
015
016
020
021
025
026
030
031
035
040
042
045
050
051
060
062
063
068
070
071
075
079
080
081
085
090
091
100
101
105
110
120
125
130
140
CondFanOutput1
CondFanOutput2
PC13/PC231
(MCB-DO7)
(MCB-DO8)
Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential
70
5
—
—
—
—
75
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
75
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
75
5
—
—
—
—
75
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
75
5
—
—
90
35
75
5
—
—
90
35
65
5
85
5
90
35
65
5
80
5
90
35
75
5
—
—
90
35
75
5
—
—
90
35
70
5
—
—
90
35
60
5
85
5
90
35
60
5
85
5
90
35
60
5
85
5
90
35
60
5
85
5
90
35
50
5
80
5
90
35
65
5
90
5
90
35
65
5
85
5
90
35
65
5
85
5
90
35
60
5
85
5
90
35
55
5
80
5
90
35
Table 56: R22 Condenser Fan Setpoints
Unit
Size
015
018
020
025
030
036
040
045
050
060
070
075
080
090
105
CondFanOutput1
CondFanOutput2
CondFanOutput3
(MCB-DO7)
(MCB-DO8)
(MCB-DO6)
Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential
60
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
70
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
25
5
—
—
70
5
40
5
—
—
70
5
65
5
0
5
75
5
65
5
0
5
75
5
65
5
0
5
75
5
0
5
70
5
45
5
Table 57: R407C Condenser Fan Setpoints
Unit
Size
015
018
020
025
030
036
040
045
050
060
070
075
080
090
105
CondFanOutput1
CondFanOutput2
CondFanOutput3
(MCB-DO7)
(MCB-DO8)
(MCB-DO6)
Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential
60
5
—
—
—
—
0
5
—
—
—
—
0
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
65
5
—
—
—
—
60
5
—
—
—
—
55
5
—
—
—
—
50
5
—
—
—
—
15
5
—
—
70
5
30
5
—
—
70
5
65
5
0
5
75
5
65
5
0
5
75
5
50
5
0
5
75
5
0
5
70
5
35
5
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER126www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
MPS Standard Condenser Fan Control
Standard Condenser Fan Control
Two, three or four condenser fans are provided. Two
condenser fans are provided on 15, 17.5, 20 and 25 ton units.
Three condenser fans are provided on 26, 30 and 35 ton units.
Four condenser fans are provided on 40 and 50 ton units. The
first condenser fan is always turned ON when any compressor
is turned ON using compressor contactor auxiliary switches
external to the controller.
When two condenser fans are provided, the second condenser
fan (CondFanOutA) is turned ON when the OAT rises above
the Condenser Fan 1 Set Point. This fan is turned OFF when
the OAT drops below the setpoint by more than the Condenser
Fan Differential (Default = 5°F).
When three condenser fans are provided, the second
condenser fan is turned ON when the OAT rises above the
Condenser Fan 1 Set Point and the third fan is turned ON
when the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan 2 Set Point.
These fans are turned OFF when the OAT drops below that
corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser Fan
Differential (Default = 5°F).
When four condenser fans are provided, there are two
different methods for control due to a redesign of the model
040 and 050.
When the “old” four condenser fan method is used (Condenser
Control=Standard Method 1) is used, two outputs (Condenser
Fan Output1 and Condenser Fan Output 2) on the controller
are used to provide three additional stages as shown in Table
58. The second through fourth stages are turned on when the
corresponding setpoint is exceeded by the OAT and turned
OFF when the OAT drops below the corresponding setpoint by
more than the Condenser Fan Differential (Default = 5°F).
When the “new” four condenser fan method is used
(Condenser Control=Standard Method 2), the condenser
fan control is circuit specific. The first fan on each circuit is
turned ON using compressor contactor auxiliary switches.
The second fan on each circuit is turned ON if a compressor
in the circuit is ON and the OAT is above the corresponding
condenser fan setpoint and is turned off when the OAT drops
below the corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser
Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). Condense Fan 1 Setpoint
corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 1 and Condenser Fan
2 Setpoint corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 2.
The default condenser fan setpoints vary by unit size as
indicated in Table 59:
Table 59: CondenserFan Setpoints
Unit Size
Condenser Fan Setpoints
Cond Fan 1 Spt
Cond Fan 2 Spt
Cond Fan Spt
15
70°F/21.11°C
—
—
17
70°F/21.11°C
—
—
20
65°F/21.11°C
—
—
25
65°F/21.11°C
—
—
26
40°F/4.44°C
60°F/15.56°C
—
30
40°F/4.44°C
60°F/15.56°C
—
35
35°F/1.67°C
60°F/15.56°C
—
40 (Cond Ctrl=Std
Method 1)
25°F/-3.89°C
45°F/7.22°C
60°F/15.56°C
50 (Cond Ctrl=Std
Method 1)
35°F/1.67°C
45°F/7.22°C
55°F/12.78°C
40 (Cond Ctrl=Std
Method 2)
70°F/21.11°C
70°F/21.11°C
N/A
50 (Cond Ctrl=Std
Method 2)
70°F/21.11°C
70°F/21.11°C
N/A
Table 58: Fan Staging
Operating
Fans (Stage)
Fan 1
(On with any
compressor)
Fan 2
(Cond Fan
Out A)
Fan 3 and 4
(Cond Fan
Out B)
On
Condition
1
On
Off
Off
Any
Comp On
2
On
On
Off
Cond Fan
1 Spt
3
On
Off
On
Cond Fan
2 Spt
4
On
On
On
Cond Fan
3 Spt
www.DaikinApplied.com127
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Evaporative Condensing Control (RTU)
The evaporative condensing option for rooftop units uses
the heat absorbed by evaporating water as well as air drawn
across a bank of tubes with refrigerant flowing through them
to condense hot refrigerant to a liquid. Water is pumped from
a sump beneath the condenser tubes to nozzles above the
coil that spray water onto the bank of tubes. The refrigerant in
the tubes is cooled and condensed as some of this water is
evaporated when it strikes the hot tubes and is carried away
by condenser fans. Using this method, the refrigerant can be
cooled to a lower temperature than is the case with a normal
finned condenser that transfers heat directly to the air.
A unit equipped with evaporative condensers cannot operate
in the cooling state with the outdoor air temperature below
40°F. If the OAT Compressor Lockout Temperature on units
with evaporative condensing is lowered below 40°F, it will
immediately be set back up to 40°F.
The first condenser fan on each circuit is turned on and off
via ModBus communications with a single VFD. The speed of
these two fans is controlled via ModBus communications with
the VFD. These two fans always operate at the same speed.
The second and third condenser fans on each compressor
circuit are turned ON and OFF using the two outputs on the
Main Board that are used for standard condenser fans. Relays
are driven by each of these outputs so that fans associated
with a circuit that is not operating will not be turned ON.
Evaporative Condenser Compressor Staging Sequences
There are two cooling staging configurations available for
evaporative condenser units. Both employ reciprocating
compressors and so require pumpdown operation. When there
is a first call for cooling on a circuit, the liquid line solenoid
valve output is first energized and then as soon as the low
pressure switch for that circuit closes the first compressor in
the sequence is turned ON. If the low pressure switch fails to
close within the low pressure compressor delay timer setting
the low pressure alarm for that circuit is generated.
The circuit that has the fewer run hours is the lead circuit if
Lead Circuit is set to Auto. The lead circuit is changed only
when all compressors are off or at the maximum stages for the
unit. If Lead Circuit is set to #1 then circuit #1 always leads if
it is available. If Lead Circuit is set to #2 then circuit #2 always
leads if it is available.
The Staging Type can be set to either Standard or Alternate.
Standard:
The two circuits are loaded up and unloaded as evenly as
possible. When a stage up is required, the circuit operating at
the lower stage is staged up. If both circuits are operating at
the same stage, the lead circuit is staged up if it is not at its
maximum stage.
When a stage down is required, the circuit operating at the
higher stage is staged down if it is not at stage zero. If both
circuits are operating at the same stage, the lag circuit is
staged down if it is not at stage zero.
Alternate:
One circuit is loaded completely before the first compressor
in the other circuit is turned ON, and one circuit is unloaded
completely before the other circuit begins to be unloaded.
When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is not at its
maximum stage, the lead circuit is staged up.
When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is already at
its maximum stage, the lag circuit is staged up. When a stage
down is required and the Lag circuit is at a stage greater than
zero, the lag circuit is staged down. When a stage down is
required and the lag compressor is at stage zero, the lead
compressor is staged down if it is not at stage zero.
A disabled circuit remains at stage zero. If the other circuit
is enabled, it is staged up whenever a stage up is required,
and down whenever a stage down is required. If a previously
disabled circuit becomes enabled, the staging is re-aligned
according to the staging tables upon the next call for stage
increase or decrease.
NOTE: During this re-alignment, the cooling stage time
guaranteed ON and OFF times must be observed as
well as a minimum of 10 seconds between starting
more than one compressor
When dehumidification is active staging reverts to Alternate
regardless of the normal Staging Type setting. When
dehumidification is not active staging is according to the
Staging Type setting.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER128www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Table 60: Dehumidification Staging
Two Compressors and Six Stages (CompCfg=4 & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)
Circuit # 1
Circuit # 2
Stage
Comp
#1
Liq Line Valve
#1
Comp # 1
Unl # 2
Comp # 1
Unl # 1
Comp
#2
Liq Line Valve
#2
Comp # 2
Unl # 2
Comp # 2
Unl # 1
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
3
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Four Compressors and Eight Stages (CompCfg=E & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)
Circuit # 1
Circuit # 2
Stage
Comp
#1
Liq Line Valve
#1
Comp # 1
Unl # 2
Comp # 1
Unl # 1
Comp
#2
Liq Line Valve
#2
Comp # 2
Unl # 2
Comp # 2
Unl # 1
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3
ON
ON
ON*
ON
ON
ON
ON*
ON
4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
* Note: A 20 second delay will be provided after unloading compressor #1 or #2 prior to starting Compressor #3 or Compressor #4.
Pumpdown
Pumpdown is accomplished by closing the liquid line solenoid
valve on a circuit and operating a compressor on that circuit
until the circuit low pressure switch opens. The compressor
pumps most of the refrigerant into the condenser and then
shuts OFF.
When pump down is required for a circuit, the liquid line
solenoid valve for that circuit is closed (its output is OFF)
and a compressor operates until the low pressure switch
opens at which time the compressor is turned OFF. If the low
pressure switch does not open in 180 seconds, pump down is
terminated by turning OFF the compressor and its unloaders.
If a compressor in a circuit is operating, the circuit is pumped
down when the last compressor is to shut OFF due to normal
staging, or when the pump down switch for that circuit is placed
in the Pumpdown (Open) position, or when the circuit or entire
unit is shutdown due to any alarm other than the High Pressure
Alarm. Of course, the conditions for completing pump down
are met if the low pressure alarm shuts down the circuit so no
pump down occurs as a result of this alarm.
Pumpdown is also initiated if no compressors are operating
in a circuit, and the Pumpdown Switch is moved from the ON
(Auto) position to the OFF (Pumpdown) position twice in less
than 20 seconds, and the low pressure switch is closed. In this
case the first compressor on the circuit is used to pump down
the circuit.
If two compressors on one circuit are operating when pump
down is required for that circuit, the lag compressor in that
circuit is turned OFF immediately and the circuit is pumped
down using the lead compressor.
www.DaikinApplied.com129
If any unloaders on a reciprocating compressor are deenergized when that compressor is required for pump down,
they are energized and the circuit is pumped down using one
completely unloaded compressor.
NOTE: A reciprocating compressor is mechanically
prevented from pumping down the circuit if the oil
pressure switch is open.
Sump Pump Control
The Sump Pump Output is turned ON whenever the unit
is in the Cooling state and the Sump Water Level Input is
present (ON). The Sump Pump Output is turned ON before
any compressor or condenser fan is turned ON. The Sump
Pump Output remains ON for 10 minutes (adjustable) after unit
leaves the Cooling operating state before turning OFF as long
as the Sump Water Level Input is present (ON).
A Sump Water Level problem alarm is generated if the unit has
been in the Cooling operation state for 5 minutes and the Sump
Water Level Input is not present (OFF). If this occurs, the Sump
Pump output is turned off and mechanical cooling is disabled.
To prevent problems related to Sump Water Level Switch
fluctuations, there is a 5 second “to OFF” time on the switch.
If Dolphin= Yes, the sump pump is run every day to reduce
scaling. The Sump Pump Output is turned ON for one hour if
all of the following are true:
• Dolphin System= Yes
• Sump Pump Output has been off for more than 24 hours
but less than 120 hours.
• The OAT is greater than 35°F.
• The Sump Drain Valve is closed.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Sump Drain Valve Control
When the sump temperature gets too cold, the sump needs to
be emptied to prevent freezing. The Sump Drain Valve Output
is used to control a sump drain valve. This output is turned ON
if the sump temperature drops below the Sump Dump Setpoint,
default = 35°F for more than 30 seconds.
This output is turned back OFF if the sump temperature rises
above this setpoint by more than the Sump Dump Differential,
2°C (hardcoded), and the unit is in the Cooling state.
If Dolphin System= Yes and the pump does not run for five
days, the sump needs to be emptied. This would occur when
cooling is not required and the OAT remains below 35°F. Sump
heaters are used to keep the sump temperature above 35°F
when the OAT drops below that value so an additional means
of turning on the Sump Drain Valve is required. In addition to
the requirement that the Sump Drain Valve Output be turned
ON to open the valve when the sump temperature drops below
35°F, the Sump Drain Valve Output is also turned ON if both of
the following are true:
• Dolphin System= Yes
• The Sump Pump Output has been off for 120 hours or
more.
Once on the Sump Drain Valve is turned back OFF as
described above.
Separator Flush Valve Control
On units equipped with a Dolphin System the system
Separator needs to be flushed of its collected solids every
so often. An ON/OFF flush valve actuator is used to flush the
separator. Every 8 hours the Purge Valve Binary Output is
turned ON for the Separator Flush Time (default 1 minute).
Sump Temperature Control
Two configurations of evaporative condensing units are
provided. One will have two condenser fan outputs per circuit
(Unit Size<110), and one will have three condenser fan outputs
per circuit (Unit Size≥110). The two lead condenser fans are
controlled through a single VFD.
Whenever any compressor is turned ON, the lead condenser
fan on both circuits is turned ON by the Microtech III controller
sending a signal to the VFD via Modbus. The lead condenser
fans on both circuits are turned OFF when all compressors are
OFF or they are turned OFF as described in paragraphs that
follow when the sump temperature gets low.
A single Condenser Fan Output A is controlled to turn ON the
second condenser fan on both circuits. A single Condenser Fan
Output B is controlled to turn ON the second condenser fan
on both circuits. The second and third fans on the circuits are
mechanically prevented from operating when no compressor
on that circuit is operating. When compressors are operating
on both circuits, the number of fans operating on the two
circuits is the same.
The number of fans operating per circuit will increase if the
time since the last change in the number of operating fans
exceeds the Evap Condensing Stage Time and the sump
temperature exceeds the Max Sump Temperature setpoint.
This condenser fan stage increase may occur as soon as the
temperature rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature.
The temperature does not have to remain above the Maximum
Sump Temperature for longer than the stage timer.
The number of fans operating per circuit will decrease if the time
since the last change in the number of operating fans exceeds
the Evap Condensing Stage Time, and the sump temperature
drops below the Min Sump Temperature setting. This condenser
fan stage decrease may occur as soon as the temperature drops
below the Minimum Sump Temperature setting. The temperature
does not have to remain below the Minimum Sump Temperature
setting for longer than the stage timer.
After the two lead condenser fans are turned OFF via the VFD,
they are turned back ON as soon as the sump temperature
rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature setting. This
transition from stage zero to stage one is the only transition
that does not require the Stage Timer to expire.
All of the condenser fans need to be run periodically when
evaporative condensing is used to prevent damage to the
motors due to their high humidity environment. As indicated
above, the condensing fans controlled by the VFD always run
when evaporative operation is in effect so no special control
of these fans is required. The fan motors controlled directly
through the Condenser Fan A and Condenser Fan B outputs
are turned ON and OFF based on time ON and time OFF.
When a condenser fan output must be turned ON for normal
operation, the output that has been OFF for the longest period
of time is started. When a condenser fan must be turned
OFF for normal operation, the output that has been on for the
longest period of time is turned OFF.
Whenever any condenser fan is ON, a signal is sent to the
VFD to control connected fans to a setpoint. The speed
setpoint is calculated based on the sump temperature.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER130www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Heating Control
Entering Heating Operating State
Heating: Staged Zone Control
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only
operating state when the control temperature falls below the
Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The
unit transitions from the Heating to Fan Only operating state
when the control temperature rises above the Occupied or
Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than half the Occupied
or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition
from the Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating
operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout.
When the unit first enters the Heating operating state the unit
goes directly to Stage # 1.
Morning Warmup Control
The number of heating stages increases when the time since
the last stage change exceeds the stage time, the Projected
Control Temperature and the actual Control Temperature are
less then the Occ Htg Spt (minus ½ the deadband), and the
DAT is less than the Max DAT Htg Spt.
The number of heating stages decreases when the time
since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the
Projected Control Temperature and actual Contro Temperature
are greater then the Occ Htg Spt (plus ½ the deadband).
The unit does not enter a specific morning warmup operating
state to accomplish the morning warmup function. Instead
the unit enters the Heating operation state when morning
warmup operation is required. The dampers are held at zero
percent open for Zero OA Timer after the SAF starts. The Zero
OA Timer should be set long enough to accomplish morning
warmup with the dampers closed to minimize energy usage
during the warmup period.
The number of heating stages also decreases when the time
since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the
DAT is greater than the MaxDATHtgSpt.
Zone Control Units
The number of heating stages increases when the time since
the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and DAT is less
than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the Min DAT
limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband. One exception
to this is that if the current heating stage is zero, the heating
stage can increase without regard to the stage timer.
When a Zone Control Unit (Ctrl Typ=Zone) first starts in the
morning it enters the Heating operating state if the Control
Temperature is below the Occupied Heating Setpoint by more
that ½ the heating dead band. In this case The Occupied
Heating Setpoint is the “morning warmup setpoint”.
DAT Control Units
For Discharge Temperature Control units (Ctrl Type=DAC)
there are two additional morning warmup related adjustable
parameters; MWU Heating Setpoint and MWU Sensor. When
a Discharge Temperature Control unit first starts in the morning
it enters the Heating operating state if the sensor selected by
the MWU Sensor parameter (RAT or Space) is below the MWU
Heating Setpoint by more that ½ the Heating dead band. The
MWU Sensor can also be set to None. If the MWU Sensor is
set to None the MWU Heating Setpoint has no effect and the
unit only enters heating based on the Occupied Setpoint in the
normal manner.
www.DaikinApplied.com131
Heating DAT Staging or MinDAT Staging
When the unit enters the Heating or Minimum DAT states and
all heating is off, the unit goes directly to Heating Stage # 1 so
that the first stage of heat is turned on immediately.
The number of heating stages decreases when the time since
the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the DAT is
greater than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the
MIN DAT limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband.
The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied
operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based
on the unit heat/cool changeover function but the discharge air
temperature falls below a minimum discharge temperature limit
by more than ½ the deadband. The Min DAT operating state
prevents cold discharge air temperatures during what would
normally be the Fan Only operating state.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Modulating
RTU Gas Heating
Entering Heating Operating State
When a unit is equipped with modulating gas heating and is
in the Heating operating state, the gas valve is modulated
to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge
Heating Set Point. Differences in the control of modulating
gas heat are described in the following sections. On units
equipped with modulating gas heat, the Discharge Heating
Set Point is limited according to a maximum heat exchanger
temperature rise limit. This factory set limit varies depending
on the unit burner model and can be found on the gas heat
data plate attached to the unit. The controller does not allow
the Discharge Heating Setpoint to be set above the current
temperature entering the discharge fan (EFT) by more than this
maximum heat exchanger temperature rise limit.
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only
operating state when the Control Temperature falls below
the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The
unit transitions from heating to Fan only when the Control
Temperature rises above the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating
Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied
Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition from the
Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating operation
is disabled due to OA ambient lockout. When the unit is in
the Heating operating state, heating capacity is modulated
to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge
Heating Set Point.
There are several different modulating heating types available
with this equipment. There are some differences in the control
sequence depending on the heat type installed. The different
types are described in the following sections.
Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper
Control
When a unit is equipped with steam or hot water with face and
bypass damper heating there are two different methods used
for controlling the heating arrangement. These are the “Open
Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods and are described in
the following sections.
Open Valve
When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the steam
or hot water valve is driven fully open. The face and bypass
dampers are then modulated to maintain the discharge air
temperature at the discharge heating set point.
Modulating Valve
When the outdoor air temperature is below the F&BP
changeover temperature, the Heating valve is driven to 100%
open to protect the coil. The face and bypass dampers are
then modulated to satisfy the heating load. When the outdoor
air temperature rises above the F&B Changeover temperature
by a differential of 2.0ºF, the face and bypass dampers are set
at 100% open to the face of the coil and the Heating valve is
modulated to satisfy the heating load. The default value for the
changeover temperature is 37°F.
Min DAT
If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally Fan
Only operating state), the controller activates the units heating
equipment as required to prevent the discharge air temperature
from becoming too cool if the Min DAT Control Flag (DAT
units only) is set to yes via the Heating menu. The unit enters
the Min DAT operating state during occupied operation when
neither cooling nor heating is required based on the heat/
cool changeover function but the discharge temperature falls
below a minimum discharge temperature limit. If the discharge
air temperature falls below the this minimum discharge
temperature limit by more than half the discharge heating
deadband, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only to
Min DAT.
NOTE: On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT
cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts
as the minimum discharge temperature limit. On CAV
zone control units the Min DAT Limit parameter in
the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge
temperature limit.
Typical Sequence of Operation (20-1 gas burner)
When 120V power is furnished through the system ON/OFF
switch (S1), through the burner ON/OFF switch (S3), and
through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame
safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat. Whenever
power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard
will go through a 10 second initiation period before the
prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be
at minimum position during OFF cycles. Upon a call for heat
or any other time that a prepurge cycle occurs, the air control
valve will be repositioned to the maximum position for prepurge
and then returned to the minimum position for low fire start.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER132www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output
(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally
open contacts of the R20A relay close 120V power is supplied
to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its
terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower
motor (BM) and starts the 90 second prepurge cycle. The
controller will reposition the burner air valve to its maximum
open position via analog output EXPBAO_X7 for prepurge.
When the burner air valve reaches the full open position switch
(LS2) will ‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller
(EXPB-DI_X3). This digital input will initiate a 20 second timing
period in the controller. At the completion of the timing period,
the controller will begin to drive the burner air valve to its
minimum (low fire) position.
When the valve reaches the minimum position switch LS1 will
‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI_
X2) indicating the controller’s prepurge sequence is complete.
As soon as the FSG prepurge time expires FSG terminal #8
will energize relay R22 which will turn ON a digital input to the
controller (EXPB-DI-X1). As soon as this digital input is ‘made’
the controller will close digital output (EXPB-DO2) allowing the
combination gas valve(s) (GV1) to be energized.
After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10
second trial for ignition during which terminal #8 (combination
gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT)
will be energized. If flame is being detected through the
flame rod (FD) at the completion of the 10 second trial for
ignition period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be
deenergized and terminal #9 (main gas valves - GV4 and
GV5 depending on burner size) will be energized and the
control system will be allowed to control the firing rate once the
heating stage timer (default 5 minutes) has passed.
After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage
time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the
required firing rate via analog output EXPB-AO_X7. In the
event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to
detect its flame within 10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and 10
will be de-energized, thus de-energizing the burner. The FSG
will then lockout and would require manual resetting. If the
FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24
alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the
controller (EXPB-DI_X4).
When this digital input is ‘made’ the controller will drive VM1
to the closed position, de-energize digital output EXPB-DO2
and the prepurge sequence will be disabled and reset. If
the FSG terminal # 8 de-energizes R22 (EXPB-DI_X1) after
having it turned ON and the FSG is not OFF on safety lockout,
the prepurge sequence will start over. If an attempt is made
to restart the burner by resetting the FSG or if an automatic
restart is initiated after flame failure the earlier described
prepurge cycle with the wide open air valve will be repeated.
If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the
burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set
point. The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner)
that will glow to indicate operation.
www.DaikinApplied.com133
Typical Sequence of Operation (3-1 Gas)
When 120V power is furnished through the system ON/OFF
switch (S1), through the burner ON/OFF switch (S3), and
through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame
safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat. Whenever
power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard
will go through a 10 second initiation period before the
prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be
at minimum position during OFF cycles.
Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output
(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally
open contacts of the R20A relay close, 120V power is supplied
to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its
terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower
motor (BM) and starts the FSG prepurge cycle.
After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10
second trial for ignition during which terminal #8 (combination
gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT)
will be energized. If flame is being detected through the flame
rod (FD) at the completion of the 10 second trial for ignition
period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be deenergized and terminal #9 (main gas valves - GV4 and GV5)
will be energized and the control system will be allowed to
control the firing rate once the heating stage timer (default 5
minutes) has passed.
After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage
time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the
required firing rate via analog output EXPBAO_X7. In the
event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to
detect its flame within 10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and
10 will be de-energized, thus de-energizing the burner. The
FSG will then lockout and require manual resetting. If the
FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24
alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the
controller (EXPB-DI_X4). When this digital input is ‘made’ the
controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If the FSG
terminal 8 de-energizes relay R22 (EXPBDI_X1) after having
it turned ON and the FSG is not OFF on safety lockout the
controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If an attempt
is made to reset the FSG or if an automatic restart is initiated
after flame failure, the FSG prepurge cycle will be repeated.
If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the
burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set
point. The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner)
that will glow to indicate operation.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Special Start Sequence for 100% Outdoor Air Units
with Gas Heat
A special start sequence is used for units 100% outdoor air
units with gas heat. The special start sequence applies to both
Zone Control and DAT Control units. If heat is required at unit
startup, the furnace enters a special burner startup sequence
as the unit enters its Startup operating state. Pre-firing the
burner allows the gas heat pre-purge sequence to occur and
the burner to fire and warm up so that tempered air is available
immediately when the fans start.
Once a 100% Outdoor Air unit equipped with gas heat
completes one of the start up sequences described below the
gas heat operates the same for both return air units and 100%
outdoor air units.
The sequence described in the following paragraphs is initiated
for a 100% OA Zone Control unit any time during the Startup
operating state when the Control Temperature is less than
the Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint† by
½ the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Deadband or the
OAT is less than the Min DAT Limit by the amount of the DAT
Htg Deadband. The sequence described in the following
paragraphs is initiated for 100% OA DAT Control units during
the startup operating state when the Min DAT Ctrl parameter is
set via the keypad and the OAT is less than the DATClgSpt by
the amount of the DAT Htg Deadband.
The unit remains in either the Heating or Minimum DAT
operating state for the duration of the Hold Period (Default
= 240 seconds). The gas heating valve does not modulate
from its calculated value to allow the temperature to approach
equilibrium with modulating gas heating valve at a fixed
position.
The unit reverts to normal modulation of the gas heating valve
when the Hold Period has elapsed since the unit entered
Heating or MinDAT.
Return Air Units
When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the controller
first holds the gas valve at the minimum fire position (5%
or 33% depending on the burner model) until the Heating
Interstage Timer expires. Then, the controller modulates the
gas valve to maintain the discharge air temperature at the
Discharge Heating Set Point.
MPS Gas Heating
Sequence of Operation (Staged Control)
2-Stage Control
The following details the sequence of operation for the low
heat option.
The Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint
equals the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint for
Zone Control units. Otherwise it equals the Morning Warmup
Heating Setpoint (DAT Control units). The special start up
sequence is initiated during the Startup operating state.
The fans will remain off. The main gas valve is energized
so the burner starts during the Warmup Time (default = 240
seconds) and operates at low fire.
• Unit controller calls for heat
At the end of the Warmup Time, the modulating gas heating
valve is set to a calculated position. This calculated position is
based on the “Application Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint”,
the outdoor air temperature, and the Maximum Temperature
Rise of the gas heat exchanger using the following formula:
• Burner is ignited
Gas Heat Actuator Position = 100% x (Setpoint - Outdoor Air
Temp) / Temp Rise
The Application Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint is the
Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint if the control
temperature initiated the special start sequence. If the OAT
initiated the special start sequence, the setpoint is the Min DAT
Limit for Zone Control units and the Eff DAT Clg Spt for DAT
Control units. The Temp Rise is the Maximum Temperature
Rise of the gas heat exchanger that is entered at the factory
for the specific unit. After the modulating gas heating valve is
set to the calculated position, there is a HeatUpDelay (default
= 60 second) to allow the heat exchanger to heat up. After this
delay, since the unit is 100% Outside Air, the unit immediately
transitions from Startup to the Fan Only state. As soon as
the unit enters the Fan Only state, the unit will immediately
transition to either the Heating state or the MinDAT state.
• Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat
• High limit switch is checked for safe condition
• Proof of airflow switch is checked for combustion airflow
• 60 second prepurge cycle starts
• Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds
• Gas valve receives a command for stage 1 of heat
• Unit controller calls for stage 2 of heat
• Furnace DDC controller receives a stage 2 heat
command
• Gas valve receives a command for stage 2 of heat
4-Stage Control
For a unit with the optional high heat the above sequence is
followed for the first two stages. For the remaining 2 stages the
above procedure is repeated on the second furnace module.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER134www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Sequence of Operation (Modulating Burner)
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset - Heating
5–1 Gas Burner
The Heating DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT
Heating Control. The Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint
will never be set below the Minimum DAT Heating Setpoint
or above the Maximum DAT heating Setpoint on the Heating
Reset menu. The reset type may be set to one of the following:
The following details the sequence of operation for the low
heat option.
• Unit DDC controller calls for heat
• Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat
• None: Discharge Heating Spt is user adjustable
• Furnace safety switches and DDC control are checked for
safe conditions
• Network: Discharge Heating Spt is equal to the Network
DAT Htg Setpoint when it is valid
• 45 second prepurge cycle starts. Proof of airflow switch is
checked for combustion airflow
• Space: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Space
Sensor
• Spark ignitor is activated
• Return: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Return
Air Sensor
• Gas valve receives a signal to open fully
• Burner is ignited and runs for 20 seconds in high fire
NOTE: If call for heat is interrupted during this timing, the
furnace will be locked in for the 20 seconds cycle.
• Gas valve and induction blower motor receives a signal
to modulate burner output to match the unit discharge air
temperature setting
10-1 gas burner
• Unit controller calls for heat.
• Top furnace DDC receives call for heat.
• Steps 3-9 from Low Heat Option are followed.
• If top furnace is unable to meet the unit controllers DAT
heating setpoint then the furnace DDC calls for 3rd stage
of heating
• Top furnace is reduced to low fire
• Bottom furnace receives a call for heat and sequences
similar to steps 3-9 from Low Heat Option.
• Staged burner gas valve receives a signal to open 50%.
• Top furnace receives a signal to modulate the gas valve
to meet the unit controllers DAT heating setpoint.
• If stage 3 and modulating furnace are unable to meet
DAT heating setpoint then stage 4 heat initiates
• The bottom furnace stages up to high fire and the top
furnace reduces to low fire
• Mod gas valve and inducer blower motor receive a
signal to modulate to match the unit controllers DAT
heating setpoint
• OAT: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Outdoor Air
Temperature
• Ext mA: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-20
or 4-20 mA signal
• Ext V: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-10 or
2 - 10 VDC signal
Reset reverts from Return to None when the return air sensor
opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when the
space sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to None
when the outdoor air sensor opens or shorts.
When Space, Return, OAT, Ext mA, or Ext V is selected, the
Discharge Heating Spt equals the Max Htg Spt when the
selected value equals the Max Htg Spt @ value. Similarly,
the Discharge Heating Spt equals the Min Htg Spt when the
selected value equals the Min Htg Spt @ value.
When Space, Return, or OAT is selected, the reset schedule
should be set so that the DAT Heating setpoint decreases as
the selected temperature increases as shown in the graph.
When Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and
“Max Htg Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is
selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and “Max Htg Spt @” are
entered as VDC values.
If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min Htg
Spt @ value may be set above the Max Htg Spt @ value to
cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or
the Min Htg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Htg Spt @
value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external
signal increase.
When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is
changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert
to default values as follows:
• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt
@=71.0F
• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F
• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt @=20.0mA
• ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V
www.DaikinApplied.com135
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
An example of discharge temperature reset based on outdoor
air temperature is illustrated in Figure 28 (Cooling Reset Type
Flag is set to “OAT” in this example). When the current outdoor
air temperature is greater than or equal to the Minimum
Cooling Set Point Reset Value (90°F in this example), the
Discharge Cooling Set Point is set equal to the Minimum
Discharge Cooling Set Point (55°F in this example). This is
shown as Point C in Figure 28. When the current outdoor air
temperature is less than or equal to the Maximum Cooling
Set Point Reset Value (70°F in this example), the Discharge
Cooling Set Point is set equal to the Maximum Discharge
Cooling Set Point (65°F in this example). This is shown as
Point A in Figure 28. When the current outdoor air temperature
is between the Minimum Cooling Set Point Reset Value and
the Maximum Cooling Set Point Reset Value, the Discharge
Cooling Set Point varies linearly between the Minimum
Discharge Cooling Set Point and Maximum Discharge Cooling
Set Point. This is shown as Point B in Figure 28.
Figure 28: Discharge Temperature Reset Based on
Temperature
Supply Fan Capacity Control (VAV)
The speed of a modulating supply fan is controlled by a
0-100% signal provided to the VFD via an internal Modbus
network. Supply Fan Capacity Control for a modulating fan
is controlled to either maintain the duct static pressure at a
desired value or maintain a fixed speed based on a signal
provided via a network.
The choice of control method, SF Cap Ctrl, may be set to
Duct Pressure or Speed via the keypad. After the supply fan is
started, a speed signal of 33% is sent to the variable frequency
drive for the DSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds). Control
reverts to either duct pressure or speed after the fan has been
on for the duration of the DSPCtrlDelay time. The VFD speed
is not controlled below the minimum SAF speed setting (default
33%) while the fan is operating.
NOTE: Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6
drives will have a user editable maximum supply fan
hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located in the SAF Set
Up menu. This parameter can be changed when job
site conditions require the speed of the drive to be
above 60 Hz.
Duct Static Pressure Control
Indoor Air Fan - ON/OFF Control
A supply fan is provided on every unit. That may be the only
fan, but either a return fan or an exhaust fan, or fans, can
be provided also. The start/stop signal and the speed signal
for fans that are controlled by variable frequency drives are
provided via an internal ModBus network. Constant volume
supply and return fans are started and stopped through digital
outputs.
Supply Fan
The supply fan is turned ON when the unit enters the
Recirculation state. The supply fan is turned OFF when
the unit transitions to the OFF state, but it stays on for a
OffHtClDelayTime (Default- 120 seconds) if the unit is turned
OFF while DX cooling or staged heating is active. The
OffHtClDelayTime function is overridden when and Emergency
Off or Duct High Limit fault is active.
Return Fan
A return fan driven by a variable frequency drive is started
four seconds after the supply fan is started to reduce the amp
draw peak on startup. A constant volume return fan is turned
ON through the same output as the supply fan. An external
Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a delay between startups
if required.
The supply air fan speed is controlled by a VFD. The control
parameter for the fan speed is the duct static pressure setpoint.
If the duct static pressure is below the duct static pressure
setpoint by more than ½ the deadband, the fan speed will
increase. Likewise if the duct static pressure is above the
duct static pressure setpoint by more than ½ the deadband
the fan speed will decrease. Example - if the duct static
pressure setpoint is 1.2" and the deadband is 0.1",the duct
static pressure must reach 1.14 before the fan will increase in
speed. The Duct Static Pressure setpoint may be set through
the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is
changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals
whichever value was changed most recently.
Speed/Network
When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger
of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected
network or the keypad/display.
Single Zone VAV Control (1ZnVAV)
When space temperature control is selected, the supply fan
VFD is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the Control
Temperature input at the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling
Setpoint or Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint. This
control choice is designed for DAC control type and will be
used in applications where the unit will act as a single VAV box
to control space temperature. Cooling and heating discharge
air temperature control and outside air damper control will
function in the normal manner as with VAV units.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER136www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Cooling/Economizer
Carbon Dioxide Control (CO2 )
When the Unit State is Cooling or Econo the Single Zone VAV
Control PI_Loop will be set for direct acting control to modulate
the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control Temperature at
the Occupied Cooling Setpoint. As the Control Temperature
rises, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control
Temperature falls, the VFD speed will be decreased. An
adjustable Minimum Cooling Speed and Maximum Cooling
Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD.
CO2 supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that have
the Control Type set to Zone or DAC.
Heating
When the Unit State is Heating the Single Zone VAV Control
PI_Loop will be set to reverse acting control to modulate
the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control Temperature at
the Occupied Heating Setpoint. As the Control Temperature
falls, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control
Temperature rises, the VFD speed will be decreased. An
adjustable Minimum Heating Speed and Maximum Heating
Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD
Fan Only/MinDat
When the Unit State is FanOnly or MinDat, the supply fan
speed will be held fixed at the speed the VFD was operating
upon entering the FanOnly or MinDat state. This will be either
the Minimum Cooling Speed or the Minimum Heating Speed
depending on the state the unit enters FanOnly/MinDat from
Building Static Pressure Control (BSP)
Building static pressure supply fan control is available on
100% OA units that have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC.
Building static pressure supply fan control is not available if the
Control Type set to 1ZnVAV (2). When BSP is selected as the
SAF capacity control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled
to maintain a building static pressure input at a building static
pressure setpoint using a PI Loop.
A BSP Input parameter allows for selecting No or Yes for supply
fan building static pressure control. If BSP Input is set to No then
no monitoring or control based on BSP is possible. All menu
items related to BSP control are removed from the HMI in this
case. If BSP Input is set to Yes then the building static pressure
input is available for control and monitoring purposes.
www.DaikinApplied.com137
CO2 supply fan control is not available if the Control Type
set to 1ZnVAV. When CO2 is selected as the SAF capacity
control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled based on a
CO2 input. The supply fan speed varies linearly between the
Minimum PPM Speed and the Maximum PPM Speed value
as the PPM input varies from the Minimum SAF PPM and the
Maximum SAF PPM value. A CO2 Input parameter allows for
selecting None, VDC or mA as the type of input for the CO2
sensor in this case.
If CO2 Input is set to None then no monitoring or control based
on CO2 is possible. All menu items related to CO2 control and
scaling are removed from the HMI in this case. If CO2 Input is
set to VDC then the CO2 input is available for control and/or
monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in
terms of volts DC. If CO2 Input is set to mA then the CO2 input
is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the
sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.
Airflow Control (CFM)
Airflow supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that
have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC. Airflow supply
fan control is not available if the Control Type set to 1ZnVAV.
When CFM is selected as the SAF capacity control method,
the supply fan VFD is controlled to maintain a CFM input at a
Minimum Outside Air CFM Setpoint using a PI Loop.
A CFM Input parameter allows for selecting None, VDC or mA
as the type of input for the CFM sensor in this case.
If CFM Input= is set to None then no monitoring or control based
on CFM is possible. All menu items related to CFM control and
scaling are removed from the HMI in this case. If CFM Input
is set to VDC then the CFM input is available for control and/
or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are
in terms of volts DC. If CFM Input is set to mA then the CFM
input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the
sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Modulating Return and Exhaust Fan Control (RTU,
MPS)
• Maintain the building static pressure at a desired value
To set the four parameters as described, the airflow and return
vane positions are adjusted until maximum airflow and proper
indoor conditions are met. The supply fan is controlled normally
as the VAV boxes are adjusted to obtain maximum airflow. The
return fan is adjusted using the Remote RF/EF setting on the
keypad. The user then uses the key to set the Supply Fan Max
values and Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max to the observed
values. The process is repeated at minimum airflow to set
Supply Fan Min and Return Fan @ Supply Fan Min values.
• Maintain a fixed speed based on a signal provided by a
Building Automation System via a network.
Low/High Fan Differential
Four different approaches may be used to maintain the building
static pressure at acceptable levels. An analog signal is
provided to the VFD to control return or exhaust fan to:
• Maintain the speed of a return fan based on supply fan
speed (Fan Tracking)
• Vary the speed of an exhaust fan based on OA Damper
position.
Any of the first three methods may be selected for a return
fan. Building Static Pressure, Speed, or OA Damper may be
selected for an exhaust fan.
When the unit is in the OFF or Startup state, the variable
frequency drive for the return or exhaust is driven to 0%.
After the return or exhaust fan is started, a speed signal of 5%
for exhaust fan or 33% for return fan is sent to the variable
frequency drive for the BSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds)
and the VFD will increase its speed to 5% (or 33%). Control
reverts to one of the methods below after the fan has been on
for the BSPCtrlDelay. The VFD speed is not controlled below
5% (or 33%) while the fan is operating.
During non-OFF states when the outdoor air damper is closed,
the speed of the return fan is set equal to the supply fan speed.
Under these conditions, the return fan is set to 100% if the
supply fan is a constant volume fan. To provide a “bumpless
transfer” when the outdoor air damper opens the return fan will
start to control building static pressure from its speed when the
damper was closed. Exhaust fans do not use this feature.
NOTE: Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6
drives will have a user editable maximum return fan/
exhaust fan hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located
in the RF/EF Set Up menu. This parameter can be
changed when job site conditions require the speed
of the drive to be above 60 Hz.
Fan Tracking Control
For units with variable frequency drives, the return fan may
be controlled such that the return fan speed tracks up and
down with the supply fan speed. The user defines the position
of the return fan with respect to the supply fan for minimum
and maximum positions. When the supply fan is between the
minimum and maximum positions, the fan varies proportionally
between its minimum and maximum values. There are four
adjustable parameters to define this relationship. They are:
When a return fan is running slower than the supply fan it is
limited to a Lo Fan Diff value below the supply fan to prevent
the supply fan from overloading the return VFD or ECM motor
fan drive. When the return fan is running faster than the supply
fan it is limited to a Hi Fan Diff value above the supply fan to
prevent the return fan over pressurizing the return fan plenum.
Building Static Pressure Control
A PI control loop is used to modulate the variable frequency
drive of the exhaust fans to maintain a measured building static
pressure at a setpoint. The BSP Gain, Project Ahead Time, and
Sample Time are editable via the keypad
The Building Static Pressure setpoint may be set through
the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is
changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals
whichever value was changed most recently.
Speed/Network Control
Single zone VAV control is available when the unit Control Type
is Single Zone VAV (1ZnVAV). When single zone VAV control
is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan
VFD or ECM motor is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the
Control Temperature input at the Occupied Cooling Setpoint
or Occupied Heating Setpoint. This option is designed for
discharge control applications where the unit will act as a
single VAV box to control space temperature. OAT is not
allowed as the Control Temperature when SAF capacity control
method is set to 1ZnVAV. Cooling and heating discharge air
temperature control and outside air damper control will function
in the normal manner as with VAV units.
NOTE: Single zone VAV control of SAF is not available when
the Control Temperature Source is set to None.
Supply Fan (DF) Value Return Fan (RF) Value
1. Supply Fan Max
2. Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max
3. Supply Fan Min
4. Return Fan @ Supply Fan Min
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER138www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
Exhaust Fan - Speed Control
Exhaust Fan - Speed Control
The exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are
at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default
5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF
capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity
is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default
= 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan On
Time (Default = 120 seconds).
When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger
of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected
network or the keypad/display.
The exhaust fan is turned OFF when the Supply Fan is turned
OFF when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded
to less than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for
longer than the MinExhStopTime (Default = 120 seconds).
Modulating Propeller Exhaust- OA Damper Control
When the unit is equipped with a modulating propeller exhaust
fan arrangement and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control
Method is set to OA Damper, the exhaust fan is turned on at
an adjustable outdoor air damper position (default 40%), and
is turned back off when the dampers are below this setting
for more that the minimum exhaust stop time (Default = 120
seconds). When on the fan is modulated linearly between
the minimum exhaust fan speed and 100% as the dampers
vary between the Exhaust On OA Position and the Exhaust
Maximum OA Position.
Exhaust Fan - Building Static Pressure Control
An exhaust fan, or fans, driven by a variable frequency drive is
started based on building static pressure. A constant volume
exhaust fan is turned ON through the same output as the
supply fan. An external Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a
delay between startups if required.
A VAV exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are at
least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default 5%),
the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity
(default 10%), and the building static pressure is above the
building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband
for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default =
120 seconds).
A VAV exhaust fan is turned OFF when the supply fan is turned
off or when the building static pressure is below the building
static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband, or the OA
Dampers are open less than the Minimum Exhaust OA Position
(default 5%), or the SAF capacity is below the Minimum Exhaust
SAF capacity (default 10%), and the Exhaust Fan capacity is at
or below its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than the
Min Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds).
www.DaikinApplied.com139
The exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are
at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default
5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF
capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity
is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default =
5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Start Time
(Default = 120 seconds)
The exhaust fan is turned OFF when the supply fan is turned off
when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to less
than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than
the Minimum Exhaust Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds).
Staged Exhaust (MPS Units) Exhaust Fan - OA
Damper Control
When the Return Fan Type is set to 1StgExh, 2StgExh or
3StgExh and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Method
is set to OA Damper, one, two or three exhaust fans are turned
on and off based on the outdoor air damper position. Refer to
Table 61 for the number of fans versus unit size.
Table 61: Fan Configuration
MPS Unit Size
Number of Fans
15
1
18
1
20
2
25
2
30
2
35
2
40
3
50
3
The default exhaust fan ON and OFF values are as follows:
Table 62: Fan Settings
Action
Default OA Setting
Adjustable Range
Exh Fan Stg 1 ON
40%
0–100%
Exh Fan Stg 1 OFF
30%
0–100%
Exh Fan Stg 2 ON
55%
0–100%
Exh Fan Stg 2 OFF
40%
0–100%
Exh Fan Stg 3 ON
70%
0–100%
Exh Fan Stg 3 OFF
50%
0–100%
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
Troubleshooting
Fan Failure Codes
HLL = Hall Sensor Error
First occurrence:
Power fluctuations may be responsible.
Corrective: Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the disturbing
voltage.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematically search for voltage peaks.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
TFEI = Electronics Interior Overheated
First occurrence:
Too high ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Could ambient temperature have been too high?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature? If so, is the
displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is above 95°C (the electronics switches off at 105°C), double-check the
ambient temperature in each operating mode.
Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature. Perhaps use a data logger
or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
TFM = Motor Overheated
First occurrence:
Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Could ambient temperature have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the motor temperature?
• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is too high:
• Double-check the motor temperature in each operating mode.
• Check of the fan load: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and compare the
measured value with nominal data on the label. Is there any discrepancy?
• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature. Perhaps use a data logger
or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER140www.DaikinApplied.com
Operator’s Guide
TFE = Power Mod Overheated
First occurrence:
Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Do other fans (temporarily) show the same failure within the arrangement? Could ambient temperature
have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature?
• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is too high:
• Check the module temperature during operation in each operating mode (Tmodule <110°C;
switching-off temperature 115°C)
• Check the fan load and supply voltage: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and
compare the measured value with nominal data on the label. Is there any discrepancy?
• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematic search for the reason of too high ambient temperature, overload, overvoltage or low
voltage. Perhaps use a data logger.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
BLK = Locked Motor
First occurrence:
Question: • Is it possible that the motor was locked by an obstruction or ice?
• Do other fans show the same behaviour?
Corrective: Remove the reason for blocking. Caused by ice: activate the shake-loose functionality (starting with
ModBus 5) or increase the starting phase control factor.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Does increasing the starting phase control factor improve the situation?
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
SKF = Communication Error
First occurrence:
Power fluctuations may be responsible.
Corrective: Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the
disturbing signal.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: systematic search for peaks of disturbance voltage
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
www.DaikinApplied.com141
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER
Operator’s Guide
PHA = Phase failure
UzLow = DC-Link Undervoltage
UzHigh = DC-Link Overvoltage
UeHigh = Mains Overvoltage
UeLow = Mains Undervoltage
Question: Can the main voltage be measured at any spot; a data logger may be helpful.
No: Measure the voltage at the power supply input of the concerned fan.
Corrective: • Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
• If applicable, filter out the source of disturbing signal.
Repeated occurrence:
Question:
• Do other fans show the same failure?
• How often does the failure occur?
• Get big electrical consumer loads switched at the same time when the failure occurs in the
surrounding area?
• Are compressors or large asynchronous motors applied within the arrangement?
Yes: Systematic search for external disturbance voltage peaks; If applicable, usage of data logger for
a longer period and analysis of the measured values.
• Are the voltage values within the specified range?
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER142www.DaikinApplied.com
Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
OM 920-6 (06/15)
©2015 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising